Liren Large Software Subsidy 14/14.iso/s/s005/17.ddi/CMDREF/OS2_BOOK_CMDREF.INF

OS/2 Help File | 1993-04-29 | 405.6 KB | 18,214 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> High Performance File System (HPFS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Follow these rules for naming files and directories:

o The following symbols cannot be used in file or directory names:

    0-1F hex   \   /   :   *   ?   "   <   >   |   &   -

o The following reserved device names cannot be used as file or directory
  names:

    KBD$  PRN   NUL   COM1   COM2   COM3   COM4  CLOCK$

    LPT1  LPT2  LPT3  CON   SCREEN$   POINTER$   MOUSE$

o Unlike the FAT file system, which allows a name to consist of two parts (a 1
  to 8 character name and a 1 to 3 character extension), HPFS permits having
  many parts in a name if each part is separated by a period.

o In HPFS, you can use up to 254 characters in file or directory names.  This
  includes punctuation marks and blank spaces.

o HPFS supports case preservation.  This means that the system saves the name
  of your file or directory exactly as it was typed.  If you create a file or
  directory called AbcD, the system saves it as AbcD and will display it as
  AbcD, not ABCD.  However, HPFS is not case-sensitive.  You cannot use the
  same name for multiple files in the same directory.  For instance, you cannot
  create a file named ABCD in the same directory that contains an existing file
  named AbcD.

o When you installed the system, certain directories were created.  To avoid
  interfering with them in any way, do not use the names OS2, INTRO, INSTALL,
  SPOOL, DLL, BOOK, or SYSTEM as directory names.

o Unlike previous versions of the OS/2 operating system, this version treats as
  files reserved device names that are followed by an extension; that is,
  device names are only recognized as devices if they do not have an extension.

o If you switch code pages or plan to send files to other countries, avoid
  using accented characters in file and directory names.  Depending on the code
  page used, some letters might be displayed differently in uppercase than when
  originally typed.  Also, you may not be able to access the file from a
  different code page.

o The * and ? symbols can be used as global file-name characters.

o When blank spaces are used in a file or directory name, the name (including
  optional drive and path) must be enclosed in quotation marks before you enter
  a command.  For example, to copy a file named My new  FILE to drive A, enter:

    COPY "C:\OS2\My new   FILE" A:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> File Allocation Table (FAT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Follow these rules when naming files and directories:

o A name cannot contain more than eight characters. This includes punctuation
  marks and blank spaces.

o An extension can be added to a name.  The extension can only contain up to
  three characters.  The extension must be separated from the name by a period.

o The following symbols cannot be used in file or directory names:

    0-1F hex   \   /   :   *   ?   "

    <   >   |   ,   +   =   [   ]   ;

o The * and ? symbols can be used as global file-name characters.

o The following reserved device names cannot be used as file or directory
  names:

    KBD$  PRN   NUL   COM1   COM2   COM3   COM4  CLOCK$

    LPT1  LPT2  LPT3  CON   SCREEN$   POINTER$   MOUSE$

o When you installed the system, certain directories were created.  To avoid
  interfering with them in any way, do not use the names OS2, INTRO, INSTALL,
  SPOOL, DLL, BOOK, or SYSTEM as directory names.

o If you switch code pages or plan to send files to other countries, avoid
  using accented characters in file and directory names.  Depending on the code
  page used, some letters might be displayed differently in uppercase than when
  originally typed.  Also, you might not be able to access the file from a
  different code page.

o Unlike previous versions of the OS/2 operating system, this version treats
  reserved device names that are followed by an extension as files; that is,
  device names are only recognized as devices if they do not have an extension.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. Introduction ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 Command Reference describes the purpose and syntax of OS/2* commands.
Before you begin to use this reference, it would be helpful to understand how
you can:

o Expand the Contents to see all available topics
o Obtain additional information for a highlighted word or phrase
o Use action bar choices.

How To Use the Contents

When the Contents window first appears, some topics have a plus (+) sign beside
them. The plus sign indicates that additional topics are available.

To expand the Contents and view the additional topics, select the + if you are
using a mouse; if you are using a keyboard, use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys to highlight the topic, and then press the plus key (+). For example, OS/2
Commands by Name has a plus sign beside it. To see the complete list of OS/2
commands, click on the plus sign or highlight that topic and press the plus (+)
key.

To view a topic, double-click on the topic (or press the Up or Down Arrow key
to highlight the topic, and then press Enter).

How To Obtain Additional Information

After you select a topic, the information for that topic appears in a window.
Highlighted words or phrases indicate that additional information is available.
You will notice that certain words in the following paragraph are highlighted.
If you are using a mouse, double-click on the highlighted word.  If you are
using a keyboard, press the Tab key to move to the highlighted word, and then
press the Enter key.  Additional information will appear in a window.

How To Use Menu-Bar Choices

Choices are available in the menu bar and in the Services menu that help you
manage the information in the OS/2 Command Reference.  Select any of the
choices below to learn about these features.

Bookmark
     Sets a placeholder so you can retrieve information of interest to you.
     (This choice is available from the Services menu.)

Search
     Finds occurrences of a word or phrase in the current topic, selected
     topics, or all topics. (This choice is available from the Services menu.)

Print
     Prints one or more topics. (This choice is available from the Services
     menu.)

Copy
     Copies a topic you are viewing to a file you can edit. (This choice is
     available from the Services menu.)

Options
     Changes the way the Contents is displayed.

TRADEMARKS

The following are trademarks of the IBM Corporation:

o IBM

o Operating System/2

o OS/2

o Personal Computer AT and AT

o Personal System/2 and PS/2

o Presentation Manager

o Proprinter

o Quickwriter

o Quietwriter


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Information about OS/2 Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following information applies to all OS/2* commands:

command prompt           When a command has finished processing, a command
                         prompt is again displayed on the screen.

                         You can type commands in uppercase letters, lowercase
                         letters, or a combination of both.

                         From an OS/2 command prompt, you can type up to 299
                         characters (bytes) before you press Enter.  From a DOS
                         command prompt, you can type up to 127 bytes before
                         you press Enter.

                         You can process commands from the command prompt of a
                         session while running your programs in other sessions.

path and file name       Commands that allow you to enter file names can accept
                         a path (directory) name before the file name.

                         You can use a period (.) for the current directory or
                         two periods (..) for the parent directory for any OS/2
                         command that allows you to enter a path.

                         Do not put a space between the drive, path, file name
                         and optional extension.  The colon, backslash, and
                         period already serve as separators.

current directory        The current directory is the directory that the OS/2
                         operating system searches when a file name is entered
                         with no path name.  You have a current directory for
                         every drive in your system.

                         In an OS/2 session, the combined length of a file name
                         and path can be up to 259 bytes.  In a DOS session,
                         the maximum length for a file name and path is 80
                         bytes of which 64 bytes is for the path, ensuring room
                         for an 8.3 file name in the lowest subdirectory.

OS/2 has two types of commands:

internal          Internal commands run without any delay associated with
                  loading the program from disk.  These commands reside in the
                  OS/2 command processor.  Their names appear as the first item
                  in a syntax diagram.

external          External commands are on the disk as program files.  When an
                  external command is entered, the OS/2 operating system
                  searches for it in the current directory of the default or
                  specified drive.  If not found, the operating system
                  continues searching for it in the directories listed in the
                  path statement.  Their names are preceded by an optional
                  drive and path parameter in a syntax diagram.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1. File and Directory Concepts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Information on a computer is organized into files and directories.  A file is a
piece of information, like a document.  It can contain text, graphics, or
information that starts and runs a program when the file is selected.  Files
that start programs when entered at the command line or in a batch file are
called program files.  Program file names usually have extensions of .COM,
.EXE, .CMD (OS/2 sessions), or .BAT (DOS sessions).

A directory is a group of related files, like a folder containing related
documents.  A directory that is part of another directory is called a
subdirectory.  When you installed the OS/2 operating system, some of its files
were copied from the OS/2 diskettes to the root directory, which is the main
index for directories and files in the operating system. The directory you are
currently using is called the current directory.  If you stay in the root
directory, for instance, then it is also your current directory.

You can give your files and directories any names that conform to either High
Performance File System (HPFS) or file allocation table (FAT) rules.  For
details on naming files and directories, select HPFS or FAT.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trademark of the IBM Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2. How to Read a Syntax Diagram ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The first step in reading a syntax diagram is to determine the environment in
which the command operates.  Most commands work in both OS/2* and DOS sessions
although each environment affects the processing of programs and commands
differently. Commands that provide functions specific to only one environment
are identified by one of the following symbols:

 OS/2 sessions only

 DOS sessions only

A syntax diagram shows you how to enter a command so that the OS/2 operating
system can correctly interpret what you type.  When viewing a syntax diagram,
read from left to right and from top to bottom.  The command name and items
required to make the command work appear on the baseline; the items below the
baseline are optional.  A line ending with an arrowhead means that the diagram
is continued.  A line starting with an arrowhead means that the syntax is
continued from the previous line.  A vertical bar marks the end of the command
syntax.

Parameters are classified as keywords, variables, or a combination of both.
Include all punctuation shown in the diagram, such as colons, semicolons,
commas, quotation marks, and equal signs.

Specify a Sequence More Than Once:  An arrow below the main path that returns
to a previous point means the sequence of items included by the arrow can be
specified more than once.

TYPE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                Γöé
           Γöé                                            Γöé
           ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Specify Items Once in Any Order:  A stack of parameters with a return arrow
above the main path indicates one or more parameters can be specified in any
order, but each parameter can be specified only once.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ CHKDSK ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                 ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ

                              ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ  ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                         Γöé              Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÿ     Γö£ΓöÇ /F ΓöÇΓöñ      Γö£ΓöÇ /C ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                 ΓööΓöÇ /V ΓöÇΓöÿ      ΓööΓöÇ /F:n ΓöÇΓöÿ

Choose One Item from a Stack:  A stack of parameters with no return arrow means
that you cannot choose more than one from the stack.

 ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ANSI ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
    ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ     ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                Γö£ΓöÇ ON  ΓöÇΓöñ
                                              ΓööΓöÇ OFF ΓöÇΓöÿ

Choose One Item from within a Stack:  Some diagrams show a stack of parameters
within another stack.  If the inner stack has no return arrow and the outer
stack has a return arrow above the main path, you can choose only one parameter
from the inner stack.  That parameter can be combined (in any order) with any
of the parameters from the outer stack.

                                     ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                                       Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ PRINT ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ               Γö£ΓöÇ /D:device ΓöÇΓöñ
                                       ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /B ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
                                         ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                                         Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö┤Γöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ             Γöé    Γöé  Γö£ΓöÇ /C ΓöÇΓöñ   Γöé
  Γöé                                   Γöé    Γöé  ΓööΓöÇ /T ΓöÇΓöÿ   Γöé
  ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ /D:device ΓöÇΓöÿ

In this example, you can specify /D:device and /C once in any order, or you can
specify /D:device and /T once in any order, but you cannot specify /C and /T
together.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3. Using the Command Prompt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 Command Reference describes the purpose and syntax of OS/2* commands
that can be used at a command prompt. At the command prompt, type the command
in the same order that it is displayed in the syntax diagram or examples, and
press Enter to process the command.  The correct order includes one or more of
the following variables:

command            The name of the OS/2 command you want to process.

drive              The disk drive that stores the file or directory; for
                   example, A, B, or C.

path               The route of subdirectory names to follow to arrive at the
                   file you want to access.

filename           The name and optional extension of the file you want to
                   access.

parameters         The command parameters that change or enhance the original
                   function of the command.

For example, if you entered:

COPY A:MISC.ABC C:

you would copy a file named MISC.ABC from drive A to drive C.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. OS/2 Commands by Task Category ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An overview of OS/2* commands is available to you.  The commands are separated
into 6 task categories to help you associate groups of related commands and to
identify particular tasks with their appropriate commands.  More detailed
information and the syntax for a particular command can be found by selecting
the highlighted command in the listing.  To view the command categories, press
the Esc (Escape) key to return to the Contents.  Next, select the plus sign (+)
or press the + key.

Note:   For information about command diagrams, select How to Read a Syntax
        Diagram.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. File and Directory Management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following commands help you work with and maintain your files and
directories:

ATTRIB              Turns the read-only and archive attributes of a file ON or
                    OFF.

BACKUP              Saves one or more files from one disk to another.

CD or CHDIR         Changes the current directory or displays its name.

COMP                Compares the contents of the first set of specified files
                    with the contents of the second set of specified files.

COPY                Copies one or more files and combines files.

DEL or ERASE        Deletes one or more files.

DIR                 Lists the files in a directory.

EAUTIL              Splits and joins extended file attributes.

FIND                Searches a file for a specific string of text.

MD or MKDIR         Creates a new directory.

MORE                Sends output from a file to the screen, one full screen at
                    a time.

MOVE                Moves one or more files from one directory to another
                    directory on the same drive.

PICVIEW             Displays a picture file.

PRINT               Prints or cancels printing of one or more files.

RD or RMDIR         Removes a directory.

RECOVER             Recovers files from a disk containing defective sectors.

REN or RENAME       Changes the name of a file.

REPLACE             Selectively replaces files.

RESTORE             Restores one or more backup files from one disk to another.

SORT                Sorts information by letter or number.

TREE                Displays all the directory paths and optionally lists
                    files.

TYPE                Displays the contents of a file.

UNDELETE            Recovers deleted or erased files.

UNPACK              Decompresses and copies files that have been compressed.
                    (Compressed files are designated by an @ in the file
                    extension.)

VIEW                Displays online documents.

XCOPY               Selectively copies groups of files, including those in
                    subdirectories, from one disk to another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. Program Management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Programs use varying amounts of resources from the system (memory and storage,
for example).  Careful planning is required to select the correct system
configuration and to satisfy short-term and long-term requirements.  The
following commands help you manage the programs on your system:

APPEND                  Tells the system where to locate data files outside of
                        the current directory when this command is added to
                        your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.

DETACH                  Starts a noninteractive program.

DPATH                   Specifies the search path for data files outside a
                        current directory.

LIBPATH                 Identifies the location of dynamic link libraries.

MAXWAIT                 Sets the amount of time a process waits before the
                        system assigns it a higher priority.

PRIORITY                Selects priority calculation in scheduling regular
                        class threads.

PRIORITY_DISK_IO        Sets disk input/output priority for applications in the
                        foreground.

SET                     Sets one string value in the environment equal to
                        another string for later use in programs.

START                   Starts another OS/2 program in another session.

THREADS                 Determines the maximum number of independent actions,
                        known as threads.

TIMESLICE               Sets the amount of processor time the task receives
                        before it must give up processor resources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3. Disk and Diskette Management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following commands help you prepare and maintain your disks and diskettes:

ASSIGN              Assigns a drive letter to a different drive.

BUFFERS             Sets the number of disk buffers for the system.

CHKDSK              Scans a disk and checks it for errors.

DISKCACHE           Allocates the amount of storage of an additional hard disk
                    buffer.

DISKCOMP            Compares the contents of two diskettes.

DISKCOPY            Copies the contents of one diskette to another diskette.

FDISK               Enables you to partition the hard disks on your system.

FDISKPM             Allows you to set up the hard disks on your system.

FORMAT              Prepares a disk to accept OS/2 files.

FSACCESS            Changes file system access from DOS sessions.

IFS                 Installs a file system.

IOPL                Allows input/output privilege to be granted or denied to
                    requesting processes.

JOIN                Joins a disk drive to a specific path.

LASTDRIVE           Specifies maximum number of accessible drives.

LABEL               Displays the volume serial number and creates or changes
                    the volume identification label on a disk.

MEM                 Displays used and free memory in DOS sessions.

MEMMAN              Selects storage allocation options for OS/2 sessions.

SUBST               Substitutes a drive letter for another drive and path.

SWAPPATH            Specifies the location of the swap file and the minimum
                    amount of remaining disk space.

VERIFY              Confirms that data written to a disk has been written
                    correctly.

VMDISK              Creates an image file of a DOS startup diskette.

VOL                 Displays the disk volume label and serial number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4. Problem Determination ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 operating system has several utility programs to ensure better
reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS).  These tools are provided
to help in gathering information to isolate and correct system problems.  This
allows for more productive serviceability for system problems.  These tools are
intended for use only with help from your technical coordinator.

AUTOFAIL            Displays system error information.

CREATEDD            Creates a dump diskette for use with the Stand-Alone Dump
                    procedure

MAKEINI             Creates a new OS2.INI file containing default information.

PATCH               Allows you to apply IBM-supplied patches to make repairs to
                    software.

PSTAT               Displays process status information

SYSLEVEL            Displays operating system service level

SYSLOG              Starts or stops adding system event information to the
                    System Log file.

TRACE               Sets or selects system trace.

TRACEBUF            Sets the size of the system trace buffer.

TRACEFMT            Displays formatted trace records in reverse time stamp
                    order.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5. System Customization and Control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the following commands to set up your system, making choices based on your
computer type and the tasks you want to perform:

ANSI                 Allows extended keyboard and display support for OS/2
                     sessions.

BOOT                 Switches operating systems.

CHCP                 Displays or changes the current system code page.

CLS                  Clears the display screen.

CODEPAGE             Identifies the two code pages to be used for code-page
                     switching.  These code pages must be those supported for
                     the country specified by the country code in the COUNTRY
                     statement.

COUNTRY              Specifies the country code and the complete name of the
                     file that contains a set of country information for each
                     code page supported for that country.

DATE                 Displays or sets the system date from the command prompt.

DDINSTAL             Provides an automated way to install new device drivers
                     after the operating system has been installed.

DEVICE               Installs a device driver that is not on the Device Support
                     diskette.

DEVINFO              Certain statements must be added to your CONFIG.SYS file
                     to start code page switching.  DEVINFO statements prepare
                     a device (such as your keyboard or display terminal) for
                     code page switching.  Separate DEVINFO statements are
                     required for each device to be used for code page
                     switching.

DEVICEHIGH           Loads DOS device drivers into upper memory.

FCBS                 Sets file control block information.

GRAFTABL             Allows the extended code page to be displayed when the
                     system is using display adapters in graphics mode.

HELP                 Provides a help line as part of the command prompt, a help
                     screen, and information related to warning and error
                     messages.

KEYB                 Specifies a special keyboard layout that replaces the
                     current keyboard layout.

KEYS                 Retrieves previously issued commands for editing or reuse.

MODE                 Sets operation modes for devices.  These operations
                     include:

   o Setting asynchronous communication modes for devices previously installed
   o Setting the display modes for switching adapters
   o Setting parallel printer modes
   o Setting diskette input/output write verification.

PATH                 Specifies the search path for programs and commands.

PAUSEONERROR         Allows or prevents pausing when errors or warning messages
                     occur during the processing of the CONFIG.SYS file.

PRINTMONBUFSIZE      Sets the size of the buffer for the parallel port device
                     driver.

PROMPT               Sets the system prompt.

PROTECTONLY          Specifies an OS/2-only operating environment.

PROTSHELL            Loads the user interface program.

PSTAT                Displays process, thread, shared memory, and dynamic-link
                     library information.

RMSIZE               Sets the amount of storage used for running DOS programs.

RUN                  Loads and starts a program during system startup.

SET                  Sets one string value in the environment equal to another
                     string for later use in programs.

SPOOL                Intercepts and separates data from different sources going
                     to the printer so that printer output is not intermixed.

SYSLOG               Logs system events in the System Log file.

TIME                 Displays or changes the time known to the system and
                     resets the time of your computer.

TIMESLICE            Sets the minimum and maximum amount of processor time
                     allocated to processes and programs for both OS/2 and DOS
                     sessions.

VER                  Displays the OS/2 version number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6. Batch File and Command Processing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following commands are specifically designed for batch-file and
command-processing operations:

CALL                Nests a batch file within a batch file.

CMD                 Starts another OS/2 command processor.

COMMAND             Starts another DOS command processor.

ECHO                Allows or prevents the display of OS/2 commands when a
                    batch file is running.

ENDLOCAL            Restores the drive, directory, and variables that were in
                    effect before a SETLOCAL command was issued.

EXIT                Ends the current command processor and returns to the
                    previous one, if one exists.

EXTPROC             Defines an external batch-file processor.

FOR                 Allows repetitive processing of commands within a batch
                    file.

GOTO                Transfers batch processing to a specified label.

IF                  Allows conditional processing of commands within a batch
                    file.

PAUSE               Suspends batch-file processing.

PROTSHELL           Specifies the user interface program and the OS/2 command
                    processor.

REM                 Displays remarks from within a batch file.

SETLOCAL            Sets the drive, directory, and variables that are local to
                    the current batch file.

SHELL               Specifies the DOS command processor.

SHIFT               Allows more than 10 replaceable parameters to be processed
                    from a batch file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. OS/2 Commands by Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A description of each OS/2 command is available to you.  Each command includes
the following information:

o The purpose of the command

o The command syntax diagram and parameter definitions

o The list of related commands

o Information about using the command

o Information concerning return codes that the command has defined.

Note:   For information about command diagrams, select How to Read a Syntax
        Diagram.

To view the list of OS/2 commands, press the Esc (Escape) key to return to the
Contents.  Next, select the plus sign (+) or press the + key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. ANSI - Use OS/2 Extended Keyboard and Display Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows or prevents extended display and keyboard support in the OS/2
environment.

 ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ANSI ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
    ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ     ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                Γö£ΓöÇ ON  ΓöÇΓöñ
                                              ΓööΓöÇ OFF ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  DEVICE=ANSI.SYS and KEYS

If you enter this command without a parameter, ANSI displays its current
status.

This command allows or prevents ANSI control sequence processing in OS/2
sessions.  You use ANSI control sequences to redefine keys, manipulate the
cursor, and change display color attributes.

When KEYS is ON, ANSI extended keyboard support is disabled.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ANSI Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display extended display and keyboard support status, type the following:

ANSI

To allow extended display and keyboard support, type the following:

ANSI ON

To discontinue extended display and keyboard support, type the following:

ANSI OFF


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. APPEND - Set Search Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sets a search path for data files that are outside the current directory.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ APPEND ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                 ΓööΓöÇ /E ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ       Γö£ΓöÇ /PATH:ON  ΓöÇΓöñ
                                ΓööΓöÇ /PATH:OFF ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  DPATH, PATH, SET

Enter APPEND without a parameter to display the APPEND statement in your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file.  This statement can be set by system installation.

Enter APPEND ; to cancel the APPEND command.

The first time you use APPEND, it is an external command, and you might need to
specify a drive and path to locate it. Once APPEND is loaded, it becomes an
internal command, and a drive and path are no longer needed.

APPEND is useful when you want to keep an application program and its
associated data files in one directory and group information by category in
other directories. If you specify a path with APPEND the first time you use it,
this path is not stored in the environment, and you can only view or change it
with the APPEND command.  You can append as many directories as you can specify
in a total of 128 characters.

The search sequence for a specified file is:

 1. Search the specified directory, or the current directory if you do not
    specify the directory.
 2. Search the directories indicated by the current APPEND command.

APPEND is similar to the PATH command, although the PATH command finds only
startable files.  You can look at or modify APPEND paths in the environment by
using APPEND, or you can use the SET command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> APPEND Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To query the environment for paths to data files and to find any files that
have paths in the WORDPROC or CALC subdirectories on drive C, enter the
following:

PATH C:\WORDPROC;C:\CALC;
APPEND /E
APPEND C:\WORDPROC;C:\CALC;

If you want to find any files that have paths in the WORDPROC or CALC
subdirectories on drive C but do not want to query the environment for paths to
data files, enter the following:

PATH C:\WORDPROC;C:\CALC;
APPEND C:\WORDPROC;C:\CALC;

If you want to access files in the EDITOR directory when you are in another
directory, enter the following:

APPEND = C:\OS2;C:\OS2\SYSTEM;
C:\EDITOR;

If you want to search for a file using only a file name, type the following:

APPEND /PATH:OFF

If you want to view a file, you can enter the following:

TYPE MYFILE

APPEND searches until it finds the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. ASSIGN - Assign Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Assigns a drive letter to a different drive. ASSIGN allows you to perform disk
operations on drives other than A and B for programs that use only those two
drives.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ASSIGN ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                   ΓööΓöÇ x = y ΓöÇΓöÿ Γöé
                                          Γöé              Γöé
                                          ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  JOIN, SUBST

Enter this command without a parameter to reset all drives to their original
assignments.

Family API programs cannot be loaded from cross-assigned drives.

ASSIGN hides the true device type from commands that require actual drive
information.  The following commands do not work in DOS sessions on drives that
have ASSIGN in effect:

CHKDSK
DISKCOMP
DISKCOPY
FORMAT
JOIN
LABEL
PRINT
RECOVER
RESTORE
SUBST


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ASSIGN Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To assign all requests for drive A to drive C, enter the following:

ASSIGN A=C or ASSIGN A C

To assign all requests for drives A and B to drive C, enter the following:

ASSIGN A=C B=C


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4. ATTRIB - Set File Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays the current file state.  It also turns on or off the read-only
attribute and the archive bit of a file for selected files in a directory, or
for all files in a directory level.

                                      ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                                         Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ ATTRIB ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ +R ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                         Γöé   ΓööΓöÇ -R ΓöÇΓöÿ   Γöé
                                         Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ +S ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                         Γöé   ΓööΓöÇ -S ΓöÇΓöÿ   Γöé
                                         Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ +H ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                         Γöé   ΓööΓöÇ -H ΓöÇΓöÿ   Γöé
                                         ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ +A ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
                                            ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ -A ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  filename  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                       ΓööΓöÇ /S ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands: BACKUP, RESTORE, XCOPY

Enter this command along with the name of a file to display the current file
state.  This command is useful in keeping files from being modified.  When you
turn on the read-only attribute of a file, you can read it, but you cannot
write to it or change it.

You can specify the optional +R, -R, +A, -A, +S, -S, +H, or -H parameters
either before or after the file name. Be sure to use only one read-only
attribute and one archive attribute per command.

If a file exists in more than one directory, you can use the /S parameter to
find all occurrences of that file.

Return Codes:  ATTRIB issues a return code of 0 for normal completion.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ATTRIB Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To turn on the read-only attribute of a file named LETTER.TXT, type the
following:

ATTRIB +R LETTER.TXT

To remove the read-only attribute from a file named LETTER.TXT, type the
following:

ATTRIB -R LETTER.TXT

To turn on the archive bit of a file named LETTER.TXT, enter type the
following:

ATTRIB +A LETTER.TXT

To turn off the archive bit and turn on the read-only attribute of a file named
LETTER.TXT, enter the following.

ATTRIB -A +R LETTER.TXT

To turn off the archive bit of the LETTER.TXT file in the REPORTS directory on
drive D, enter the following:

ATTRIB -A D:\REPORTS\LETTER.TXT

To set the file, LETTER.TXT, as a system file, type the following:

ATTRIB +S LETTER.TXT

To clear the file, LETTER.TXT, as a system file, type the following:

ATTRIB -S LETTER.TXT

To set the file, LETTER.TXT, as a hidden file, type the following:

ATTRIB +H LETTER.TXT

To clear the file, LETTER.TXT, as a hidden file, type the following:

ATTRIB -H LETTER.TXT

To display the current settings of the archive and read-only bits for all the
files on drive C, enter the following:

ATTRIB C:\*.* /S

To find all occurrences of a file named LETTER.TXT on drive C, enter the
following:

ATTRIB C:\LETTER.TXT /S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5. AUTOFAIL - Display Error Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enables information about error conditions to be displayed.

AUTOFAIL ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                     Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇ NO  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                     ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ YES ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at the OS/2
command prompt.

This CONFIG.SYS statement allows the OS/2 operating system to display
information about error conditions such as hard errors.  A hard error is an
error condition that requires you to reconfigure the system or remove the
source of the error before the system can resume reliable operation.

The system default is AUTOFAIL=NO, which causes a window to appear that informs
you of an error condition.  The YES parameter causes the appropriate error code
to appear rather than a window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> AUTOFAIL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The default is NO. To cause a window that informs you of an error condition to
appear, add the following statement to the CONFIG.SYS file and restart your
system.

AUTOFAIL

or

AUTOFAIL=NO

To cause an error code to appear, add the following statement to the CONFIG.SYS
file and restart your system.

AUTOFAIL=YES


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6. BACKUP - Save Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Backs up (copies) one or more files from one disk to another.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ BACKUP ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ source drive ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
                     Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  path  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                     ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
                   ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
       target                                         Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  drive  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /L:filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /D:mm-dd-yy ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /T:hh:mm:ss ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /M ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /A ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /F:xxx ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /S ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  ATTRIB, RESTORE, XCOPY

Note that:

o After BACKUP fills a diskette, BACKUP prompts you to insert a new diskette.
  Label each diskette in consecutive order, recording the date and diskette
  number.  When you restore the files, RESTORE prompts you to insert the backup
  diskettes in order.

o BACKUP works only within the source directory unless you specify the /S
  parameter, which copies files in the source directory and in all directories
  below the starting source directory.

o BACKUP can back up files on disks of different types.

o If the source is a diskette, it should not be write-protected because BACKUP
  needs to reset the archive bit on the backed-up files.

o BACKUP does not back up the system files (COMMAND.COM and CMD.EXE), hidden
  system files, and any open dynamic link library files (.DLL).  BACKUP also
  does not back up any files opened with Deny Read/Write.  BACKUP issues a
  system message if you try to back up one of these files.

o If you are sharing files, you can back up only those files that you have
  access to.  If you attempt to access a file that you do not have access to,
  BACKUP displays a message stating that it was not able to back up the file.

o Files that you back up do not appear in the root directory on the target
  diskette.  BACKUP creates two files, called BACKUP.XXX and CONTROL.XXX, in
  the root directory on the target diskette.  The BACKUP.XXX file contains all
  the files that have been backed up, and the CONTROL.XXX file saves paths,
  file names, and other controlling information.

Extended Attributes:  The BACKUP command saves the extended attributes
associated with a file or directory.  An extended attribute is a special area
used for storing data that describes the file or directory to the operating
system or to an application. When backing up files or directories that have
extended attributes, be sure to use OS/2 Version 1.2 (or later) to ensure all
extended file attributes are backed up.

Return Codes:

0 -  Normal completion.
1 -  No files were found to back up.
2 -  Some files or directories were not processed because of file errors.
3 -  Ended by user.
4 -  Ended because of error.
5 -  Not defined.
6 -  BACKUP was unable to process the FORMAT command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> BACKUP Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To back up a file named ABCD.FIL from the MYFILES directory to drive A, enter
the following:

BACKUP C:\MYFILES\ABCD.FIL A:

To back up all of the files on drive C to drive A, enter the following:

BACKUP C: A:

To back up files from the current directory on drive C to drive A and to create
a log file named BACKUP.LOG, enter the following:

BACKUP C: A: /L

To back up files changed on or after June 15, 1990 from the current directory
on drive C to drive A, enter the following:

BACKUP C: A: /D:06-15-90

To back up files changed on or after 11:45 a.m. from the current directory on
drive C to drive A, enter the following:

BACKUP C: A: /T:11:45:00

To back up files in the current directory on drive C that were changed since
the last backup to drive A, enter the following:

BACKUP C: A: /M

To add the files on drive B to the backed-up files already on the diskette in
drive A, enter the following:

BACKUP B: A: /A

To back up all files from the root directory on drive C to drive A and to
format any diskettes to 1.2MB, enter the following:

BACKUP C: A: /F:1200

To back up all of the contents of drive C, including all of the files and all
of the subdirectories within drive C, to multiple diskettes on drive A, enter
the following:

BACKUP C:\*.* A: /S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7. BASEDEV - Install Base Device Drivers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Installs a base device driver by specifying the complete file name of the
device driver in your CONFIG.SYS file.

BASEDEV=ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γöñ
                                        ΓööΓöÇ arguments ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  DEVICE

A device driver is a file that contains the code that the OS/2 operating system
needs to recognize a device and correctly process information received from or
sent to that device.  A base device driver is one that is needed when the OS/2
operating system is first started.

The BASEDEV statement is used to load base device drivers.  Device support for
disks, diskettes, printers connected to the workstation, and other devices, is
loaded with the BASEDEV statement.

Unlike the DEVICE statement, the BASEDEV statement cannot contain either drive
or path information because the OS/2 operating system cannot process such
information at the stage of the startup sequence when the BASEDEV statements
are processed. The root directory of the startup partition is first searched
for the specified file name, then the \OS2 directory of the startup partition.
If drive or path information is included in a BASEDEV statement, an error is
generated.

In addition, BASEDEV statements are not necessarily processed in the order in
which they appear in your CONFIG.SYS file.  The extensions of the file names
specified in the BASEDEV statements are examined; the statements are then
processed in the following order of file name extensions:

 .SYS
 .BID
 .VSD
 .TSD
 .ADD
 .I13
 .FLT
 .DMD

Files with other file-name extensions will not be loaded.

If several BASEDEV statements load file names with the same extension, those
files will be loaded in the order in which they appear in the CONFIG.SYS file.

For more specific information about base device drivers, select the highlighted
device driver or one of the topics in the "Related Information" section below.
The following base device drivers are included with your OS/2 diskettes:

Related Information:

o OS/2 Device Managers

o Adaptec Device Driver Parameters

o Future Domain Device Driver Parameters

o DPT Device Driver Parameters

IBM2ADSK.ADD        Device support for non-SCSI disk drives on Micro Channel*
                    workstations.

OS2DASD.DMD         General-purpose device support for disk drives.

IBM1FLPY.ADD        Device support for diskette drives on non-Micro Channel
                    workstations.

IBM2FLPY.ADD        Device support for diskette drives on Micro Channel
                    workstations.

IBM1S506.ADD        Device support for non-SCSI disk drives on non-Micro
                    Channel workstations.

IBMINT13.I13        General-purpose device support for non-Micro Channel SCSI
                    adapters.

PRINT01.SYS         Device support for locally attached printers on non-Micro
                    Channel workstations.

PRINT02.SYS         Device support for locally attached printers on Micro
                    Channel workstations.

IBM2SCSI.ADD        Device support for Micro Channel SCSI adapters.

OS2SCSI.DMD         General-purpose device support for non-disk SCSI devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> BASEDEV Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Suppose you have a base device driver named XYZSCSI.ADD that supports an
adapter from a personal computer manufacturer.  Once installed, the following
line will appear in your CONFIG.SYS file:

BASEDEV=XYZSCSI.ADD


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.8. BOOT -- Change Operating Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Switches between the DOS and OS/2* operating systems that are on the same hard
disk (drive C).

 ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ BOOT ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ /OS2 ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
    ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ     ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                ΓööΓöÇ /DOS ΓöÇΓöÿ

The BOOT command can be run from an OS/2 command prompt or a DOS command prompt
as well as from DOS.

BOOT is available under the following conditions:

o DOS Version 3.2 (or a later version) was installed and operating on drive C
  before the OS/2 operating system was installed. (It is recommended that you
  use DOS 3.3, DOS 4.0, or DOS 5.0 for greater compatibility with OS/2 2.1.)

o Drive C was not formatted during OS/2 installation.

o The High Performance File System was not installed on drive C.

Before typing the BOOT command, make sure all system operations are complete
and all programs are stopped.

BOOT verifies that the following files exist:

OS/2 files

   OS2LDR (hidden file)
   OS2KRNL (hidden file)
   OS2\SYSTEM\BOOT.OS2
   OS2\SYSTEM\CONFIG.OS2

DOS files

   IBMBIO.COM or MSDOS.SYS (hidden file)
   IBMDOS.COM or IO.SYS (hidden file)
   OS2\SYSTEM\BOOT.DOS
   OS2\SYSTEM\CONFIG.DOS

When you use the BOOT command to start DOS from the OS/2 operating system, BOOT
renames and stores system startup information as follows:

 1. Saves the OS/2 boot record as C:\OS2\SYSTEM\BOOT.OS2

 2. Moves the OS/2 AUTOEXEC.BAT file to C:\OS2\SYSTEM\AUTOEXEC.OS2.

 3. Moves the OS/2 CONFIG.SYS file to C:\OS2\SYSTEM\CONFIG.OS2.

 4. Copies C:\OS2\SYSTEM\BOOT.DOS to the DOS boot record.

 5. Moves the DOS AUTOEXEC.BAT file from C:\OS2\SYSTEM\AUTOEXEC.DOS to the root
    directory as BOOT moves the OS/2 AUTOEXEC.BAT file.

 6. Moves the DOS CONFIG.SYS file from C:\OS2\SYSTEM\CONFIG.DOS to the root
    directory as BOOT moves the OS/2 CONFIG.SYS file.

BOOT reverses the process when you want to start the OS/2 operating system.

Return Codes:  BOOT displays either a return code of 0 for normal completion or
the appropriate error message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> BOOT Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start the OS/2 operating system, from a DOS operating system, enter the
following:

C:\OS2\BOOT /OS2

Press Enter and respond to the prompt that appears.

To start a DOS operating system from the OS/2 operating system, enter the
following:

BOOT /DOS

Press Enter and respond to the following message:

SYS1714: Warning! Make sure all your programs have completed
or data will be lost when the system is restarted.

You requested to start DOS from drive C:
Your system will be reset. Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

To create a simple batch file named OS2.BAT to use in DOS (Version 3.2 and
later) that will change the operating system to OS/2 2.1, type the following in
your OS2.BAT batch file:

C:\OS2\BOOT /OS2

To create batch files named DOS.BAT and DOS.CMD to use in the OS/2 2.1
operating system that will change the operating system to your present level of
DOS (Version 3.2 and later), type the following in your DOS.BAT or DOS.CMD
batch file:

C:\OS2\BOOT /DOS

Note:   To be effective, the preceding batch files must reside within an active
        subdirectory in the current path statement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.9. BREAK - Check for Ctrl+Break ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Instructs DOS to check whether the Ctrl and Break keys have been pressed before
carrying out a program request.

BREAK ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇ ON  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                  ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ OFF ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Enter the BREAK command at the DOS command prompt to display the current
status.

BREAK instructs the system to check if you pressed the Ctrl and Break keys
together before the system carries out a program request. Pressing and holding
the Ctrl and Break keys together stops a command from completing its task.

BREAK can be entered in the CONFIG.SYS file, in a batch file, or at the command
prompt.  If BREAK is ON, processing might be slower, but the operating system
will probably intercept Ctrl+Break faster.  Setting BREAK=ON allows you to
leave a program even if it produces few or no standard device operations (such
as a compiler).  For example, if a program is being compiled and it meets an
error or loop, it is important to have a way to stop compilation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> BREAK Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The default is OFF

To check whether Ctrl+Break has been pressed only when output is written to
your screen or printer, or when input is read from your keyboard, enter the
following statement in your CONFIG.SYS file:

BREAK=OFF

To have the system check for Ctrl+Break when you request it, enter the
following statement in your CONFIG.SYS file:

BREAK=ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.10. BUFFERS - Determine Number of Disk Buffers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sets the number of disk buffers that the system uses.

BUFFERS = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ x ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at the OS/2
command prompt.

The disk buffer is a 512-byte block of storage the system uses to read and
write blocks of data that do not occupy an entire sector.  You can increase the
speed of your system by increasing the value specified for BUFFERS.  However,
when you increase the number of disk buffers, you decrease your available
memory. You might want to experiment with the number of buffers to get maximum
performance.  Additional buffers can cause some applications to run more slowly
because there is less memory available for the application to keep data.  More
frequent read and write requests than are otherwise necessary might then
result.

Buffering, which is the allocation of storage, is one memory management method.

By using the disk buffer, the operating system can read and write blocks of
information.  Once the information is read into the buffer, the system is ready
to process the information.  While the information is in the buffer or being
processed, the input device can begin reading new pieces of information so the
processor does not have to wait unnecessarily to process information and
program instructions.  The processor can complete its operation, because the
next block of information to process is already in the buffer area.

Some other situations might also occur.  For example, suppose the processor
completes its work and there is no information in the buffer to process.  The
processor must wait until the next block of information is read into memory by
the input device.  Similarly, if the input device reads information into the
buffer before the system has time to process the records, the buffer might
reach its capacity and have to wait until the system accepts more information
to process.

In your CONFIG.SYS file, there is a BUFFERS statement that determines the
number of disk buffers that the operating system will keep in memory.
Depending on how many programs you work with at a given time, you might want to
experiment with this number to maximize performance on your system.

If you run many programs in OS/2 sessions, you can increase the speed of your
system by increasing the value specified for BUFFERS (for example, BUFFERS=70).
However, remember that when you increase the number of disk buffers, you
decrease your available memory by 512 bytes for each buffer specified.
Additional buffers might cause some programs to run more slowly because there
is less memory available for the program to keep information.  This can result
in more frequent memory swapping, which will slow down performance.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> BUFFERS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To assign the number of buffers to 20, type the following in your CONFIG.SYS
file:

BUFFERS=20


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> IBM1FLPY.ADD Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In the majority of cases, the IBM1FLPY.ADD driver will determine parameters
automatically.  The following parameters are provided in case it is necessary
to override the default parameter selection.

If you are trying to add a third diskette drive or a secondary diskette
controller, you must use command line parameters to provide the driver with
additional information about the hardware. Refer to the following examples:

Examples:

To define a third 1.2MB Floppy drive:

BASEDEV=IBM1FLPY.ADD /A:0 /U:2 /F:1.2MB

To override the ChangeLine type for drive B:

BASEDEV=IBM1FLPY.ADD /A:0 /U:1 /CL:NONE

To support a second installed floppy controller:

BASEDEV=IBM1FLPY.ADD
BASEDEV=IBM1FLPY.ADD /A:0 /DMA:3 /IRQ:10 /P:370 /U:0 /F:1.44MB --+
                                                       +-----------------+
                                                       +----/U:1 /F:1.2MB

Choices of /DMA, /IRQ and /P depend on the supplier of the floppy controller.
Consult the supplier of the controller for the appropriate settings for these
values.  These settings must not conflict with the settings of the primary
diskette controller.

The first drive supported by the second controller will be assigned the letter
B if this drive letter is available.  Specifying /A:1 will cause the second
controller to be assigned drive letters other than A or B.

Parameter Definitions:

/A:0                     Adapter number, normally set to zero.  Setting /A:1
                         controls whether the B drive letter is assigned to the
                         primary or secondary diskette controller when multiple
                         controllers are present.

/IRQ:10                  IRQ level (dec).  Overrides the default IRQ level for
                         this adapter.  The default IRQ level is 6.  For a
                         secondary controller, this parameter must specify an
                         IRQ level other than 6.

/DMA:3                   DMA channel number.  Overrides the default DMA channel
                         number for this adapter. The default DMA channel
                         number is 2.  For a secondary controller, this
                         parameter must specify a DMA channel other than 2.

/P:370 or /PORT:370      Base port address (hex).  Overrides the default base
                         port address for this adapter.  Ports assigned in this
                         case would be 370-377.  The default base port address
                         is 3F0.  For a secondary controller, this parameter
                         must specify a base port other than 3F0.

/U:0                     Unit Id.  Indicates the unit (diskette drive) to which
                         the parameters will apply.  Unit 0 means the first
                         drive attached to this controller.  Unit 3 indicates
                         the fourth drive attached to the controller.

/F:360KB                 Drive Capacity (360KB...2.88MB).  Indicates the
                         maximum capacity for the diskette drive.  This
                         parameter must be provided for diskette drives not
                         normally supported by the System BIOS ROM.

/CL:AT                   Changeline type (NONE, AT, PS2).  Indicates the type
                         of media change signal provided by the drive.
                         Normally, the IBM1FLPY driver will determine this
                         parameter automatically.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> IBM1S506.ADD Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In the majority of cases, the IBM1S506.ADD driver will determine parameters
automatically.  The following parameters are provided in case it is necessary
to override the default parameter selection.

In the case of ESDI drives formatted with sector sparing, it might be necessary
to use the /!R parameter.  Refer to the discussion of the /!R parameter below.

Examples:

BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD /V /A:0 /U:0 /T:10 /GEO:(1314,7,26,-1) /A:1 /I
BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD /V /A:1 /P:120 /IRQ:11 /U:0 /T:10
BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD /V /A:1 /U:0 /GEO:20
BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD /V /A:0 /U:0 /SMS
BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD /V /A:0 /!R

Parameter Definitions:

/V                       Verbose Mode.  Displays controller status and drive
                         geometry information during OS/2 initialization.

/A:0                     Adapter number.  /A:0 indicates that the parameters
                         that follow apply to the primary disk controller.
                         /A:1 indicates that the parameters that follow apply
                         to the secondary disk controller.

/I                       Ignore adapter.  The driver automatically attempts to
                         locate and initialize both the primary and secondary
                         adapters.  In some cases, other DASD controllers might
                         appear between the primary and secondary IDE
                         controllers.  In these cases, the system should be
                         configured as follows:

                                                  BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD /V /A:1 /I
                                                  BASEDEV=MOREDASD.ADD
                                                  BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD /V /A:0 /I

/!R                      Disable adapter resets.  In most cases, resets assist
                         in recovering from transient hardware problems such as
                         lost interrupts, timeouts, and unsupported commands.
                         However, for some ESDI adapters, options set by vendor
                         unique commands such as sector sparing might be lost
                         after a reset.  Setting this parameter is recommended
                         for ESDI adapters with disks formatted using sector
                         sparing.

/P:120 or /PORT:120      Base port address (hex).  Overrides the default base
                         port address for this adapter.  Ports are still
                         assigned and in this case would be 120-127 and 326.
                         The default port addresses for Adapter 0 is 1F0 and
                         for Adapter 1 is 170.

/IRQ:11                  IRQ level (dec).  Overrides the default IRQ level for
                         this adapter. The default IRQ level for Adapter 0 is
                         (14) and for Adapter 1 is (15).

/U:0                     Unit Id.  Unit 0 indicates parameters that follow
                         apply to Drive 0.  Unit 1 indicates parameters that
                         follow apply to Drive 1.

/T:10                    Error retry time in seconds (dec).  Indicates the
                         total allowable error recovery time for a request.
                         Error recovery times less than 5 seconds will be
                         ignored.  This parameter defaults to 30 seconds.  A
                         shorter interval might be desirable for fault tolerant
                         applications.

/GEO:(1314,7,26,-1) or /GEO:20 Drive geometry override (dec).  Indicates the
                         Cylinder/Head/Sector geometry for the drive.  This
                         parameter is the Write Precompensation Cylinder which
                         can be omitted for drives which do not require
                         precompensation.

                         As an alternate format, standard BIOS drive types can
                         be used.  Types 0-47 are supported.  User defined
                         types 48 and 49 should be entered directly in the
                         previous format.  When specified, this parameter
                         overrides other geometry sources.  If this parameter
                         is absent, other geometry sources discussed above will
                         be used.

/SMS                     Enable Set Multiple Support.  This parameter enables
                         Set Multiple Support which improves performance of
                         some IDE drives.  If the drive does not have this
                         feature, this parameter will be ignored.  The /V -
                         (Verbose) parameter will indicate whether this feature
                         has been enabled on a particular drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OS/2 Device Managers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Device Managers (.DMD)

Device Managers provide communication between adapter device drivers (.ADDs)
and either the OS/2 kernel or other device drivers.

The following device managers handle a particular type of device:

OS2DASD.DMD              Supports magnetic disk devices. This includes hard
                         disk and diskette devices.

OS2CDROM.DMD             Supports CD-ROM devices.

The following device managers provide compatibility for existing device drivers
written to common SCSI software interfaces.  Typically these device drivers
support SCSI attached tape, optical or scanner devices.  Device drivers to run
a particular SCSI device must be provided by the device or application
supplier.

OS2SCSI.DMD              Supports existing device drivers written to IBM's
                         SCSI.SYS interface.  Usually a separate DEVICE=
                         statement is present to load the device-specific SCSI
                         driver.  For example:

                                                  BASEDEV=OS2SCSI.DMD
                                                  DEVICE=OPTICAL.SYS
                                                  DEVICE=SCANNER.SYS

OS2ASPI.DMD              Supports existing device drivers written to Adaptec's
                         ASPI interface.  A separate DEVICE= statement is
                         present to load the device-specific SCSI driver.  For
                         example:

                                                  BASEDEV=OS2ASPI.DMD
                                                  DEVICE=ASPITAPE.SYS

Adapter Device Drivers

Adapter device drivers provide a standardized interface for a wide range of
SCSI and non-SCSI adapters.  The OS/2 2.1 operating system includes .ADD
drivers for common SCSI and non-SCSI adapters.  ADD drivers for other SCSI or
non-SCSI adapters might be available from the adapter supplier or IBM.

Generic Adapter Device Driver

If the OS/2 operating system cannot locate an appropriate .ADD driver, it uses
this special .ADD driver which utilizes the BIOS present on most SCSI and
non-SCSI DASD adapters.  This .ADD driver provides support only to DASD type
devices.  It will activate only when other .ADD drivers present have not
claimed all the DASD devices detected.

IBMINT13.I13             Supports generic DASD controllers via BIOS code.

Adapter Drivers for ISA/EISA Systems

The following .ADD drivers are included for industry standard devices:

IBM1FLPY.ADD             Supports standard diskette controllers.

IBM1S506.ADD             Supports standard MFM, RLL, ESDI,IDE and hard disk
                         controllers

The following .ADD drivers are included for Adaptec ISA/EISA SCSI controller
products:

AHA152X.ADD              Supports Adaptec AHA-1510/1520/1522/6250.

AHA154X.ADD              Supports Adaptec AHA-1540/1542.

AHA174X.ADD              Supports Adaptec AHA-1740/1744.

The following .ADD driver is included for DPT ISA/EISA SCSI controller
products:

DPT20XX.ADD              Supports DPT PM2011/2012.

The following .ADD drivers are included for Future Domain ISA/EISA SCSI
controller products:

FD8XX.ADD                Supports Future Domain TMC-850/860/885.

FD16-700.ADD             Supports Future Domain TMC-1650/1660/1670/1680.

FD7000EX.ADD             Supports Future Domain TMC-7000EX.

The following .ADD drivers are included for IBM ISA SCSI Controller products:

FD850IBM.ADD             Supports IBM 8-Bit  ISA SCSI Adapter (TMC-850IBM).

FD16IBM.ADD              Supports IBM 16-Bit ISA SCSI Adapter.

Adapter Drivers for Micro Channel Systems

The following .ADD drivers are included for standard devices:

IBM2FLPY.ADD             Supports diskette drives.

IBM2ADSK.ADD             Supports non-SCSI hard disks.

The following .ADD drivers are included for Adaptec Micro Channel SCSI
controller products:

AHA164X.ADD              Supports Adaptec AHA-1640.

The following .ADD drivers are included for Future Domain Micro Channel SCSI
controller products:

FD16-700.ADD             Supports Future Domain MCS-600/700.

The following .ADD drivers are included for IBM Micro Channel SCSI controller
products:

IBM2SCSI.ADD             Supports IBM PS/2 SCSI Adapters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Adaptec SCSI Device Driver Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The parameters for the following adapter device drivers are described in this
section:

AHA152X.ADD
AHA154X.ADD
AHA164X.ADD (Micro Channel systems)
AHA174X.ADD

In the majority of cases, these .ADD drivers will determine parameters
automatically.  The following parameters are provided in case it is necessary
to override the default parameter selection.

Suppose that you had a removable hard disk as SCSI Device 3 and you wanted to
control this device with an ASPI application and driver.

Normally OS2DASD.DMD will allocate this device, treating it as a large
diskette.  The device would be unavailable to the ASPI application/driver.  The
following statements will prevent OS2DASD.DMD from accessing the device.

BASEDEV=AHA152X.ADD /A:0 /!DM:3
BASEDEV=AHA154X.ADD /A:0 /!DM:3
BASEDEV=AHA164X.ADD /A:0 /!DM:3
BASEDEV=AHA174X.ADD /A:0 /!DM:3

Suppose that you had a CD-ROM changer device which assigned each CD-ROM to a
different SCSI logical unit (LUN).  Setting the /ET parameter will enable
multiple logical unit (LUN) support.

BASEDEV=AHA152X.ADD /ET
BASEDEV=AHA154X.ADD /ET
BASEDEV=AHA164X.ADD /ET
BASEDEV=AHA174X.ADD /ET

Parameter Definitions:

/ET                      Search SCSI Devices for logical units (LUNs).  If any
                         attached SCSI devices support multiple addressable
                         units, then this parameter should be set.

                         Certain CD-ROM drives which handle multiple CD-ROMs
                         require this parameter.

                         The default setting (/!ET) assumes each SCSI device
                         has only one logical unit (LUN 0).

/V                       Verbose.  Displays Adaptec.ADD driver version number.

/!DM:1,5 or /!DM:(1,0),(5,0) Disable DASD Manager support.  The OS2DASD.DMD
                         will manage any SCSI device that indicates it is a
                         removable or fixed magnetic disk.

                         In some cases, a device supplier might provide a
                         specific driver written to either IBM SCSI.SYS or
                         Adaptec ASPI interfaces.

                         SCSI devices might be listed in single digits as SCSI
                         device numbers, or as pairs of numbers indicating a
                         SCSI device number and logical unit number.  In these
                         cases, this parameter might be used to disable the
                         OS/2 DASD Manager from claiming the device.

/!SM:1,5 or /!SM:(1,0),(5,0) Disable SCSI manager support.  Prevents
                         OS2SCSI.DMD from reporting that SCSI devices listed
                         are available for allocation to drivers written to IBM
                         SCSI.SYS interfaces.  SCSI devices might be listed in
                         single digits as SCSI device numbers, or as pairs of
                         numbers indicating a SCSI device number and logical
                         unit number.

/A:0                     Adapter number.  The number of the adapter to which
                         the following parameters will apply.

If multiple AHA-1540/1542 adapters are present, the adapters are numbered by
their port addresses scanned in the following order:  330H, 334H, 230H, 234H,
130H, 134H.

If multiple AHA-1520/1510/6250 adapters are present, the port addresses are
340H and 140H.  Adapter numbers are assigned sequentially for each adapter
found starting with 0.

If multiple AHA-1640 adapters are present, the adapters are numbered as
follows:

o AHA-1640 adapters with their BIOS enabled are detected first.
o AHA-1640 adapters with their BIOS disabled are detected second.  In both
  cases adapters are ordered by their Micro Channel slot address from lowest to
  highest.

If multiple AHA-1740/1744 adapters are present, the adapters are numbered as
follows:

o AHA-1740/1744 adapters with their BIOS enabled are detected first.  Adapter
  numbers are assigned to adapters in order of their BIOS addresses from lowest
  to highest.
o AHA-1740/1744 adapters with their BIOS disabled are detected second.  Adapter
  numbers are assigned in order of EISA slot address from lowest to highest.

/!D                      Disable SCSI Disconnect function (For AHA-152X and
                         AHA-154X adapters).  Normally, allowing SCSI devices
                         to disconnect increases overall system performance by
                         telling devices to release the SCSI Bus after they
                         have received a SCSI command, and later reattach when
                         they are ready to transfer data.  The default (/D)
                         leaves the SCSI disconnect function enabled.  Some
                         older SCSI devices do not operate properly when SCSI
                         disconnection is enabled.

/BON:7                   Bus-on time (microseconds) (for AHA-154X adapters).
                         Controls the maximum amount of time the AHA-1540/1542
                         adapter may control the system bus. The default value
                         for OS/2 2.1 is 7 microseconds.  This value can be set
                         between 2 and 15 microseconds.  If a tape drive and
                         diskette drive are attached to the same controller,
                         and disk activity appears to interfere with the
                         operation of the tape drive, then setting this
                         parameter to a lower value might resolve the problem.

/!Y                      Disable SCSI bus parity checking (for AHA-152X
                         adapters).  Allowing SCSI bus parity checking enables
                         the detection of incorrect or corrupted data transfers
                         across the SCSI bus.  The default (/Y) enables parity
                         checking.

                         Some older CD-ROM drives do not support parity
                         checking.  Specifying this parameter will allow these
                         drives to operate properly.

/H:7                     Host adapter SCSI ID (for AHA-152 adapters).  This
                         parameter is set to SCSI ID 7 by default.  It does not
                         normally need to be modified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> IBMSCSI.ADD Device Driver Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following parameters are for IBM PS/2 SCSI adapters

In the majority of cases, the IBMSCSI.ADD driver will determine parameters
automatically.  The following parameters are provided in case it is necessary
to override the default parameter selection.

Suppose that you had a removable hard disk as SCSI Device 3 and you wanted to
control this device with a vendor supplied device driver and application.

Normally OS2DASD.DMD will allocate this device, treating it as a large diskette
drive.  The device would be unavailable to the vendor supplied device driver.
The following statement will prevent OS2DASD.DMD from accessing the device:

BASEDEV=IBM2SCSI.ADD /A:0 /!DM:3

Parameter Definitions:

/LED                     Simulate disk activity light (IBM Model 95).  This
                         parameter uses the right-most digit on the IBM Model
                         95 display panel as a disk activity indicator.  If the
                         panel is being used to display other messages, then
                         removing this parameter from the BASEDEV=IBM2SCSI.ADD
                         statement prevents the driver from accessing the
                         panel.

/GS:4                    Chained request count (0 - 9).  Controls the number of
                         I/O requests sent to the IBM SCSI adapter prior to
                         waiting for a response from the adapter.  Increasing
                         this parameter might increase system throughput by
                         allowing the SCSI adapter to manage larger units of
                         work, independently.  However, excessive large values
                         of this parameter will degrade system response time.

/A:0                     Adapter number.  Identifies a specific adapter for the
                         following parameters.  If multiple IBM SCSI adapters
                         are present, then adapters are numbered consecutively
                         starting with the lowest Micro Channel slot number.

/!DM:1,5 or /!DM:(1,0),(5,0) Disable DASD Manager support.  The OS2DASD.DMD
                         will manage any SCSI device that indicates it is a
                         removable or fixed magnetic disk.

                         In some cases, a device supplier might provide a
                         specific driver written to either IBM SCSI.SYS or
                         Adaptec ASPI interfaces.

                         SCSI devices might be listed in single digits as SCSI
                         device numbers, or as pairs of numbers indicating a
                         SCSI device number and logical unit number.  In these
                         cases, this parameter might be used to disable the
                         OS/2 DASD Manager from claiming the device.

/!SM:1,5 or /!SM:(1,0),(5,0) Disable SCSI Manager support.  Prevents
                         OS2SCSI.DMD from reporting that SCSI devices listed
                         are available for allocation to drivers written to IBM
                         SCSI.SYS interfaces.  SCSI devices might be listed in
                         single digits as SCSI device numbers, or as pairs of
                         numbers indicating a SCSI device number and logical
                         unit number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Future Domain SCSI Device Driver Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In the majority of cases, Future Domain.ADD drivers will determine parameters
automatically.  The following parameters are provided in case it is necessary
to override the default parameter selection.

Suppose that you had a removable hard disk as SCSI Device 3 and you wanted to
control this device with a vendor supplied device driver and application.

Normally OS2DASD.DMD will allocate this device, treating it as a large diskette
drive. The device would be unavailable to the vendor supplied device driver.
The following statement will prevent OS2DASD.DMD from accessing the device.

BASEDEV=FD16-700.ADD /A:0 /!DM:3

Suppose that you had a CD-ROM changer device which assigned each CD-ROM to a
different SCSI logical unit (LUN).  Setting the /ET parameter will enable
multiple LUN support.

BASEDEV=FD7000EX.ADD /A:0 /ET

Parameter Definitions:

/ET or /ET:3,4           Search SCSI Devices for Logical Units (LUNs).  If any
                         attached SCSI devices support multiple logical units
                         (LUNs), then this parameter should be set.

                         Certain CD-ROM drives which handle multiple CD-ROMs
                         require this parameter.

                         The default setting (/!ET) assumes each SCSI device
                         has only one logical unit (LUN 0).

/FS                      Enable fast synchronous data transfers.  This
                         parameter applies to the FD16-700.ADD driver only.
                         New SCSI devices are capable of higher speed data
                         transfers.  However, a TMC-1850 chip is required on
                         your Future Domain adapter for these devices to
                         operate properly.

                         If all Future Domain adapters in your system contain
                         the TMC-1850 chip, then this option will be set by
                         default.  However, if there is a mixture of adapters
                         installed in your system containing TMC-1800 and
                         TMC-1850 chips, then this option will be disabled by
                         default.

                         Specifying this parameter will enable fast synchronous
                         data transfers for all adapters regardless of the
                         level of chip present on the adapter.

                         The negative form of this parameter (/!FS) can be used
                         to disable fast synchronous data transfers for all
                         adapters controlled by this driver.

/A:0                     Adapter number.  The number of the adapter to which
                         the following parameters will apply.

If multiple Future Domain adapters are present, the adapters are numbered as
follows:

o For TMC-16xx (ISA) and MCS-600/700 (MCA) adapters:  The lowest I/O port
  address is assigned adapter index 0.  Port addresses are determined by
  on-card jumpers for the TMC-16xx series and by the Reference Diskette on the
  MCS-600/700 series adapters.
o For TMC-179x and TMC-7000EX (EISA) adapters:  The lowest EISA slot address is
  assigned adapter index 0.
o For TMC-8xx and TMC-850IBM (ISA) adapters:  The lowest memory address is
  assigned adapter index 0.  Memory addresses are determined by on-card
  jumpers.

/!DM:1,5 or /!DM:(1,0),(5,0) Disable DASD Manager support.  The OS2DASD.DMD
                         will manage any SCSI device that indicates it is a
                         removable or fixed magnetic disk.

                         In some cases, a device supplier may provide a
                         specific driver written to either IBM SCSI.SYS or
                         Adaptec ASPI interfaces.

                         SCSI devices may be listed in single digits as SCSI
                         device numbers, or as pairs of numbers indicating a
                         SCSI device number and logical unit number.  In these
                         cases, this parameter might be used to disable the
                         OS/2 DASD Manager from claiming the device.

/!SM:1,5 or /!SM:(1,0),(5,0) Disable SCSI Manager support.  Prevents
                         OS2SCSI.DMD from reporting that SCSI devices listed
                         are available for allocation to drivers written to IBM
                         SCSI.SYS interfaces.  SCSI devices might be listed in
                         single digits as SCSI device numbers, or as pairs of
                         numbers indicating a SCSI device number and logical
                         unit number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DPT Device Driver Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In the majority of cases, the DPT20XX.ADD device driver will determine
parameters automatically.  The following parameters are provided in case it is
necessary to override the default parameter selection.

Suppose that you had a removable hard disk as SCSI Device 3 and you wanted to
control this device with a vendor supplied device driver and application.

Normally OS2DASD.DMD will allocate this device, treating it as a large diskette
drive.  The device would be unavailable to the vendor supplied device driver.
The following statement will prevent OS2DASD.DMD from accessing the device.

BASEDEV=DPT20XX.ADD /A:0 /!DM:3

Suppose that you had a CD-ROM changer device which assigned each CD-ROM to a
different SCSI logical unit (LUN).  Setting the /ET parameter will enable
multiple LUN support.

BASEDEV=DPT20XX.ADD /ET

Parameter Definitions:

/ET                      Search SCSI Devices for logical units (LUNs).  If any
                         attached SCSI devices support multiple logical units,
                         then this parameter should be set.

                         Certain CD-ROM drives which handle multiple CD-ROMs
                         require this parameter.

                         The default setting (/!ET) assumes each SCSI device
                         has only one logical unit (LUN 0).

/A:0                     Adapter number.  Identifies a specific adapter for the
                         following parameters.  If multiple IBM SCSI adapters
                         are present, then adapters are numbered consecutively
                         starting with the lowest Micro Channel slot number.

/!DM:1,5 or /!DM:(1,0),(5,0) Disable DASD Manager support.  The OS2DASD.DMD
                         will manage any SCSI device that indicates it is a
                         removable or fixed magnetic disk.

                         In some cases, a device supplier might provide a
                         specific driver written to either IBM SCSI.SYS or
                         Adaptec ASPI interfaces.

                         SCSI devices might be listed in single digits as SCSI
                         device numbers, or as pairs of numbers indicating a
                         SCSI device number and logical unit number.  In these
                         cases, this parameter might be used to disable the
                         OS/2 DASD Manager from claiming the device.

/!SM:1,5 or /!SM:(1,0),(5,0) Disable SCSI manager support.  Prevents
                         OS2SCSI.DMD from reporting that SCSI devices listed
                         are available for allocation to drivers written to IBM
                         SCSI.SYS interfaces.  SCSI devices might be listed in
                         single digits as SCSI device numbers, or as pairs of
                         numbers indicating a SCSI device number and logical
                         unit number.

/!HCR or /!HCR:(1,0),5   Disable hardware read cache.  Prevents the DPT Adapter
                         from retaining data read from the SCSI devices in its
                         cache.  The default (/HCR) enables caching, which
                         enhances overall system performance.  This parameter
                         can apply to either specific SCSI target IDs or to all
                         SCSI devices on the adapter depending on whether the
                         parameter is followed by a list of SCSI target IDs.

/!HCW or /!HCW:(1,0),5   Disable hardware write cache.  Prevents the DPT
                         Adapter from performing deferred writes to SCSI
                         devices.  DPT adapters increase overall system
                         performance by accepting data written to a SCSI device
                         in its cache and then at a later time, completing the
                         actual transfer to the device.

                         Setting this parameter causes the adapter to wait for
                         the transfer to the SCSI device to complete prior to
                         returning to the OS/2 operating system.  This
                         parameter can apply to either specific SCSI Target IDs
                         or to all SCSI devices on the adapter depending on
                         whether the parameter is followed by a list of SCSI
                         Target IDs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Operating System/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trademark of the IBM Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Micro Channel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trademark of the IBM Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.11. CACHE - Write Contents of Memory to Disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specifies the parameters that the High Performance File System (HPFS) uses to
write information to a disk.  This command is specified as part of a RUN
statement in the CONFIG.SYS file or entered at a command prompt.

CACHE   ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
           ΓööΓöÇ /LAZY:state ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ /MAXAGE:time ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
        ΓööΓöÇ /DISKIDLE:time ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ /BUFFERIDLE:time ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands: IFS, IFS (HPFS.IFS)

If you enter this command without a parameter, the operating system displays
the current values for CACHE.

You can use cache memory if you have:

o Formatted the hard-disk partition during OS/2 installation
o Selected the High Performance File System

The system installation program sets up caching for the primary partition
through the OS2.INI file.  The HPFS manages a cache of memory divided into
blocks of 2KB.  Data that is read from and written to the disk is transferred
through this cache so that it can be used in satisfying future requests.  This
cache is separate from that of the BUFFERS and DISKCACHE commands discussed
elsewhere in this reference.

When a user requests data that is not present in the cache, the HPFS selects
the least recently used (LRU) block, writes the data within that block to disk
if necessary, and then fills the block with the requested data.  This
significantly increases the chances that often-used data will be found in
memory, thus saving the expense of a disk-read operation.

In addition, the file system takes advantage of its knowledge of cache block
contents.  Data, not expected to be reused soon by the file system, is placed
in cache blocks marked for immediate reuse.  In most cases, when a write
request is received, it is not necessary to write the data immediately to disk.
The HPFS takes such data and copies it to the block cache without actually
performing the disk-write operation.  Once the data is in the cache, it is
written to disk as a background activity.

Also, because these lazy-writes are performed during disk idle time, incoming
requests need not wait for large disk- write operations to be completed.  This
optimizes overall system throughput and response time for all requesting
processes.

The HPFS also contains additional levels of caching that speed up access to
directories.  The HPFS uses this cache to quickly get to the directory on which
the request is being made.

Note:   If you set the /LAZY parameter to ON, select Shut down from the menu of
        the desktop before turning off your system.  Failure to do so will
        cause loss of data if the contents of the HPFS cache buffers have not
        been erased and written to disk.  For safety, and if performance is not
        a concern, use the /LAZY:OFF option, which causes a write through the
        cache to the disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CACHE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To have data in cache memory immediately written to disk, enter the following
at an OS/2 command prompt:

CACHE /LAZY:OFF

To turn lazy-writing back on after you have turned it off, and retain use of
the same command prompt session, enter the following at the OS/2 command
prompt:

DETACH CACHE /LAZY:ON

To have data in cache memory immediately written to disk and have this
lazy-writing state remain as the default, type the following in your
STARTUP.CMD file:

C:\OS2\CACHE.EXE /LAZY:OFF

To have data that has been in cache memory longer than 4000 milliseconds
written to disk, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

RUN=C:\OS2\CACHE.EXE /MAXAGE:4000

To set the amount of disk idle time to 2000 milliseconds, type the following in
the CONFIG.SYS file:

RUN=C:\OS2\CACHE.EXE /DISKIDLE:2000

To set the amount of cache buffer idle time to 1000 milliseconds, type the
following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

RUN=C:\OS2\CACHE.EXE /BUFFERIDLE:1000


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.12. CALL - Nest Batch Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Calls a batch file from within another batch file without ending the first one.
A batch file can then be used as commands from within a master batch file.

CALL ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ batchfile ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                       ΓööΓöÇ argument ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  ECHO, ENDLOCAL, EXTPROC, FOR, GOTO, IF, PAUSE, REM,
SETLOCAL, SHIFT

It is important to note that:

o Piping and redirection should not be used with the CALL command.

o You can use CALL from any line inside a batch file.

o The number of batch files is limited only by available memory. In an OS/2
  session, a batch file should not call itself. If it does, it runs out of
  stack space and ends. In a DOS session, a batch file can call itself, but
  make sure that the batch file eventually ends.

o CALL causes the data structure and file pointer of the currently running
  batch file to be saved, and a new data structure to be created.  When the
  called batch file ends, the original batch file continues its processing with
  the statement following CALL.

o You can use CALL to protect your INI files by having them automatically
  backed up each time you start your system.  For example, if you include the
  following statements in your CONFIG.SYS file, a backup copy of your current
  INI files and a backup copy of the INI files as they existed at the previous
  system startup will be made.

    CALL=C:\OS2\XCOPY.EXE C:\OS2\*.INX C:\OS2\*.INY
    CALL=C:\OS2\XCOPY.EXE C:\OS2\OS2*.INI C:\OS2\*.INX

  By copying the INI files this way, you will always be able to recover a
  recent version of these files in case the user INI file becomes damaged.

o Batch-file parameters can be passed to another batch file with CALL.

As an example, assume that you have two batch files.  Your first batch file is
named EXAMPLE1.CMD, which contains these commands:

ECHO EXAMPLE1.CMD is running ...
CALL EXAMPLE2
ECHO EXAMPLE1.CMD is running again ...

Your second batch file, the one you want to call, is EXAMPLE2.CMD.  It
contains:

ECHO EXAMPLE2.CMD is running now ...

If you are in the root directory when you type EXAMPLE1 at the OS/2 command
prompt, the following is displayed on your screen:

[C:\] ECHO EXAMPLE1.CMD is running ...
EXAMPLE1.CMD is running ...

[C:\] ECHO EXAMPLE2.CMD is running now ...
EXAMPLE2.CMD is running now ...

[C:\] ECHO EXAMPLE1.CMD is running again ...
EXAMPLE1.CMD is running again ...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CALL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To call two files named ACCOUNT.BAT and MARY.BAT, type the following in your
batch file:

CALL ACCOUNT
CALL MARY

If you want to pass the second and third parameters, along with the value of
FILE, to a batch file named MARKET, type the following in your batch file:

SET FILE=NEW.TXT
CALL MARKET %2 %3 %FILE%


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.13. CHCP - Change Code Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows you to alternate between two code-page character sets that are defined
in your CONFIG.SYS file.


CHCP ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                         ΓööΓöÇ nnn ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  CODEPAGE, COUNTRY,

Type this command without a parameter to display the current code page being
used or to determine if any are specified.

Because CHCP changes the code page for the current session, it is intended to
be used at the command prompt.  Any programs started under the primary command
processor inherit the command processor's current code page.

In the OS/2 environment, CHCP checks that the correct DEVINFO= statement is
included in the CONFIG.SYS file for the code page being requested.  If not, a
message is displayed.

CHCP accepts either one of the two prepared system code pages as correct.  If
you enter the number of a code page that has not been prepared for the system,
you receive an error message.  If no CODEPAGE= statement is included in the
CONFIG.SYS file, CHCP returns the default code page ID of the country.

Incorrect, partial, or mismatched setup of statements for code-page selections,
country code, keyboard layout, display, or printer can cause ineffective
switching between code pages. If your printer is correctly set up for code-page
switching, print jobs started in a DOS session or in the current OS/2 session,
after a successful CHCP command is issued, will print in the new code page.

Note:   To ensure you will be able to access files prepared with another code
        page, be sure to use only the characters A-Z and 0-9 when naming files
        and directories.  This prevents file access problems when switching
        between code pages that have different character capitalization rules.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHCP Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you want to change to the Multilingual code page (850) and your system has
been set up to use code pages 437 and 850, enter the following:

CHCP 850


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.14. CD or CHDIR - Change Current Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Changes the current directory or displays its name.

CHDIR ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
CD      ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ         ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ       ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  DIR, MD, RD, TREE

Type this command without a parameter to display the name of the current
directory. For example, typing CD displays the current directory on the default
drive. Type this command with a drive letter to display the current directory
for that drive.  For example, typing CD C: displays the current directory on
drive C.

CD or CHDIR can change the current directory, allowing you to access any
subdirectory you have created with the MD command.  If the directory you want
to change to has a different path from your current directory, you must enter
its entire path, including the root directory.  If you do not know the path of
the directory you want to change to, use the DIR or TREE commands.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CD or CHDIR Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you want to display the name of the current directory enter the following:

CD

If you want to display the name of the current directory on drive A enter the
following:

CD A:

If you want to change from the root directory to the subdirectory, ACCOUNTS,
enter the following:

CD ACCOUNTS

If you want to change to another subdirectory named NAMES, which is in the
ACCOUNTS subdirectory, enter the following:

CD NAMES

If you want to change from the root directory to the subdirectory,
ACCOUNTS\NAMES\MARY, enter the following:

CD ACCOUNTS\NAMES\MARY

If you want to change from the subdirectory ACCOUNTS\NAMES\MARY to the root
directory enter the following:

CD \

If you want to change from the subdirectory ACCOUNTS\NAMES\MARY to the
ACCOUNTS\NAMES subdirectory enter the following:

CD ..


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.15. CHKDSK - Check Disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Analyzes directories and files, determines the file system type, and produces a
disk status report. CHKDSK also displays the volume label and the volume serial
number of the disk.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ CHKDSK ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                 ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ

                              ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ  ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                         Γöé              Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÿ     Γö£ΓöÇ /F ΓöÇΓöñ      Γö£ΓöÇ /C ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                 ΓööΓöÇ /V ΓöÇΓöÿ      ΓööΓöÇ /F:n ΓöÇΓöÿ

The /C and /F:n parameters shown at the end of the CHKDSK command syntax are
only used with the High Performance File System.

Related Commands:  RECOVER

o Type this command at a DOS command prompt to produce a memory storage report.

o CHKDSK gives accurate information only when a hard disk is not in use.

o CHKDSK does not work in DOS sessions on drives that have an ASSIGN, JOIN, or
  SUBST command in effect.  Also, CHKDSK does not work on network drives.

You should run CHKDSK occasionally on each disk to check for errors. If errors
are found, CHKDSK displays the error messages and produces a status report.  If
you enter a file name after CHKDSK, the OS/2 operating system displays a status
report that gives the number of noncontiguous areas occupied by the file.
CHKDSK also produces a storage report.

CHKDSK can detect lost clusters on your disk.  These are parts of files that
the system did not save completely and that take up space on your disk.  If
CHKDSK finds these, it prompts you with a message asking if you want to convert
lost chains to files.  If you type a Y (yes), CHKDSK converts these parts into
files that you can examine and delete to save space on your disk.  If you type
an N (no), CHKDSK deletes these parts of files from your disk without warning.
The files CHKDSK creates from lost chains follow this naming convention:
FILEnnnn.CHK (nnnn is a sequential number starting with 0000).

To search for and recover lost file clusters on the drive that is the hard disk
from which you normally start the OS/2 operating system, follow these steps:

 1. Insert the system installation diskette in diskette drive A.
 2. Restart the system.  When the Logo panel appears, remove the installation
    diskette and insert diskette 1.  Press Enter to continue.
 3. At the first text panel that appears (Welcome to OS/2), press Esc.
 4. If the drive to be searched is a drive formatted for HPFS, the file
    UHPFS.DLL has to exist on the same diskette as CHKDSK, or UHPFS.DLL has to
    exist in a directory in the LIBPATH statement. To display the LIBPATH
    statement, enter TYPE \CONFIG.SYS in the drive of the disk that the system
    started from.
 5. In order for the system to display error messages, the file OSO001.MSG has
    to be on the same disk as CHKDSK or it has to exist in a directory in your
    DPATH statement.  To display your DPATH statement, enter DPATH at the
    command line.
 6. Run CHKDSK in drive A, specifying C as the drive to be searched.

To recover lost clusters on the drive that contains CHKDSK, copy CHKDSK to
another drive and run it from that drive by specifying the drive and path.

If the /F parameter is not specified and there are open files, CHKDSK may
report lost clusters on the disk.  This happens when open files have been
written to but the file allocation table (FAT) is not updated. If many clusters
are reported as lost, use the /F parameter to search the disk.

Extended Attributes:  CHKDSK will attempt to validate the clusters with files
or directories that contain extended attributes. An extended attribute is a
special area used for storing data that describes the file or directory to the
operating system or to an application. If errors occur in any extended
attribute chain on the disk, CHKDSK prompts you to recover that chain into a
file that follows this naming format:  EAnnnn.CHK (nnnn is a sequential number
starting with 0000).  CHKDSK also recovers the file or directory associated
with the extended attribute chain and places it in a file that follows this
naming format:  FILEnnnn.CHK. The number in this file name corresponds to the
number shown in the EAnnnn.CHK file name. CHKDSK places all files it creates in
the root directory of the specified drive.

Return Codes:

0 -  Normal completion
1 -  Not defined
2 -  Not defined
3 -  Ended by user
4 -  Ended due to error
5 -  Not defined
6 -  CHKDSK was unable to execute file system's CHKDSK program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.15.1. High Performance File System Considerations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o When using CHKDSK on a disk formatted for the High Performance File System
  (HPFS), it is important to note how CHKDSK processes lost clusters and how
  they are recovered.

  CHKDSK does not delete lost clusters.  If lost clusters are found and the /F
  parameter is specified, CHKDSK recovers lost clusters and does not prompt you
  if you want to convert lost chains to files.  Instead, CHKDSK creates a
  subdirectory of the root directory named \FOUND.mmm and places recovered
  files, directories, and extended attributes there.  The "mmm" in the
  directory name represents a three-digit number so that each directory name is
  unique. CHKDSK stores recovered files as files with the naming format:
  FILEnnnn.CHK.  It stores recovered directories as directories that follow
  this naming format: DIRnnnn.CHK.

o When using CHKDSK on a disk formatted for the High Performance File System,
  you cannot specify a file by using the filename parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHKDSK Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To analyze a file named REPORTS.ABC, enter the following:

CHKDSK REPORTS.ABC

To use global file-name characters to display the status of all files that
begin with "REPORT" and contain other characters, enter the following:

CHKDSK REPORT*.*

To fix errors that are found in the file allocation table or directory, enter
the following:

CHKDSK /F

To display all files and directories on the current drive, enter the following:

CHKDSK /V

To specify files that will be recovered if the file system was in an
inconsistent state when the computer was started, enter the following:

CHKDSK /C

To specify a recovery level, (If no number is specified, CHKDSK assumes
recovery level 2) enter the following:

CHKDSK /F

To specify that CHKDSK is to analyze the file system, display information about
its state, but not perform any repairs. enter the following:

CHKDSK /F:0

To specify that CHKDSK is to resolve inconsistent file system structures. enter
the following:

CHKDSK /F:1

To specify that CHKDSK is to resolve inconsistent file system structures, scan
disk space that is in use but not referred to by the file system, and recover
recognizable file or directory structures that are found, enter the following:

CHKDSK /F:2

To specify all level 2 recovery and also specify CHKDSK is to scan the entire
disk partition for recognizable file system structures. enter the following:

CHKDSK /F:3

Note:   The /C and /F:n parameters are only operable with the High Performance
        File System.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.16. CLS - Clear Screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Clears the window or entire display screen of any information.

CLS ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

To clear the screen, enter the following:

CLS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.17. CMD - Start an OS/2 Command Processor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Starts the OS/2 command processor, CMD.EXE, found in the C:\OS2 subdirectory.
To return to the previous command processor, use the EXIT command.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ CMD ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ            ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
      ΓööΓöÇ /Q ΓöÇΓöÿ      ΓööΓöÇ /S ΓöÇΓöÿ      Γö£ΓöÇ /K "string" ΓöÇΓöñ
                                  ΓööΓöÇ /C "string" ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  COMMAND, EXIT, SET, and START

Type this command without a parameter to start another command processor. To
return to the previous command processor, use the EXIT command.

If you change any environment variables in the current command processor, the
change is known only to the current command processor.  For example, suppose
you enter CMD to start another command processor.  You then change the prompt
to something other than the default and exit back to the previous command
processor.  The previous command processor still has the default prompt.

Use quotation marks to pass significant characters to the new CMD.EXE. To have
a new CMD.EXE process the DIR command and then have the parent CMD.EXE display
the word "HELLO," type the following:

CMD /C DIR & ECHO HELLO

To have the new CMD.EXE process the DIR command and display the word "HELLO,"
type the following:

CMD /C "DIR & ECHO HELLO"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CMD.EXE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To tell CMD.EXE to set the value of the COMSPEC environment variable to drive
C, path ACCOUNTS\NAMES, type the following:

CMD C:\ACCOUNTS\NAMES,

To tell the command processor being started not to install a signal handler
normally used for Ctrl+C (end a program), type the following:

CMD /S

To start a secondary command processor and override the default for copying (no
echo) the command line to standard output, type the following:

CMD /Q

To start another command processor, process the DIR command on drive A, and
retain the current command processor, type the following:

CMD /K DIR A:

To pass quoted filenames to CMD.EXE, you must include the outer set of
quotation marks.

To have the secondary CMD.EXE run the program, C:\UTIL\WORD PROCESSOR.EXE, that
exists on drive C, which is formatted with the HPFS, and retain the current
command processor, type the following:

CMD /K ""C:\UTIL\WORD PROCESSOR.EXE""

If the program requires arguments, type them as:

CMD /K ""C:\UTIL\WORD PROCESSOR.EXE" ARG1 ARG2"

To start another command processor, process the DIR command on drive A, and
automatically return to the previous command processor after DIR is complete,
type the following:

CMD /C DIR A:

To have a new CMD.EXE process the DIR command and then have the parent CMD.EXE
display the word "HELLO," type the following:

CMD /C DIR & ECHO HELLO

To have the new CMD.EXE process the DIR command and display the word "HELLO,"
type the following:

CMD /C "DIR & ECHO HELLO"

To have the secondary CMD.EXE run the program, C:\UTIL\WORD PROCESSOR.EXE, that
exists on drive C, which is formatted with the HPFS, and return to the previous
command processor, type the following:

CMD /C ""C:\UTIL\WORD PROCESSOR.EXE""

If the program requires arguments, type them as:

CMD /C ""C:\UTIL\WORD PROCESSOR.EXE" ARG1 ARG2"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.18. CODEPAGE - Prepare Code Pages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selects the system code pages (defined character sets) to be prepared by the
OS/2 operating system for code-page switching.  You must include the
appropriate DEVINFO statements (for keyboard and video display) for both code
pages in the CONFIG.SYS file.

CODEPAGE = xxx ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                            ΓööΓöÇ ,yyy ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  COUNTRY, DEVINFO (Display), and DEVINFO (Keyboard).

Note that the display and printers each default to a native device character
set.  The keyboard and country information default to the national language
code page supported by the country code specified in the COUNTRY statement.

When your computer displays output, the characters used are defined by a
specific code page.  Each code page contains letters, numbers, symbols, and
other characters common to a particular country.  Each character has a number
(1 to 255) assigned to it. For example, character number 212 might display one
character in the U.S. code page (437), but a different one in the Portuguese
code page (860). Therefore, you should use your default national-language code
page unless you are working with files that were created using another code
page or unless you are planning to send files to other countries.

When using a file that was created in another code page, you can switch to that
code page or to the multilingual code page. We recommend you use the
multilingual code page (850) whenever possible because it supports many
languages. For example, suppose you create a file using code page 850 and send
it to someone in another country.  When that file is viewed or printed using
code page 850, it is identical to your copy. If, however, the file you send was
not created using the multilingual code page, the receiver will need to switch
to the code page that it was created with. Once code pages are defined on your
system, you can switch back and forth between the prepared code pages.

In the OS/2 operating system, a program or user can change the active code
page.  Two pages can be active simultaneously.  Code pages for the keyboard and
display can be set independently; however, code-page switching can take place
only in displays that support code-page switching, including the following
products:

o IBM Enhanced Color Display
o IBM Personal System/2* Displays
o IBM Enhanced Graphics Adapter
o IBM Personal System/2 Video Graphics Array
o IBM Personal System/2 Display Adapter
o IBM Personal System/2 8514/A

If you plan to switch code pages and are using a code page other than 850, we
recommend that you do not name your files or subdirectories with accented
characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CODEPAGE  Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To prepare code pages 437 and 850, insert the following statement in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

CODEPAGE=437,850

Choose the code pages you want to use from the list below:

The OS/2 operating system supports these code pages:

437     U.S.

850     Multilingual

852     Latin 2 (Czechoslovakia, Hungary, Poland, Yugoslavia)

857     Turkish

860     Portuguese

861     Iceland

862     Hebrew-speaking

863     Canada (French-speaking)

864     Arabic-speaking

865     Nordic

938     Republic of China

942     Japanese  SAA*

944     Korean   SAA

948     Republic of China SAA

Note 1    Code pages 862 and 864 are supported with a country supplement
          available only in certain countries.
Note 2    Code pages 932, 934, 938, 942, 944, and 948 are supported only with
          the DBCS version of the OS/2 operating system on DBCS hardware.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.19. COMMAND - Start a DOS Command Processor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Starts the DOS command processor, COMMAND.COM, which is located in the
C:\OS2\MDOS subdirectory.


ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ COMMAND ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ
 ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ             ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
        Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /P ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ       Γö£ΓöÇ /C string ΓöÇΓöñ
        ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /E:x ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ       ΓööΓöÇ /K string ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  CMD, EXIT, SET

Type this command without a parameter to start another DOS command processor.
To return to the previous command processor, use the EXIT command.  If
COMMAND.COM is not found in the specified directory, the OS/2 operating system
searches the environment for the value of COMSPEC.  This system variable, which
is placed in the environment when a DOS session is started, describes the path
the system uses to reload the command processor.  You can change the value for
COMSPEC with the SET command.

If you use the SET command to change any environment variables in the current
command processor, the change is known only to the current command processor.
Returning to the primary DOS command processor with the EXIT command causes a
resumption of the environment that the primary DOS command processor knew
before the secondary copy existed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> COMMAND.COM Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start another command processor enter the following:

COMMAND

To pass a command (DIR B:) to a secondary command processor and return to the
primary command processor after the command is completed enter the following:

COMMAND /C DIR B:

To retain the DOS processor, enter the following:

COMMAND /P

To specify the size of the environment as 16KB, enter the following:

COMMAND /E:16384

To start another command processor, process the DIR command on drive A, and
retain the new command processor, enter the following:

COMMAND /K DIR A:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.20. COMP - Compare Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Compares the contents of two files.

ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ COMP ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
 ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ           ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  ΓööΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  DISKCOMP

Type this command without a parameter to start a step-by-step menu to compare
files.

The files you compare can be on the same or different drives, or in the same or
different directories. The two sets of files you want to compare can have the
same path and file names, provided they are on different drives.  If you
specify only a drive for the second file and do not specify a file name, COMP
assumes that the second file name is the same as the first.  If you specify a
drive or path with no file name for either the primary or secondary path and
file name, COMP assumes a file name of *..

After the comparison of the two files, COMP proceeds with the next pair of
files that match the two file names.  When COMP cannot find any more files that
match the first parameter, it displays a message asking if you want to compare
more files.  Type a Y (Yes) to compare two more files, or end COMP by entering
an N (No).

If the file sizes are different, COMP displays a message informing you of this
and asks if you want to continue.  You now have the option to continue the
comparison or end it.  If you choose to continue, COMP processes both files
based on the length of the smaller of the two files.

During a comparison, an error message appears for any location that contains
mismatching information in the two files.  After 10 mismatches, processing
ends.

COMP does not wait for you to insert a diskette containing a file to be
compared.  Therefore, if the file to be compared is on a diskette, enter COMP
without a parameter.  COMP then prompts for the file name.  Insert the diskette
and enter the name of the file to be compared.

Return Codes

0 - Normal completion.
1 - No files were found to compare.
2 - Some files or directories were not processed because of file errors.
3 - Ended by user.
4 - Ended because of error.
5 - Files did not compare O.K.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> COMP Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To compare all files in the NOTE subdirectory on drive C with the files in the
MEMO subdirectory on drive C, type the following:

COMP C:\NOTE C:\MEMO

To compare a file that is not on the same diskette as the COMP command itself,
and be prompted for the file names, type the following:

COMP

To compare all files on drive A and drive C that have a .ABC extension, type
the following:

COMP A:*.ABC C:

To compare all files on drive A that have a .ALL extension with the files on
drive B that have the same name but an extension of .BAK, enter the following:

COMP A:*.ALL B:*.BAK


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.21. COPY - Copy or Combine Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Copies one or more files.  COPY has these format options:

o Append ( + ) files. Use this option when merging multiple files into one
  file, or when adding one file to the end of another.

o Change the date and time ( + ,, ). Use this option when you want to change
  the date and time of a file, or if you want to update the date and time of a
  file after it is copied.

o Combine ( + ) files. Use the combine mode of copy when you can combine
  several other copy functions and there is at least one plus sign, and all of
  the file name specifications have a common name that can be substituted by a
  global file-name character.

o Refer to a device name  Use this option when specifying a device (for
  example, printer) during the copy process.

COPY ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
      ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ     Γö£ΓöÇ /A ΓöÇΓöñ
                           ΓööΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÿ     ΓööΓöÇ /B ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
                ΓööΓöÇ + ΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇ ,, ΓöÇΓöÿ
                                         ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                                         Γöé
ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö┤Γöñ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÿ   Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ /A ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                           Γöé  ΓööΓöÇ /B ΓöÇΓöÿ  Γöé
                                           Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /V ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                           ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /F ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  DISKCOPY, RENAME, VERIFY, XCOPY

You can copy files from one diskette or hard disk to another and you can copy
files within directories. If you want to copy one or more files to a
subdirectory, make sure that the subdirectory exists.  For example, if you
enter:

COPY C:\MON C:\REPORTS

and a REPORTS subdirectory does not exist, the system copies the contents of
the MON file to a file named REPORTS.  Also, you cannot copy a file to itself.

You can use global file name characters in the source file specification to
change the dates and times of a group of files.  If you do not include a target
file specification, all files found that match the source file specification
remain where they are, but their dates and times are changed.

Extended Attributes:  COPY preserves any existing extended attributes when the
file is copied (See the /F parameter). An extended attribute is a special area
used for storing data that describes the file or directory to the operating
system or to an application. When copying files and directories that have
extended attributes, be sure to use OS/2 2.1 to ensure all extended file
attributes are copied.

When combining or merging files, you must specify the file that has extended
attributes as the first source file. The first source file cannot be chosen as
the target file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> COPY Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To combine two ASCII files named MON and TUES, create a new file named DAYS,
and add an end-of-file character (Ctrl+Z) as the last character of the file,
type the following:

COPY MON + TUES /A DAYS

To combine an ASCII file named TUES with a binary file named WED and create a
new file named STATUS, type the following:

COPY TUES + WED /B STATUS

To verify that a file named REPORTS.TXT is copied correctly to a directory
named STATUS on drive C, type the following:

COPY REPORTS.TXT C:\STATUS /V

To copy a file named REPORTS.TXT to the STATUS directory on drive D and force
the command to fail if drive D does not support extended attributes, type the
following:

COPY REPORTS.TXT D:\STATUS /F

To copy a file named MON from the root directory on drive C to a directory
named REPORTS on drive C, type the following:

COPY C:\MON C:\REPORTS

To copy all the files in a directory named STATUS on drive A to the REPORTS
directory on drive C, type the following:

COPY A:\STATUS\*.* C:\REPORTS

To combine several other copy functions on files where all of the file-name
specifications have a common name that can be substituted by a global file-name
character, type the following:

Copy *.BAT + *.CMD *.ALL

To copy and combine files named MYPROG.XYZ and FILEA.ABC from the current drive
and directory and file FILEB.DEF from drive B and put them into a new file
called BIGFILE.TXT in the current directory, type the following:

COPY MYPROG.XYZ+FILEA.ABC+B:FILEB.DEF BIGFILE.TXT

To add files named MYPROG.XYZ, FILEA.ABC, and FILEB.DEF to an existing file
named MYPROG.XYZ, type the following:

COPY MYPROG.XYZ+FILEA.ABC+FILEB.DEF

To update the date and time of all files in the current directory to the
current date and time, type the following:

COPY *.* /B + ,,

To copy a binary file named MYFILE.BIN and send it to your printer (LPT1), type
the following:

COPY MYFILE.BIN /B LPT1

To copy a file named FRIDAY and send it to your plotter (COM1), type the
following:

COPY FRIDAY COM1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.22. COUNTRY - Identify Country Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Identifies the following information for a country:

o Date and time format
o Decimal separator
o Character-case map table
o Collating-sequence table used by SORT
o Double-byte character-set (DBCS) environment vector for double-byte
  characters.

COUNTRY = nnn ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöñ
               ΓööΓöÇ,ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÿ
                    ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  CODEPAGE, DATE, DEVINFO (Display), DEVINFO (Keyboard), KEYB,
SORT, TIME

This statement is one of the interrelated CONFIG.SYS statements required for
successful code-page switching.

The country-dependent information used by the OS/2 operating system is
determined by the COUNTRY statement that is active in the system.  This country
information is always the same for both operating environments.

The following table lists the country code and supported code pages for each
country. The first code page listed for each country is the system default when
a CODEPAGE statement is not specified in the CONFIG.SYS file.  The CONFIG.SYS
file does not change if the country information in the System Setup folder is
changed.  If your country is not listed, select the most similar country
supported.

Arabic-speaking               Country Code:  785  Code Pages:  864 (Note 1),
                              437
                              Country Code:  785  Code Pages:  864 (Note 1),
                              850
Asian English                 Country Code:  099  Code Pages:  437, 850
Australia                     Country Code:  061  Code Pages:  437, 850
Belgium                       Country Code:  032  Code Pages:  437, 850
Brazil                        Country Code:  055  Code Pages:  850, 437
Canada (French-speaking)      Country Code:  002  Code Pages:  863, 850
Czechoslovakia                Country Code:  042  Code Pages:  852, 850
Denmark                       Country Code:  045  Code Pages:  865, 850
Finland                       Country Code:  358  Code Pages:  437, 850
France                        Country Code:  033  Code Pages:  437, 850
Germany                       Country Code:  049  Code Pages:  437, 850
Hebrew-speaking               Country Code:  972  Code Pages:  862 (Note 1),
                              437
                              Country Code:  972  Code Pages:  862 (Note 1),
                              850
Hungary                       Country Code:  036  Code Pages:  852, 850
Iceland                       Country Code:  354  Code Pages:  850, 861
Italy                         Country Code:  039  Code Pages:  437, 850
Japan                         Country Code:  081  Code Pages:  932 (Note 2),
                              437, 850
                              Country Code:  081  Code Pages:  942 (Note 2),
                              437, 850
Korea                         Country Code:  082  Code Pages:  934 (Note 2),
                              437, 850
                              Country Code:  082  Code Pages:  944 (Note 2),
                              437, 850
Latin America                 Country Code:  003  Code Pages:  437, 850
Netherlands                   Country Code:  031  Code Pages:  437, 850
Norway                        Country Code:  047  Code Pages:  865, 850
Poland                        Country Code:  048  Code Pages:  852, 850
Portugal                      Country Code:  351  Code Pages:  860, 850
Republic of China             Country Code:  088  Code Pages:  938 (Note 2),
                              437, 850
                              Country Code:  088  Code Pages:  948 (Note 2),
                              437, 850
Spain                         Country Code:  034  Code Pages:  437, 850
Sweden                        Country Code:  046  Code Pages:  437, 850
Switzerland                   Country Code:  041  Code Pages:  437, 850
Turkey                        Country Code:  090  Code Pages:  857, 850
United Kingdom                Country Code:  044  Code Pages:  437, 850
United States                 Country Code:  001  Code Pages:  437, 850
Yugoslavia                    Country Code:  038  Code Pages:  852, 850

Note 1    Code pages 862 and 864 are supported only with a country supplement
          available only in certain countries.
Note 2    Code pages 932, 934, 938, 942, 944, and 948 are supported only with
          the Asian version of the OS/2 operating system on Asian hardware.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> COUNTRY Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set the date and time format for Canada (French), use 002 as the country
code and 863 as the desired code page.  Specify COUNTRY.SYS as the file
containing the country information and type the following statement in your
CONFIG.SYS file.

COUNTRY=002,C:\OS2\SYSTEM\COUNTRY.SYS

To specify the drive, directory, and name of the file that contains the country
information to be used, type the following statement in your CONFIG.SYS file.

C:\OS2\SYSTEM\COUNTRY.SYS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.23. CREATEDD - Create Dump Diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Creates a dump diskette for use with the Stand-Alone Dump procedure.

This command is intended to be used with the aid of your technical coordinator.


ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ CREATEDD ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ target ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                   drive

Related Commands:  TRACE, TRACEBUF, TRACEFMT

The CREATEDD utility program prepares a diskette for an OS/2 memory dump. If a
dump requires more than one diskette, the first diskette must be prepared with
CREATEDD while the rest can be any formatted diskettes.

Note:   As with other formatting operations, when you use CREATEDD to format a
        diskette that already contains information, all of the information on
        the diskette is erased.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Stand-Alone Dump Facility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This procedure is intended to be used with the aid of your technical
coordinator.

The Stand-Alone Dump facility provides an image of all of the physical memory
in the system.  Stand-Alone means when the dump is started, all system
activities stop and only the dump process continues.

Note:   The Stand-Alone Dump facility is intended for use at the direction of
        OS/2 support personnel. A dump is performed when a problem is difficult
        to reproduce, or other methods of problem determination do not identify
        the problem. The diskettes containing dump information are sent to an
        OS/2 support location for analysis and problem determination.

There are two procedures that need to be done to use the Stand-Alone Dump
facility. They are as follows:

 1. Create a dump diskette by using CREATEDD
 2. Perform the Stand-Alone Dump procedure


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Stand-Alone Dump Procedure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This procedure is intended to be used with the aid of your technical
coordinator.

Warning:  Performing a stand-alone dump is similar to restarting the system.
Use caution when using a stand-alone dump. While dumping is taking place, all
system activities in progress in all windows and full screens will stop and
modified files might not be saved.

Running a Stand-Alone Dump

 1. Start the Stand-Alone Dump facility.

    The Stand-Alone Dump facility can be started either manually or with the
    TRAPDUMP utility program.  The following describes both ways.

   o MANUAL: Press and hold down the Ctrl and Alt Keys, and press the Num Lock
     key twice. After a few seconds, the screen clears and the following
     message is displayed:

          Insert the dump diskette created by the CREATEDD utility
          into drive A and press any key to continue.

   o TRAPDUMP Utility Program:

     Warning:  Enabling TRAPDUMP automatically allows your system to initiate a
     stand-alone dump every time an error occurs in the application code.  You
     do not want to enable TRAPDUMP unless you really need to troubleshoot your
     operating system and have been instructed to do so by your technical
     coordinator.

     To enable TRAPDUMP, type the following statement in the CONFIG.SYS file:

          TRAPDUMP=ON

     By adding this statement, TRAPDUMP automatically initiates a stand-alone
     dump when a trap occurs that normally would force ending the application
     (for example, General Protection   Fault - 000D).

     When dumping is initiated, the screen clears and the following message is
     displayed:

          Insert the dump diskette created by the CREATEDD utility into drive A
          and press any key to continue.

 2. When instructed, insert the diskette labeled Dump Diskette 1 and press any
    key. This action starts the dump process. The following message is
    displayed:

        The storage dump is being performed...

 3. When the system dump is complete, or the current dump diskette is full, the
    following messages are displayed:

        The storage address ranges on this diskette are:

             beginning - ending memory address on the disk

        Press any key to continue.

 4. After you press a key, the following message is displayed:

        The diskette is full.
        Insert another formatted diskette in drive A.

        Press any key to continue.

    Insert the next dump diskette into drive A and press any key. This action
    continues the dump process and the following message is displayed:

             The storage dump is being performed...

        WARNING: Any data on the dump diskettes will be overwritten by the
                 Stand-Alone Dump Facility.

 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the following message is displayed:

        Insert storage dump diskette number 1 to complete dump.

        Press any key to continue.

    This allows the control program to write the dump summary record to Dump
    Diskette 1 and end the dump process.

After the process has ended, the following messages are displayed:

The storage dump has completed. Remove the dump diskette and restart
the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CREATEDD Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To prepare the diskettes for the Stand-Alone Dump procedure, do the following:

 1. Select an OS/2 command prompt.
 2. To create a dump diskette in drive A, type the following:

        CREATEDD A:

    Note:   CREATEDD.EXE must be in your current directory or path.


 3. The following message is displayed:

        Insert a new diskette in drive A:
        and press Enter when you are ready.

 4. When you press Enter, the following message is displayed:

        Are you using a 1.44 megabyte diskette in drive A: (Y/N)?

 5. Select Y for yes, or N for no and press Enter. CREATEDD displays the
    following message:

        The operating system dump diskette
        is being created.

 6. After the command prompt reappears, use the FORMAT command to format the
    remaining diskettes.  This number will vary with the amount of random
    access memory (RAM) in your system.  One 1.44MB diskette for each 2MB of
    RAM is suggested.
 7. Label the diskette that you created with the CREATEDD command as Dump
    Diskette 1. The diskettes that you created using the FORMAT command should
    be labeled as Dump Diskette 2 and so on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SAA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trademark of the IBM Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Personal System/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trademark of the IBM Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Quietwriter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trademark of the IBM Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Proprinter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trademark of the IBM Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trademark of the IBM Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.24. DATE - Set System Date ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays or changes the date known to the system and resets the date on your
computer's clock. This date is recorded in the directory when you create or
change a file.

DATE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                       Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  mm-dd-yy  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                       Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  dd-mm-yy  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                       ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  yy-mm-dd  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  COUNTRY, TIME

The OS/2 operating system accepts a slash (/), a period (.), and a dash (-), as
the valid date separator for your country.

Enter this command without a parameter to display the system date and be
prompted about changing it.

It is not necessary to change the date every day because your system hardware
is programmed to change months and years correctly, whether the month has 31,
30, 29, or 28 days.  If you must change the date, enter DATE at the command
prompt or from a batch file. If you do not want to change the date shown, press
Enter.

Note that the COUNTRY command in your CONFIG.SYS file allows you to change the
format in which the date is displayed and entered.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DATE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the system date and be prompted about changing it, enter the
following:

DATE

To change the date in the system to June 20 1990 without being prompted by the
system, enter the following:

DATE 06/20/90

or

DATE 06-20-90

or

DATE 06.20.90


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.25. DDINSTAL - Install Automated Device Drivers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Provides an automated way to install new device drivers after the operating
system has been installed.

DDINSTAL ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Enter this command to display the Device Driver Installation window from which
you can install device-driver files.

These files are provided on a separate diskette called a Device Support
diskette.  This diskette contains an xxx.DDP (device-driver profile) file that
controls the installation process.  The DDINSTAL program uses the information
from the device-driver profile to add the necessary statements to the
CONFIG.SYS file and to copy all the support files into their appropriate
directories on the hard disk.

After you type DDINSTAL at an OS/2 command prompt, the Device Driver
Installation window is displayed.  Select Help for instructions on how to
install the device drivers that are on the Device Support diskette.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DDINSTAL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the Device Driver Installation window from which you can install
device-driver files, enter the following:

DDINSTAL


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.26. DEBUG - Assist in Testing and Debugging Executable Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEBUG Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
      ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Use the DEBUG command without a location and file name to access the DOS DEBUG
environment and be able to enter all DEBUG commands in response to the DEBUG
prompt, a hyphen (-).  Refer to the documentation that came with your DOS
operating system for more information about the DEBUG command.

The following is a list of DEBUG commands:

?         Displays a list of the DEBUG commands.

A         Assembles 8086/8087/8088 mnemonics.

C         Compares two portions of memory.

D         Displays the contents of a portion of memory.

E         Enters data into memory starting at a specified address.

F         Fills a range of memory with specified values.

G         Runs the executable file that is in memory.

H         Performs hexadecimal arithmetic.

I         Displays one byte value from a specified port.

L         Loads the contents of a file or disk sectors into memory.

M         Copies the contents of a block of memory.

N         Specifies a file for an L or W command, or specifies the parameters
          for the file you are testing.

O         Sends one byte value to an output port.

P         Executes a loop, a repeated string instruction, a software interrupt,
          or a subroutine.

Q         Stops the DEBUG session.

R         Displays or alters the contents of one or more registers.

S         Searches a portion of memory for a specified pattern of one or more
          byte values.

T         Processes one instruction and then displays the contents of all
          registers, the status of all flags, and the decoded form of the
          instruction that DEBUG will process next.

U         Disassembles bytes and displays the corresponding source statements.

W         Writes the file being tested to a disk.

XA        Allocates expanded memory.

XD        Deallocates expanded memory.

XM        Maps expanded memory pages.

XS        Displays the status of expanded memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEBUG Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To access the DOS DEBUG environment, type the following:

DEBUG

Refer to the documentation that came with your DOS operating system for more
examples using the DEBUG command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.27. DETACH - Process Programs Noninteractively ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Starts and simultaneously detaches an OS/2 program from its command processor.

DETACH ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ command ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Any program that is started with DETACH must be able to process programs
independently outside the control of the command processor.  DETACH should not
issue any input or output calls to the keyboard, the mouse, or the display.

You can detach any program, command, or file that does not require the use of a
screen (for example, internal commands and batch (.CMD) files).  The OS/2
operating system detaches CMD.EXE when it runs the internal command or batch
file. For example, if you type DETACH DIR, it is changed to the equivalent of
DETACH CMD.EXE /C DIR.

CMD.EXE uses the value of the COMSPEC environment variable to locate the
CMD.EXE that should be detached before it runs internal commands and batch
files.

You can use DETACH with redirection sequences to redirect a program's standard
input and output to devices other than the keyboard and the display.  This
allows the program to run noninteractively.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DETACH      Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start and detach a batch program named SAMPLE.CMD from its command
processor, enter the following:

DETACH SAMPLE.CMD

To detach the CL command for compiling the TEST.C file and redirect the output
to LPT1, enter the following:

DETACH CL -C TEST.C > LPT1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.28. DEVICE - Install Device Drivers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Installs a device driver by specifying the path and complete file name of the
device driver in your CONFIG.SYS file.

DEVICE=ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γöñ
         ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ             ΓööΓöÇ arguments ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  BASEDEV

A device driver is a file that contains the code needed so that the OS/2
operating system can recognize the device and correctly process information
received from or sent to that device. It loads standard default drivers that
support standard system display terminals, keyboards, printers, diskette
drives, hard disk drives, and serial devices.  You can, however, replace these
or add other devices by coding and loading a device driver using DEVICE
statements in the CONFIG.SYS file.  DEVICE statements are processed in the
order in which they appear in the CONFIG.SYS file.

Any time you add or make changes to the CONFIG.SYS file, you must restart the
system in order for the new device or change to become effective. Remember, the
CONFIG.SYS file is read only during system startup.  Anything added to this
file after system initialization does not work until you restart the system.

Your OS/2 diskettes contain the following device drivers:

ANSI.SYS            Allows extended screen and keyboard support for DOS
                    sessions.

COM.SYS             Allows OS/2 application programs or system programs, such
                    as SPOOL, to use serial devices.

EGA.SYS             Allows DOS programs that require Enhanced Graphics Adapter
                    support to be run.

EXTDSKDD.SYS        Allows access to an external diskette drive referencing a
                    logical drive letter.

LOG.SYS             Allows system error logging using the SYSLOG utility
                    program.

MOUSE.SYS           Provides support for pointing devices.

OS2CDROM.DMD        Provides CD-ROM support for OS/2 sessions.

PMDD.SYS            Provides pointer draw support for OS/2 sessions

POINTDD.SYS         Provides mouse pointer draw support.

TOUCH.SYS           Provides support for touch devices.

VDISK.SYS           Installs a simulated disk called a virtual disk.

VEMM.SYS            Provides DOS Expanded Memory Manager.

VXMS.SYS            Provides DOS Extended Memory Specification.

The printer driver diskettes that come with the OS/2 operating system contain
printer device drivers.  Refer to the Master Help Index for information about
installing these files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.28.1. Install DOS and OS/2 Device Drivers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Both DOS and OS/2 device drivers can be loaded with the DEVICE statement.  OS/2
device drivers are initialized when you start the OS/2 operating system and can
process requests from either DOS or OS/2 programs.  DOS device drivers are also
initialized when you start the OS/2 operating system but they can only process
requests from DOS programs.

You can also install a device driver by using one of the following:

o OS/2 System Installation program
o DDINSTAL command
o System Editor

OS/2 System Installation is a menu-driven program designed to guide you through
the installation process of installing OS/2 2.1 on all systems supported by
OS/2 2.1.  It installs the device drivers that are required for your system's
operation. It also installs device drivers supplied on separate device driver
diskettes such as the printer driver diskettes.

DDINSTAL provides an automated way to install device drivers after you have
installed the OS/2 operating system. Any device that you can add comes with its
own device driver diskette.  That diskette has a device driver profile (a file
with a .DDP extension) that controls the installation process. DDINSTAL uses
the information from that profile to add the necessary statements to the
CONFIG.SYS file and to copy all the support files into their appropriate
directories on the hard disk.

Some device drivers are very simple. They do not have, nor do they depend on,
other support files to operate.  Because of their simplicity, you can easily
install these types of device drivers without much trouble by using an editor
such as the System Editor and adding a DEVICE statement in your CONFIG.SYS
file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEVICE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify a device driver named SOUND.SYS that you have installed in the
C:\SOUND directory, type the following in your CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\SOUND\SOUND.SYS

To specify a device driver named SOUND.SYS that you have installed in the
C:\SOUND directory and activate a G switch option, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\SOUND\SOUND.SYS /G


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.29. DEVICE (ANSI.SYS) - Install Extended Display and Keyboard Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows you to use extended keyboard and display support in DOS sessions. This
device driver has no effect on OS/2 sessions.

                                              ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                                           Γöé
DEVICE= ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ ANSI.SYS ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
           ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ              Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /X ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                               ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /K ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  ANSI

You specify this support by placing this DEVICE statement in your CONFIG.SYS
file.  Then, when you start the OS/2 operating system and switch to a DOS
session, the standard input and standard output support is replaced with the
extended functions. These functions allow you to redefine keys, manipulate the
cursor, and change display color attributes. If you no longer want the extended
functions for DOS sessions, you can remove the DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\ANSI.SYS
statement from your CONFIG.SYS file and restart the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ANSI.SYS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To provide extended functions for DOS sessions, type the following statement in
your CONFIG.SYS file and restart the system.

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\ANSI.SYS

To install ANSI.SYS and be able to redefine your extended key values, type the
following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\ANSI.SYS /X

To allow a system with an enhanced keyboard to be functionally compatible with
the conventional keyboard, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\ANSI.SYS /K


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.30. DEVICE (COM.SYS) - Install Serial Device Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows OS/2 application programs or system programs, such as the OS/2 Spooler,
to use serial devices.

Device drivers that support other devices attached to serial ports COM1 through
COM4 must be listed before the DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM.SYS statement in the
CONFIG.SYS file, or the port will be unavailable to COM.SYS.

DEVICE= ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ COM.SYS ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
           ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
 Γö£ΓöÇ (n,addr,IRQ,S) ΓöÇΓöñ
 ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ (n,addr,IRQ) ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

The COM.SYS file supports ports COM1, COM2, COM3, and COM4.  It does not
provide any support for devices that are attached to the COM port.  Instead, it
provides enabling support for the asynchronous communications interface itself.
Application programs, subsystems, and system programs must provide the support
needed to use devices attached to the COM port.  This allows support for:

o A special device for an application program's use that is not adequately
  supported by this device driver
o Additional COM ports beside COM1 through COM4
o Enhanced device driver function for a COM port (which might be required for
  certain subsystem support).

This device driver supports application programs with the following RS-232C
(serial device) interface functions:

o Duplex communication
o Automatic flow control (XON/XOFF) for both transmit and receive
o Various modem line handshaking modes
o Standard and nonstandard baud rates
o Receive data-error character replacement.

It also supports these system features:

o Multiple active COM ports
o Read and write request queueing
o Interrupt-driven I/O processing
o Internal transmit and receive data buffers
o Several device status query functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> COM.SYS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To provide file system support for communications ports COM1 through COM4,
ensure the device drivers that support serial ports COM1, COM2, COM3, and COM4
are listed before the COM statement in your CONFIG.SYS file as follows:

DEVICE=C:\PRINTER\COM1.SYS
DEVICE=C:\PRINTER\COM2.SYS
DEVICE=C:\PRINTER\COM3.SYS
DEVICE=C:\PRINTER\COM4.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM.SYS

In the previous example, the device drivers that support COM1 through COM4
(COM1.SYS - COM4.SYS) are located in the C:\PRINTER subdirectory.

To install a serial device on COM4 for ISA/EISA bus computers, type the
following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM.SYS (4,2e8,10)

To install serial devices on COM3 and COM4 for ISA/EISA bus computers, type the
following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM.SYS (3,3e8,5) (4,2e8,9)

To install an asynchronous device (a modem that sometimes works poorly and
causes numerous unexpected interrupts) and choose to ignore all the interrupts,
type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM.SYS (2,02f8,4,I)

To install the same device as above but choose to shut down all the COM ports
when more than 1000 consecutive unexpected interrupts occur, type the following
in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM.SYS (2,02f8,4,D)
          or
DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM.SYS (2,2f8,4)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.31. DEVICE (EGA.SYS) - Install Enhanced Graphics Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Supports the EGA register interface.

DEVICE= ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ EGA.SYS ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
           ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

The EGA.SYS device driver provides support for the EGA register interface in
DOS sessions. EGA.SYS must be installed for those application programs that use
the EGA register interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EGA.SYS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To provide support for the EGA register interface in DOS sessions, type the
following statement in your CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\EGA.SYS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.32. DEVICE (EXTDSKDD.SYS) - Assign a Drive Letter to a Diskette Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows you to access a disk using a logical drive letter.

DEVICE= ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ EXTDSKDD.SYSΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
           ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

    ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                   Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /D:d ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /T:t ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /S:s ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /H:h ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /F:f ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

More than one external device driver can be installed at the same time.  The
maximum number is the total number of physical diskette drives installed in
your system. Installed virtual disks do not affect the drive letter assignments
described here if DEVICE=C:\OS2\VDISK.SYS statements are listed after
DEVICE=C:\OS2\EXTDSKDD.SYS statements in the CONFIG.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.32.1. Assign Drive Letters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The first physical internal diskette drive is designated drive A. The second
internal diskette drive is designated drive B. Other devices or device drivers
are assigned letter values (beginning with C) based on the order in which they
are encountered.  The existence of internal diskette drives and hard disks is
checked first; then the CONFIG.SYS file is checked for device drivers. For the
OS/2 operating system to recognize an external physical device, the CONFIG.SYS
file must have the correct device driver information.

The drive letter B is automatically used, even if there is only one physical
drive; thus, a machine with only one diskette drive has two logical diskette
drives: A and B. In this case, a specified parameter of /D:1 is an error. The
first hard disk or the first block device driver cannot assign a drive letter
lower than C.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXTDSKDD.SYS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify the first physical diskette drive, accessed as A: from the command
prompt, type the following statement in your CONFIG.SYS file and restart your
system:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\EXTDSKDD.SYS /D:0

Physical Diskette Drive Table

0 = accessed as A
1 = accessed as B
2 = accessed as D or E external drives only

To specify the number of tracks as 36 per side of the physical diskette
accessed from the command prompt, type the following statement in your
CONFIG.SYS file and restart your system:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\EXTDSKDD.SYS /T:36

The tracks-per-side default is 80
Valid tracks per side are 1 through 99

To specify the number of sectors as 20 for the physical diskette accessed from
the command prompt, type the following statement in your CONFIG.SYS file and
restart your system:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\EXTDSKDD.SYS /S:20

The sectors-per-track default is 80
Valid sectors per track are 1 through 99

To specify the maximum number of heads as 15 for the physical diskette drive
accessed from the command prompt, type the following statement in your
CONFIG.SYS file and restart your system:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\EXTDSKDD.SYS /H:15

The heads default is 2
Valid number of heads is 1 through 99

To specify the device type (form factor) 0 for the physical diskette drive
accessed from the command prompt, type the following statement in your
CONFIG.SYS file and restart your system:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\EXTDSKDD.SYS /F:0

The device type default is 2
0 = 360KB Diskette Drives
1 = 1.2MB Diskette Drives
2 = 720KB

To copy from an internal diskette drive to the same drive, and specify a 1.2MB
drive as the first (A) diskette drive, a 320/360KB drive as the second (B)
diskette drive, and a hard disk (C), type the following statement in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\EXTDSKDD.SYS /D:0 /T:80 /S:15 /H:2 /F:1

The first physical drive can now be referred to as either A or D.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.33. DEVICE (LOG.SYS) - Install Logging Service Device Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Activates the System Error Logging Service device driver.  Once activated, the
System-Error Logging Service can be paused.  When paused, no error logging is
performed.

DEVICE = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ LOG.SYS ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
              ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
            ΓööΓöÇ /E:x ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ /A:x ΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇ /OFF ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  SYSLOG, RUN (LOGGING)

You must include a RUN=LOGDAEM.EXE command in the CONFIG.SYS file in addition
to this DEVICE=LOG.SYS statement.  These two commands and their parameters
allow the System Error Logging Service to retrieve error data and keep that
data in specific error-log files.  LOG.SYS is the file name of the System Error
Logging Service device driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LOG.SYS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set the size of the System Error Logging Service error-log buffer to 32KB,
type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\LOG.SYS /E:32

To set the size of the System Error Logging Service error-log device driver
entry alert notification buffer to 64KB, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS
file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\LOG.SYS /A:64

To pause error logging, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\LOG.SYS /OFF


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.34. DEVICE (MOUSE) - Install a Mouse Device Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Implements support for pointing devices.

Device Dependent Statement

DEVICE = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
            ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
       ΓööΓöÇ SERIAL=COMn ΓöÇΓöÿ

Device Independent Statement

DEVICE = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ MOUSE.SYS ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
            ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
       Γö£ΓöÇ QSIZE=q ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
       Γö£ΓöÇ TYPE=name ΓöÇΓöñ
       ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ RELAXED ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

To effectively use a mouse, the POINTDD.SYS device driver must be installed.
To be able to use a mouse in programs running in a DOS window or full-screen
session or a WIN-OS/2 session, the VMOUSE.SYS device driver must also be
installed.  These device drivers are installed automatically at installation
when the system detects the presence of a supported pointing device.

If your pointing device is not supported by OS/2 2.1, you must install the
device driver for your pointing device.  Refer to the instructions that came
with your pointing device for device driver installation.  In addition, you
must include these statements in the CONFIG.SYS file in the following order:

o A device-dependent statement that gives the file name containing the
  information for the mouse you use and the COM port to which it is connected
  if it is connected to one.  You need to use the SERIAL parameter in this
  statement.

o A device-independent statement that identifies the mouse to MOUSE.SYS.

All statements for serial mouse device drivers must precede any COM.SYS
statements in the CONFIG.SYS file so that both device drivers are installed
correctly.

During installation of OS/2 2.1, the MOUSE.SYS device driver tries to detect
what type of pointing device you have attached to your system.  If you have a
Microsoft** compatible mouse, support for that pointing device is added to your
CONFIG.SYS file.  If you have the IBM Personal System/2* Mouse, the following
statements are placed in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VMOUSE.SYS

Assume you want to install the PC Mouse System serial mouse on your computer
and have it use COM port 2 for all sessions.  You would type the following in
the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\PCLOGIC.SYS SERIAL=COM2
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS TYPE=PCLOGIC$
DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM.SYS

To use the RELAXED parameter to prevent a 3-button mouse from causing the mouse
pointer to jump around the screen, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS RELAXED

COM.SYS must be loaded after the mouse statements so that the mouse can gain
access to the COM port.  For all personal computer models, the device driver is
COM.SYS.  The preceding example dedicates the COM2 port to the mouse.  When
your system is started, the mouse device driver is loaded and takes the COM2
port, leaving the COM1 port available for the COM.SYS device driver to use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MOUSE.SYS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you have the IBM Personal System/2 Mouse, the following statements are
placed in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS
DEVICE=D:\MDOS\VMOUSE.SYS

To install the PC Mouse System serial mouse on your computer and have it use
COM port 2 for all sessions, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\PCLOGIC.SYS SERIAL=COM2
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS TYPE=PCLOGIC$
DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM.SYS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.35. DEVICE (OS2CDROM.DMD) - Install CD-ROM Device Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Provides support for CD-ROM drives.



DEVICE= ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇOS2CDROM.DMDΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
           ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ              Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /V ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                               ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /Q ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OS2CDROM.DMD Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To prevent an error message from displaying if the CD-ROM drive is turned off
when OS/2 2.1 is started, type:

DEVICE=OS2CDROM.DMD /Q


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.36. DEVICE (PMDD.SYS) - Install Presentation Manager Draw Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Provides pointer draw device-driver support for OS/2 sessions.

DEVICE= ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ PMDD.SYS ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
           ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

The DEVICE=PMDD.SYS statement is added to your CONFIG.SYS file when you install
the OS/2 operating system. When the system starts, it uses the PMDD.SYS device
driver to provide pointer draw support for OS/2 sessions.

If the PMDD.SYS device statement is removed from your CONFIG.SYS file, your
system will not restart.  If this happens, do the following:

 1. Insert the OS/2 Installation Program diskette.  When the logo screen
    appears, proceed to the Welcome screen and press Esc.
 2. Copy the file, CONFIG.BAK, into the root directory. You now have a generic
    backup CONFIG.SYS file that you can rename to be your CONFIG.SYS file.
 3. Use the System Editor to edit the CONFIG.SYS file.
 4. Restart the system.

The following shows the PMDD.SYS statement.

DEVICE=C:\OS2\PMDD.SYS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PMDD.SYS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To provide pointer draw support for OS/2 sessions, type the following statement
in your CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\PMDD.SYS

Note:   If this statement is not in your CONFIG.SYS file, your system will not
        start.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.37. DEVICE (POINTDD.SYS) - Install Mouse Pointer Draw Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Provides mouse-pointer draw support. To effectively use a mouse, you must load
this device driver, in addition to specifying the appropriate mouse
device-driver statements in the CONFIG.SYS file.

DEVICE= ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ POINTDD.SYSΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
           ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  DEVICE MOUSE

Text modes 0, 1, 2, 3, and 7 are the only modes supported.  For graphic modes
D, E, F, and 10, the EGA.SYS device driver must also be installed.

POINTDD.SYS provides draw support in all text modes for OS/2 sessions;
POINTDD.SYS tracks (provides mode information) for all advanced function modes
on the 8514A.  It tracks for CGA, EGA, and VGA graphic modes in OS/2 sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> POINTDD.SYS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To provide mouse-pointer draw support in all text modes for OS/2 sessions, type
the following statement in your CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.38. DEVICE (TOUCH.SYS) - Install a Device Driver for Touch Devices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Implements support for touch devices.  For a touch device to be effectively
used, the POINTDD.SYS device driver and appropriate mouse device-driver support
must be loaded. In addition, these statements must be included in the
CONFIG.SYS file in the following order:

o A device-dependent statement that gives the name of the file containing the
  information for the touch device you use.

o A device-independent statement that identifies the touch device to TOUCH.SYS

Device Dependent Statement

DEVICE = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
            ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇCODEΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇINITΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöé


Device Independent Statement

DEVICE = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ TOUCH.SYS ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
            ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
       Γö£ΓöÇ  QSIZE=q  ΓöÇΓöñ
       ΓööΓöÇ TYPE=name ΓöÇΓöÿ

When the OS/2* operating system detects a touch device installed on your
computer, the Install program automatically loads the required device-driver
support necessary to enable the touch device.  The touch device shares the
auxiliary device (mouse) port on the system with the mouse by allowing the
mouse to connect to the touch device, which is then connected to the system.

The Install program automatically adds the following statements to the
CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\PDITOU0x.SYS CODE=C:\OS2TOUCO21.BIN INIT=C:TOUCH.INI
DEVICE=C:\OS2\TOUCH.SYS TYPE=PDITOU$
RUN=C:\OS2\CALIBRATE.EXE-C C:\OS2CALIBRAT.DAT
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS TYPE=PDIMOU$

where x is 1 or 2 depending on the bus architecture of your computer,
TOUCO21D.BIN is the touch-device microcode binary file, and TOUCH.INI is a text
file containing default parameter settings.

The RUN=CALIBRAT.EXE statement is to activate the Calibration program.  This
program performs the dual actions of downloading calibration-constant data to
the touch device each time the system is started, and enabling recalibration of
the touch device at initial setup, and when the device is moved to a new
location.

To recalibrate the touch device, enter the following at an OS/2 command prompt:

C:
CD \OS2
CALIBRAT -U

Note:   The use of the "-U" option updates the existing CALIBRAT.DAT file with
        new calibration data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TOUCH.SYS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The entry in the CONFIG.SYS file for the combined mouse and touch
device-dependent driver is as follows:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\PDITOU0x.SYS CODE=TOUCO21D.BIN INIT=TOUCH.INI

where x is 1 or 2 depending on the bus architecture of your computer,
TOUCO21D.BIN is the touch-device microcode binary file, and TOUCH.INI is a text
file containing default parameter settings.

The entry in the CONFIG.SYS file for the touch device-independent driver is as
follows:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\TOUCH.SYS TYPE=PDITOU$


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.39. DEVICE (VDISK.SYS) - Install a Virtual Disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Installs a virtual disk.

Any DEVICE=C:\OS2\VDISK.SYS statements must be listed after any
DEVICE=C:\OS2\EXTDSKDD.SYS statements in CONFIG.SYS to avoid affecting logical
drive letter assignments.

DEVICE= ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ VDISK.SYS ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
               ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ bytes ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
     ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ  , ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓö¼ΓöÇ sectors ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                   ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  ,  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ directories ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ
                                      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  , ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

The parameters, bytes, sectors, and directories are positional parameters. Use
a comma when you do not want to alter the default value of the parameter for
which the  comma is being used.  This tells the system to skip past the value
it is looking for at this position, insert the default value, and proceed to
the next value.

The following example shows how to install a 160KB virtual disk with 128-byte
sectors and 64 directory entries. Note that all parameters are being specified.

DEVICE=C:\OS2\VDISK.SYS 160 128 64

If you decide to use the default value of any of the parameters, such as the
sector size and directory entries, you can enter commas where the values should
be.

DEVICE=C:\OS2\VDISK.SYS 160,,

Assume that you want to specify a value for directories and accept the defaults
for bytes and sectors. The value for directories should be preceded by two
commas, as in this example:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\VDISK.SYS ,,32

However, to indicate only the sectors parameter as the default, you must use
two commas as follows:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\VDISK.SYS 160,,64

VDISK displays a message to tell you that it is installed and gives you the
drive letter that is assigned to the virtual disk.

If the virtual disk size specified is too large to fit in storage, VDISK tries
to make a 16KB virtual disk. This may result in a virtual disk with a different
number of directory entries than the number you specified with directories.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VDISK.SYS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To install a 160KB virtual disk with 128-byte sectors and 64 directory entries,
enter the following in your CONFIG.SYS and restart your system:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\VDISK.SYS 160 128 64

Note:   In the preceding example all parameters are specified in the following
        order, bytes, sectors, and directories.

You can enter commas for the default values of any of the parameters where the
real values should be.  The above example would then be as follows:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\VDISK.SYS 160,,

However, to indicate only the sectors parameter as the default, you must use
two commas as follows:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\VDISK.SYS 160,,64

Parameter Default Table

Bytes = 64

Sectors = 128

Directories = 64

To specify a value for directories and accept the defaults for bytes. and
sectors, enter the following in your CONFIG.SYS file and restart your system:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\VDISK.SYS ,,32


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Non-IBM Trademarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**) in this information, are
trademarks of other companies as follows:

Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
Logitech is a trademark of Logitech, Inc.
Lotus is a trademark of Lotus Development Corporation.
Microsoft is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Visi-On is a trademark of Visicorp.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.40. DEVICE (VEMM.SYS) - Provide DOS Expanded Memory Manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Provides Expanded Memory Manager (EMM) for DOS sessions.

DEVICE= ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ VEMM.SYS ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
           ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ              ΓööΓöÇ n ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  PROTECTONLY

VEMM.SYS is a virtual device driver that provides the
Lotus**/Intel**/Microsoft** (LIM) Version 4.0 Expanded Memory Specification
(EMS) emulation to DOS sessions.  VEMM.SYS allows DOS applications to allocate
and map expanded memory on the Intel 8086 family of computers.

Any DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VEMM.SYS n statements must be listed before any
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VXMS.SYS statements in the CONFIG.SYS file since VEMM
searches for unused addresses between 640KB and 1MB.

The following example shows the statement you type in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VEMM.SYS n


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VEMM.SYS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To provide a virtual device driver that provides Lotus**/Intel**/Microsoft**
(LIM) Version 4.0 Expanded Memory Specification (EMS) emulation to DOS sessions
with an EMM of 10KB, type the following statement in your CONFIG.SYS file and
restart your system:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VEMM.SYS 10

The Default is 2048KB (2MB)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.41. DEVICE (VXMS.SYS) - Provide DOS Extended Memory Specification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Provides Extended Memory Specification (XMS) for DOS sessions.

DEVICE= ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ VXMS.SYS ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
          ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ              Γö£ΓöÇ XMMLIMIT=g,i ΓöÇΓöñ
                                              Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ HMAMIN=d ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                              Γö£ΓöÇ NUMHANDLES=n ΓöÇΓöñ
                                              Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ UMB ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                              ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ NOUMB ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

VXMS.SYS is a virtual device driver that provides Extended Memory Specification
(XMS) emulation to DOS sessions.  XMS allows DOS applications to access more
than 1MB of memory, under XMS control.

If multiple DOS session support is requested during Installation, the system
places the following statements in the CONFIG.SYS file to provide the XMS, VDD,
and Load DOS High support to DOS sessions.

DOS=HIGH,UMB
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VXMS.SYS /UMB

Any DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VXMS.SYS statements must be listed after
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VEMM.SYS statements in the CONFIG.SYS file because VXMS
reserves all available addresses between 640KB and 1MB for use as upper memory
blocks (UMBs).  VXMS will not be installed if some other device driver has
already reserved the region from 1MB to 1MB+64KB.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VXMS.SYS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To provide Extended Memory Specification (XMS) emulation to allow DOS
applications access to greater than 1MB of memory, under XMS control, type the
following statement in your CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VXMS.SYS

To set the global (system-wide) maximum memory usage of the VXMS driver to g
KB, and a DOS session maximum of i KB, type the following in your CONFIG.SYS
file and restart your system:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VXMS.SYS /XMMLIMIT=g,i

The default is /XMMLIMIT=4096,1024

To set the minimum request size (in KB) for a High Memory Area (HMA) request to
succeed, type the following in your CONFIG.SYS file and restart your system.
Values are restricted to the range of 0 to 63.

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VXMS.SYS /HMAMIN=d

The default is /HMAMIN=0

To set the number of handles available in each DOS session, type the following
in your CONFIG.SYS file and restart your system.  Values are restricted to the
range of 0 to 128.

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VXMS.SYS /NUMHANDLES=n

The default is /NUMHANDLES=32

To instruct XMS to create upper memory blocks, type the following in your
CONFIG.SYS file and restart your system:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VXMS.SYS /UMB

The default is  /off

To instruct XMS not to create upper memory blocks, type the following in your
CONFIG.SYS file and restart your system:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VXMS.SYS /NOUMB

The default is  /NOUMB


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.42. DEVICEHIGH - Load DOS Device Driver into Upper Memory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Loads a specified DOS device driver into an available upper memory block (UMB)
for a DOS session.

DEVICEHIGH= Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γöñ
            ΓööΓöÇ SIZE=xx ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ            ΓööΓöÇ arguments ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  LOADHIGH, DOS (UMB/NOUMB)

DOS device drivers are normally loaded into low memory (below 640KB) in DOS
sessions.  However, when you type the DEVICEHIGH= statement into your
CONFIG.SYS file, the operating system will attempt to load the specified DOS
device driver into an available upper memory block (UMB).  If a UMB is not
available, the device driver will be loaded into low memory as is done for a
DEVICE= statement.  To enable UMBs, type the DOS=UMB statement in the
CONFIG.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEVICEHIGH Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To load the ANSI.SYS device driver into an upper memory block (UMB), type the
following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICEHIGH=C:\OS2\MDOS\ANSI.SYS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.43. DEVINFO - Prepare Devices for Code-Page Switching ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVINFO statements prepare a device (such as your keyboard or display terminal)
for code-page switching.  Separate DEVINFO statements are required for each
device to be used for code-page switching.

DEVINFOΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γöñ
         ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ             ΓööΓöÇ arguments ΓöÇΓöÿ

There are two different DEVINFO statements you can use:

KBD               Prepares a keyboard for code-page switching.  The keyboard
                  statement specifies your keyboard layout ID (keyboard country
                  and subcountry codes) and a file named KEYBOARD.DCP that
                  contains a keyboard layout table for translating keystrokes
                  into the characters of each code page supported by the OS/2
                  operating system.  Refer to the KEYB command for a table
                  containing the keyboard country and subcountry codes.

SCR               Prepares a display screen for code page switching.  The
                  display statement specifies your display name and a file
                  named VIOTBL.DCP that contains a video font table for
                  displaying characters in each of the code pages supported by
                  the OS/2 operating system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEVINFO Device Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Keyboard Examples

To prepare a U.S. keyboard using the keyboard layout, US, type the following in
the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=KBD,US,C:\OS2\KEYBOARD.DCP

To prepare the enhanced French keyboard 120, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=KBD,FR120,C:\OS2\KEYBOARD.DCP

Display Examples

To prepare a CGA display, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=SCR,CGA,C:\OS2\VIOTBL.DCP

To prepare an EGA display, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=SCR,EGA,C:\OS2\VIOTBL.DCP

To prepare a VGA display, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=SCR,VGA,C:\OS2\VIOTBL.DCP

To prepare a BGA display, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=SCR,BGA,C:\OS2\VIOTBL.DCP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.44. DEVINFO (Display) - Prepare a Display for Code-Page Switching ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Prepares a display for system code-page switching.

DEVINFO = SCR ΓöÇΓöÇ ,device, ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöñ
                           ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

This statement is one of the interrelated CONFIG.SYS statements required for
successful code-page switching. The other statements are: CODEPAGE and COUNTRY

The display statement specifies your display name and a file named VIOTBL.DCP
that contains a video font table for displaying characters in each of the code
pages supported by the system.

To prepare a VGA display, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=SCR,VGA,C:\OS2\VIOTBL.DCP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEVINFO Display Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To prepare a CGA display, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=SCR,CGA,C:\OS2\VIOTBL.DCP

To prepare a EGA display, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=SCR,EGA,C:\OS2\VIOTBL.DCP

To prepare a VGA display, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=SCR,VGA,C:\OS2\VIOTBL.DCP

To prepare a BGA display, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=SCR,BGA,C:\OS2\VIOTBL.DCP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.45. DEVINFO (Keyboard) - Prepare Keyboard for Code-Page Switching ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Prepares a keyboard for system code-page switching.

DEVINFO = KBDΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ,layout, ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöñ
                           ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

This statement is one of the interrelated CONFIG.SYS statements required for
successful code-page switching. The other statements are: CODEPAGE and COUNTRY

The DEVINFO=KBD statement specifies your keyboard layout and a file named
KEYBOARD.DCP that contains a keyboard layout table for translating keystrokes
into the characters of each code page supported by the system.

To prepare a U.S. keyboard using the keyboard layout, US, type the following in
the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=KBD,US,C:\OS2\KEYBOARD.DCP

Remember the following if you want to prepare an enhanced keyboard.  All
countries have at least one Sub-Country code supported by the OS/2 operating
system.  Several countries such as France, Italy, and the United Kingdom have
two.  Because these countries have more than one keyboard layout, the
subcountry code allows you to select the keyboard you want.  If you do not
specify a subcountry code for these countries, DEVINFO uses the default
subcountry codes: FR189 (for France), IT141 (for Italy), and UK166 (for the
United Kingdom).

To prepare the enhanced French keyboard 120, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=KBD,FR120,C:\OS2\KEYBOARD.DCP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEVINFO Keyboard Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify the name of the file KEYBOARD.DCP, that contains the keyboard
layouts, found in the C:\OS2 subdirectory, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS:

DEVINFO=KBD,layout C:\OS2\KEYBOARD.DCP.

To prepare a U.S. keyboard using the keyboard layout, US, type the following in
the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=KBD,US,C:\OS2\KEYBOARD.DCP

To prepare the enhanced French keyboard 120, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVINFO=KBD,FR120,C:\OS2\KEYBOARD.DCP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.46. DIR - Display Files in a Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Lists the files and subdirectories in a directory.

DIR ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
      ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÿ  Γöé
     Γöé                                        Γöé
     ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
      ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                               Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
         Γöé  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇ/W ΓöÇΓöñ  Γöé
         Γöé  ΓööΓöÇ /F ΓöÇΓöÿ  Γöé
         Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /P ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
         Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /N ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
         Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /A ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
         Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /B ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
         Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /O ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
         Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /R ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
         Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /S ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
         ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /L ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  CHDIR, MKDIR, RMDIR, TREE.

Typing DIR, without a parameter, lists the files in the current directory. You
can also:

o List the files in the parent directory of the current directory by typing DIR
  ..
o Send the directory listing to your printer by typing DIR >PRN

The system displays the name, size (in bytes), and the date and time you placed
the information in the file. DIR also displays the disk volume label and volume
serial number.  It also gives the total number of files, the number of bytes
used in the files displayed, and the amount of free space (in bytes) remaining
on the disk.

Note that directory entries for hidden system files are not listed, even if
they are present.  Also, if you do not specify a file name extension, adding an
asterisk (*) after the file name indicates that all files with that file name
(regardless of the extension) should be displayed.  DIR displays files
consecutively on the screen if you specify multiple file names.  You can
include a drive and path when specifying multiple file names and may also use
the global file-name characters * and ? in the file name you specify.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DIR Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To list files in a directory named REPORTS on drive B, enter the following:

DIR B:\REPORTS

To list files in the current directory that have the file name LETTER with any
extension, enter the following:

DIR LETTER*

To list all files in the current directory that have the extension .BAT, enter
the following:

DIR *.BAT

To pause the directory listing for the current directory, enter the following:

DIR /P

To display the current directory listing horizontally on your screen, enter the
following:

DIR /W

To display the contents of the current directory in alphabetic order, and then
the contents of all its subdirectories, type the following:

DIR /S/O

To display the files but not the directories in the current directory and all
its subdirectories, type the following:

DIR /S/A:-D

To display files and directories by date and time, with the earliest first, and
in alphabetic order if the dates are identical, type the following:

DIR /O:DN

To display all files by size, largest first, but omit directory names, type the
following:

DIR /S /A:-D /O:-S

To select wide display mode for files created using a file system other than
File Allocation Table (FAT) on a FAT file system drive, enter the following:

DIR /N /W

To force drives formatted with the FAT file system to be displayed in the HPFS
(High Performance File System) format, enter the following:

DIR /N

To display both FAT file names and long file names in the subdirectory OS2.DTP,
enter the following:

DIR C:\OS2\OS2.DTP /R

To send a list of fully qualified file names (path and file name) beginning
with REPORT.A to the file FILES.DAT, enter the following:

DIR /F REPORT.A >FILES.DAT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.47. DISKCACHE - Allocate Storage Blocks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specifies the number of blocks of storage to allocate for control information
and for use by the disk cache.


DISKCACHE = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ n ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                     ΓööΓöÇ ,LW ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ ,T ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ ,AC:x ΓöÇΓöÿ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at the OS/2
command prompt.

The disk cache allows a portion of the system storage to be used as an
additional hard disk buffer.  DISKCACHE speeds up application programs that
read hard disks by keeping hard disk data frequently accessed in a cache
buffer. When an application program requests hard disk data that is already in
the cache buffer, the disk cache sends the data directly to the application
program.  This method of accessing data is much faster than if the data had to
be read from the disk each time.

Specifying this statement increases the speed of your system.  However, when
you increase the size of your disk cache you also decrease the size of
available storage.  For this reason, you may want to experiment with the number
of blocks you specify to get maximum performance.

The recommended disk cache sizes should be based on the amount of memory that
is available in the system, and how many partitions are formatted for the FAT
file system, not on the disk size.

Default sizes for HPFS CACHE and DISKCACHE are set up by the installation
program.  The dependencies are physical memory and the number of partitions
formatted for either file system.

Note:   You need to select Shut down from the menu of the desktop before
        turning off your system.  Failure to do so can cause loss of data if
        the contents of the cache buffers have not been erased and written to
        disk.

General DISKCACHE parameters size guidelines are as follows:

o Systems with up to 5MB of physical memory should use a disk cache size of
  64KB.
o Systems with 6MB or more of physical memory should use a disk cache size of
  256KB.
o In most situations a threshold size of 32 is recommended

The amount of storage required for control information is determined by the
total size of one or more hard disks.  When the amount of storage you specify
in the DISKCACHE statement is not available, the system displays an error
message.  When the amount of storage you specify in the DISKCACHE statement is
not sufficient to support the total hard disk size, the disk cache does not
work.  The disk cache is allocated at system startup, and there is no dynamic
adjustment of its size.

It is recommended that the threshold size be set at 32 unless the software
product you are using is disk intensive and the manufacturer supplies
information on the block size required.  If the block size is defined in terms
of byte count, divide the byte count by 512 and round up the quotient to the
nearest whole number to determine the threshold value.

The disk device driver for the Personal System/2 Models 55sx, 65, 70, 80, 90,
and 95 provides direct-access storage disk-cache support for use with hard
disks.  This device driver controls operation of the cache, which is allocated
by the system and taken out of storage above 1MB.  The cache is run as a
write-through cache to maintain data integrity.  Sectors passed to the disk
device driver for writing on the disk are guaranteed to be written out to the
disk on successful return from the device driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DISKCACHE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set your disk cache size to 64KB with the default threshold of 4 and
lazy-write as the default, type the following statement in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DISKCACHE=64,LW

To set disk cache size of 64KB with a threshold size of 32, for a 2MB to 3MB
system, type the following statement in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DISKCACHE=64,32

To set the disk cache size to 64, with the default threshold of 4, with
lazy-write on, and have AUTOCHECK check the FAT partition, drive D, for data
consistency, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DISKCACHE=64,LW,4,AC:D

To set the recommended disk cache size of 192KB with a threshold size of 32,
for a 4 to 5MB system, type the following statement in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DISKCACHE=192,32

To set the recommended disk cache size of 256KB with a threshold size of 32,
for a 6MB or greater system type the following statement in the CONFIG.SYS
file:

DISKCACHE=256,32

Disk Cache Table:

Disk cache block size values are 64 to 14400.
Disk cache block size default value is 64.
Disk cache threshold number of sectors values are 4 to 128.
Disk cache threshold number of sectors default value is 4.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.48. DISKCOMP - Compare Diskettes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Compares the contents of the diskette in the source drive to the contents of
the diskette in the target drive.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ DISKCOMP ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ source drive ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ target drive ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  DISKCOPY

Enter this command without a parameter to start a step-by-step procedure to
compare the contents of diskettes in different diskette drives.

DISKCOMP does not work in DOS sessions on drives that have an ASSIGN, JOIN, or
SUBST command in effect. Also, DISKCOMP does not work on network drives.

Observe these restrictions when using DISKCOMP:

o Use DISKCOMP only between diskettes of the same size and storage capacity.
o Do not use DISKCOMP to compare information between 5.25-inch and 3.5-inch
  diskettes.
o Follow the examples under the COMP command to compare files between 5.25-inch
  and 3.5-inch media.

Return Codes  DISKCOMP issues a return code of 0 for normal completion or
displays the appropriate error message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DISKCOMP Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To compare the complete contents of a diskette in drive B to a diskette in
drive A, enter the following:

DISKCOMP B: A:

To compare the complete contents of a diskette in drive A to a diskette to be
inserted later into drive A, enter the following:

DISKCOMP A: A:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.49. DISKCOPY - Copy Diskettes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Copies the contents of the diskette in the source drive to the diskette in the
target drive.  If necessary, the target diskette is formatted during the copy.
Neither the source nor the target drive can be a hard disk or a virtual drive.
DISKCOPY also displays the volume serial number of the target diskette.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ DISKCOPY ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ source drive ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ target drive ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  DISKCOMP

DISKCOPY does not work in DOS sessions on drives that have an ASSIGN, JOIN, or
SUBST command in effect.

It is important to note that DISKCOPY automatically formats (prepares) the
target diskette with the same number of sides and sectors per track as the
source diskette before copying the contents of the source diskette to it.

Observe these restrictions when using DISKCOPY:

o Use DISKCOPY only between diskettes of the same size and storage capacity.
o Do not use DISKCOPY to copy information between 5.25-inch and 3.5-inch
  diskettes.  Follow the examples under the COPY command to copy files between
  5.25-inch and 3.5-inch diskettes.

Because of the OS/2 multitasking operating environment, DISKCOPY locks the
diskettes to prevent any other program from reading or writing to the diskettes
while copying is being performed.  If errors are detected on either diskette
during the copy operation, DISKCOPY shows the drive, track, and side where it
found the error, and proceeds with the copying.

Return Codes:  DISKCOPY issues a return code of 0 for normal completion or
displays the appropriate error message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DISKCOPY Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy the complete contents of a diskette in drive B to a diskette in drive
A, enter the following:

DISKCOPY B: A:

To copy the complete contents of a diskette in drive A to a diskette to be
inserted later into drive A, enter the following:

DISKCOPY A: A:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.50. DOSKEY - Recall DOS Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Recalls DOS commands, edits command lines, and creates macros.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ DOSKEY ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
     ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

     ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                         Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
        Γö£ΓöÇ /REINSTALL ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ   Γöö Macroname=text Γöÿ
        Γö£ΓöÇ /BUFSIZE=n ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
        Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /M ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
        Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /H ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
        ΓööΓö¼ΓöÇ/OVERSTRIKEΓöÇΓö¼Γöÿ
         ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ /INSERT ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Recalling a Command

To recall a command, use the following keys:

Up Arrow            Recalls the DOS command you used before the one displayed.

Down Arrow          Recalls the DOS command you used after the one displayed.

Page Up             Recalls the first DOS command you used in the current
                    session.

Page Down           Recalls the most recent DOS command you used.

Editing the Command Line

To edit the current command line, use the following DOSKEY editing keys:

Left Arrow               Moves the cursor back one character.

Right Arrow              Moves the cursor forward one character.

Ctrl+Left Arrow          Moves the cursor back one word.

Ctrl+Right Arrow         Moves the cursor forward one word.

Home                     Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.

End                      Moves the cursor to the end of the line.

Esc                      Clears the command from the screen.

F1                       Copies one character from the template to the DOS
                         command line.

F2                       Searches forward in the template for the next key you
                         type after pressing F2.  DOSKEY inserts the text from
                         the template up to but not including the character you
                         specify.

F3                       Copies the remainder of the template to the command
                         line.  DOSKEY begins copying characters from the
                         position in the template that corresponds to the
                         position indicated by the cursor on the command line.

F4                       Deletes characters, beginning with the first character
                         in the template, up to a character you specify.

F5                       Copies the current command into the template and
                         clears the command line.

F6                       Places an end-of-file character (Ctrl+Z) at the end of
                         the current command line.

F7                       Displays all commands stored in memory with their
                         associated numbers.  These numbers are assigned in
                         order from the first command to the most recent.

Alt+F7                   Deletes all commands stored in memory.

F8                       Searches memory for a command that you want DOSKEY to
                         display.  To use this editing key, type the first few
                         characters of the command you want to find and press
                         F8.  The commands that start with the characters you
                         specified are displayed beginning with the most recent
                         as you repeat pressing F8.

F9                       Prompts you for a command number and displays the
                         command associated with the number you specify.

Alt+F10                  Deletes all macro definitions.

Creating a Macro

To create macros that process one or more DOS commands, use the following
special characters to control command operations:

$G or $g            Redirects output.  Use these special characters to send
                    output to a device or a file instead of to the screen.
                    These characters are equivalent to the output redirection
                    symbol (>).

$G$G or $g$g        Appends output to the end of a file rather than replacing
                    the data in the file.  These double characters are
                    equivalent to the (>>) symbols for appending redirected
                    output.

$L or $l            Redirects input.  Use these special characters to read
                    input from a device or a file instead of from the keyboard.
                    These characters are equivalent to the redirection symbol
                    for input (<).

$B or $b            Sends macro output to a command.  These characters are
                    equivalent to the pipe (|).

$T or $t            Separates commands.  Use these special characters to
                    separate commands when you are creating macros or typing
                    commands at a DOS command prompt.

$$                  Specifies the dollar-sign character ($).

$1 through $9       Represents any command-line information you want to specify
                    when you run a macro.  These special characters are batch
                    parameters that enable you to use different data on the
                    command line each time you run a macro.  The $1 character
                    in a DOSKEY command is similar to the %1 character in a
                    batch program.

$*                  Represents all the command-line information you want to
                    specify when you run a macro.  Everything you type on the
                    command line after a macro name is substituted for the $*
                    in the macro.

Running a Macro

To run a macro, type the macro name starting at the first position on the
command line.  If the macro was defined with $* or any of the batch parameters
$1 through $9, use a space to separate parameters.

Creating a Macro with the Same Name as a DOS Command

You might want to create a macro with the same name as a DOS command.  This can
be useful, for example, if you always use a certain command with specific
parameters.  To specify whether you want to run the macro or the DOS command,
follow these guidelines:

o To run the macro, begin typing the macro name immediately after the command
  prompt, with no space between the prompt and the command name.
o To process the command, insert one or more spaces between the command prompt
  and the command name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOSKEY Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a macro that searches for a file in the current directory and all
sub-directories, type the following:

DOSKEY FILEFIND=DIR/S/F/A$*

You can use the DOSKEY command in a batch program to create a macro.

To run the FILEFIND macro to find all files with a file name of COMMAND and any
extension on drive C, type the following:

FILEFIND C:\COMMAND.*

You cannot run a macro from a batch program.

To delete a macro, type the following:

DOSKEY macroname=

The /M (macro) and /H (history) parameters are useful for creating batch
programs to save macros and commands.  To create a batch program named
MACINIT.BAT that includes all DOSKEY macros, type the following:

DOSKEY /M > MACINIT.BAT

To use the MACINIT.BAT file, edit it to include the DOSKEY command at the
beginning of each macro line.

To create a batch program named TMP.BAT that contains recently used commands,
type the following:

DOSKEY /H > TMP.BAT

To define a macro with multiple commands, type $t to separate commands as in
the following:

DOSKEY tx=cd\TEMP$tDIR/W *

In the above example, the tx macro changes the current directory to TEMP and
then displays a directory listing, using the wide display format.  You can use
$* at the end of the macro to append other parameters to the DIR command when
you run tx.

The following macro uses a batch parameter for a new directory name.  The macro
first creates a new directory and then changes to it from the current
directory.

DOSKEY mc=md $1$tcd 1

To use the preceding macro to create and change to a directory named BOOKS,
type the following:

mc BOOKS

To  create a macro that uses batch parameters for moving a file or group of
files, type the following:

DOSKEY mv=COPY $1 $2 $t DEL $1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.51. DOS (UMB/NOUMB) - Specify Upper Memory Block Availability ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specifies whether the DOS kernel will reside in the high memory area (HMA) and
whether the operating system or DOS applications will control upper memory
blocks (UMBs).

DOS=ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ HIGH ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ,ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ UMB ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
         ΓööΓöÇ LOW ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ      ΓööΓöÇ NOUMB ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  DEVICEHIGH, LOADHIGH

You need to have a DOS=HIGH/LOW,UMB/NOUMB statement in the CONFIG.SYS file to
determine if the DOS kernel resides in high or low memory and to determine the
control of upper memory blocks (UMBs). Upper memory blocks are provided by the
XMS device driver.  Therefore, you must have a VXMS.SYS statement in your
CONFIG.SYS file to have upper memory blocks available.

Note:   The high memory area (HMA) refers to space between 1MB and 1MB + 64KB.
        Upper memory blocks (UMBs) are between 640KB and 1MB.

If DOS=HIGH/LOW,UMB is in the CONFIG.SYS file, the operating system controls
the upper memory blocks.  This means that DOS applications can be loaded into
upper memory but cannot allocate UMBs.

If DOS=HIGH/LOW,NOUMB is in the CONFIG.SYS file, the operating system will not
control any UMBs and DOS applications can allocate UMBs but cannot be loaded
there.  DOS=HIGH/LOW,NOUMB must be specified in the CONFIG.SYS file for a DOS
application to allocate UMBs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS=UMB/NOUMB Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify DOS applications to be loaded into UMBs and the DOS kernel to reside
in the high memory area, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DOS=HIGH,UMB

To specify DOS applications to be loaded into UMBs and the DOS kernel to reside
in conventional memory, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DOS=LOW,UMB

To specify DOS applications to allocate UMBs and the DOS kernel to reside in
the high memory area, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DOS=HIGH,NOUMB

To specify DOS applications to allocate UMBs and the DOS kernel to reside in
conventional memory, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DOS=LOW,NOUMB


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.52. DPATH - Set Search Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Gives application programs the search path to data files that are outside the
current directory. The DPATH environment variable can only be set using the SET
command in OS/2 sessions.

DPATH ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ                 Γöé
           Γöé                                Γöé
           ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  ;  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  APPEND, PATH, and SET.

Typing DPATH without a parameter displays the current value of the DPATH
environment variable. Typing DPATH ; clears the DPATH environment variable.
DPATH indicates what directories applications should search for their data
files (if an application program uses the DPATH directory list).

DPATH is a system environment variable, which means that application programs
can query the environment for its value, and, depending on what they find,
change their behavior.

Like the PATH command, the number of directories you can specify with DPATH is
limited only by the length of the command line.  The length of a DPATH command
can be up to six characters less that the maximum number of characters allowed
on the command line.  Once you set a search path for data files with DPATH, the
path remains in effect for the current command processor until you replace it
with another DPATH command.

DPATH differs from the APPEND command in how it operates. DPATH tells
applications what directories it should search in order to find data files, and
it is up to the applications to recognize DPATH.  With the APPEND command,
however, application programs are able to find files without recognizing that
the APPEND command is in effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DPATH Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the current value of the DPATH environment variable, enter the
following:

DPATH

To clear the DPATH environment variable enter the following:.

DPATH ;

To set a DPATH statement to indicate to applications to search for data files
in the TOOLS, UTILS, and DATA directories, type this statement in your
CONFIG.SYS file:

DPATH=C:\TOOLS;C:\UTILS;C:\DATA;

To specify the current path to data files as a replaceable parameter by
appending the paths of the ABC and XYZ subdirectories to the DPATH statement
already in effect, type the following in your CONFIG,SYS file:

DPATH %DPATH%;C:\ABC;C:\XYZ;


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The template is a memory buffer that holds the last command you typed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.53. EAUTIL - Split and Join Extended File Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows you to split (save) extended attributes from a file and then rejoin the
extended attributes to the file.

EAUTIL ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ datafile ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
                      ΓööΓöÇ holdfile ΓöÇΓöÿ   Γö£ΓöÇ /S ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöñ
                                       Γöé      ΓööΓöÇ /R ΓöÇΓöÿ Γöé
                                       ΓööΓöÇ /J ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ
                                              Γö£ΓöÇ /O ΓöÇΓöñ
                                              ΓööΓöÇ /M ΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
           ΓööΓöÇ /P ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  IFS

An extended attribute is a mechanism that allows an application to attach
information to a file or directory (file system object). Extended attributes
are used to describe the object to another application, to the operating
system, or to the file system program that manages the file or directory.

EAUTIL allows you to split extended attributes from a data file or program file
and place them in a hold file as data.  After you do this, you can use the file
with other applications or file systems that do not recognize or are not able
to process extended attributes. By saving extended attributes to a hold file,
you prevent them from being erased or lost. The command also allows you to join
extended attributes contained in the hold file to the data file.

Return Codes:

0 - Normal completion
1 - File not found
4 - Ended due to error


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EAUTIL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To place extended attributes from a file named MODULE.TXT into a file named
ATTRIB.MOD, enter the following:

EAUTIL MODULE.TXT ATTRIB.MOD /S

To replace the extended attributes in the ATTRIB.MOD file with the extended
attributes of the NEWFILE.EA, enter the following:

EAUTIL NEWFILE.EA ATTRIB.MOD /R /S

To preserve extended file attributes in a file named MODULE.TXT and copy that
file's extended attributes to a file named ATTRIB.MOD, enter the following:

EAUTIL MODULE.TXT ATTRIB.MOD /P /S

To join the extended attributes in the ATTRIB.MOD hold file with the MODULE.TXT
data file, enter the following:

EAUTIL MODULE.TXT ATTRIB.MOD /J

To overwrite the extended attributes in the MODULE.TXT file with the extended
attributes in the NEWFILE.EA hold file, enter the following:

EAUTIL MODULE.TXT NEWFILE.EA /O /J

To merge the extended attributes in the NEWFILE.EA hold file into the extended
attributes in the MODULE.TXT data file, enter the following:

EAUTIL MODULE.TXT NEWFILE.EA /M /J


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.54. ECHO - Display Commands as They Process ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows or prevents the screen display of OS/2 commands as they are run from a
batch file. ECHO does not interfere with messages produced while commands are
running.

ECHO ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  ON ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ OFF ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ message ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  PAUSE and REM

Enter this command without a parameter to display the current ECHO state.

You can control (|) and redirect (>) output from a batch file.

To prevent DOS from interpreting the | and > symbols, enclose them in double
quotes.

ECHO OFF
ECHO PIPING "|"
ECHO REDIRECTION ">"

To prevent the OS/2 operating system from interpreting the | and > symbols,
precede them with a ^ symbol. The ^ symbol tells the system to interpret the
next character input, but not to display it.

ECHO OFF
ECHO PIPING ^|
ECHO REDIRECTION ^>

You can also control how batch-file lines or command lines are displayed. To
prevent the system from displaying a batch-file line, place an @ before the
command.

@ECHO ON
@REM THIS LINE IS NOT DISPLAYED
REM THIS LINE IS DISPLAYED
@FILE1

To display lines of text in a batch file, but prevent the display of command
lines, follow this example:

@ECHO OFF
REM THIS LINE WILL NOT BE DISPLAYED
ECHO THIS LINE WILL BE DISPLAYED

In the following example, the system first displays ECHO OFF but does not
display the REM or first DIR C:\OS2\SAMPLE.ABC commands because ECHO is OFF.
However, the system still displays the output of the DIR command.  Next, ECHO
ON is processed and the system displays the DIR C:\OS2\SAMPLE.ABC command with
the DIR output.

ECHO OFF
REM **** COMMAND DISPLAY IS NOW OFF
DIR C:\OS2\SAMPLE.ABC
ECHO ON
DIR C:\OS2\SAMPLE.ABC

When the above batch file is run, the following is displayed:

ECHO OFF

The volume label in drive C is OS2.
Directory of C:\

SAMPLE.ABC        1234   7-17-88   12:14p
          1 File(s)   141312 bytes free

DIR C:\OS2\SAMPLE.ABC

The volume label in drive C is OS2.
Directory of C:\

SAMPLE.ABC        1234   7-17-88   12:14p
          1 Files(s)  141312 bytes free


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ECHO Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To show all commands on your screen as they are processed, enter the following:

ECHO ON

To display the message, PROGRAM FAILED, on your screen, whether ECHO is ON or
OFF, enter the following:

ECHO PROGRAM FAILED

To prevent DOS from interpreting the | and > symbols, enclose them in double
quotes.

ECHO OFF
ECHO PIPING "|"
ECHO REDIRECTION ">"

To prevent the OS/2 operating system from interpreting the | and > symbols,
precede them with a ^ symbol. The ^ symbol tells the system to interpret the
next character input, but not to display it.

ECHO OFF
ECHO PIPING ^|
ECHO REDIRECTION ^>

To prevent DOS from displaying a batch-file line, place an @ before the
command.

@ECHO ON
@REM THIS LINE IS NOT DISPLAYED
REM THIS LINE IS DISPLAYED
@FILE1

To display lines of text in a batch file, but prevent the display of command
lines, follow this example:

@ECHO OFF
REM THIS LINE WILL NOT BE DISPLAYED
ECHO THIS LINE WILL BE DISPLAYED


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.55. ENDLOCAL - Restore Environment Variables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Restores the drive, directory, and environment variables that were in effect
before the SETLOCAL command was processed.


ENDLOCAL ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Related Commands:  SETLOCAL

This command ends the SETLOCAL command, restoring the previous drive,
directory, and environment settings.  You can issue an ENDLOCAL command even if
no SETLOCAL command is running.

If you want to insert the ENDLOCAL command within a batch file to restore the
drive, directory, and environmental variables, follow this example:

PATH
SETLOCAL
A:
CD \XYZ
PATH A:\;A:\MISCPGM
PATH
ENDLOCAL
PATH

Note that the PATH command with no parameters displays the current value for
PATH.  You can see that the original current drive, directory, and environment
value for PATH are saved when SETLOCAL is issued, and restored when ENDLOCAL is
issued.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ENDLOCAL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To insert the ENDLOCAL command within a batch file to restore the drive,
directory, and environmental variables, follow this example:

PATH
SETLOCAL
A:
CD \XYZ
PATH A:\;A:\TOOLS
PATH
DPATH A:\UTILS;A:\DATA
DPATH
ENDLOCAL
PATH


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.56. ERASE or DEL - Delete Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Deletes one or more files.  Use ERASE or DEL interchangeably.


ERASE ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  filename ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöñ
       Γöé ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ Γöé  Γö£ΓöÇ /P ΓöÇΓöñ
DEL ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ Γöé                      ΓööΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÿ Γöé  ΓööΓöÇ /N ΓöÇΓöÿ
         ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Do not use ERASE or DEL to delete a subdirectory name; use the remove directory
(RD/RMDIR) command.  You can use ERASE or DEL to delete the contents of a
subdirectory.  In addition, read-only and hidden files, such as the operating
system files of IBMBIO.COM and IBMDOS.COM, cannot be deleted.

When erasing all files in a directory, the system displays the name of the
directory, along with the message:

Are you sure (Y/N)?

Enter a Y (yes) to erase all the files in the directory or enter an N (no) to
end the DEL or ERASE command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ERASE or DEL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To erase a file named MONDAY from the current directory on the current drive,
enter the following:

ERASE MONDAY

To erase all files in the current directory on drive C, enter the following:

ERASE C:*.*

To erase all files in the REPORTS subdirectory on drive C, enter the following:

ERASE C:\REPORTS\*.*

To erase a file named FRIDAY from the REPORTS subdirectory on drive C, enter
the following:

ERASE C:\REPORTS\FRIDAY

To erase all files with a .ABC extension from the REPORTS subdirectory in the
root directory on drive C, enter the following:

ERASE C:\REPORTS\*.ABC

To review before erasing all files in the MYDIR directory and display each file
name, giving you the option to erase it or not erase it, enter the following:

ERASE C:\MYDIR\*.* /P

To delete the contents of the REPORTS subdirectory on drive C and not be
prompted Are you sure (Y/N)?, enter the following:

ERASE C:\REPORTS /N


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.57. EXIT - End a Command Processor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Ends or closes the current command processor (CMD.EXE or COMMAND.COM) and
returns to the previous one, or to the desktop if no previous session exists.


EXIT ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Related Commands:  CMD and COMMAND

To close the current command processor and return to the previous command
processor, or the desktop, enter EXIT.

If you are running a program, you must first end the program before typing
EXIT.  If no previous command processor exists, typing EXIT returns you to the
desktop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXIT Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To return to the previous command processor or the desktop after you have
finished running your program, enter the following:

EXIT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.58. EXTPROC - Define an External Batch Processor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Defines an external batch processor for a batch file.

EXTPROC Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
        ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ            ΓööΓöÇ arguments ΓöÇΓöÿ

This command is useful if you have your own batch processor and want to
substitute it for the OS/2 batch processor.

You must include the EXTPROC command as the first statement in any batch file
you want processed by your batch processor. CMD.EXE calls your batch processor
to process your batch-file statements.

For example, if you wanted to use a batch processor called MYBATCH.EXE, located
in the C:\BATCH directory, to run some of your batch files, type the following
in your batch file:

EXTPROC C:\BATCH\MYBATCH.EXE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXTPROC Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To use a batch processor called MYBATCH.EXE, located in the C:\BATCH directory,
to run some of your batch files, type the following in your batch file:

EXTPROC C:\BATCH\MYBATCH.EXE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.59. FCBS - Use File Control Blocks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Determines file-control-block (FCB) management information for DOS sessions.

This statement has no effect in OS/2 sessions.


FCBS = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ m ,n ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at a command
prompt.

A file control block (FCB) is a record that contains all of the information
about a file (for example, its structure, length, and name).  If a program
tries to open more than the number of files specified in the FCBS statement,
the system closes the least-recently used file control block and opens the new
file.

Some application programs use file control blocks to create, open, delete,
read, and write to files.  New programs written for the operating system
usually use internal file IDs (handles) for file input/output.

If a program tries to open more than the number of file control blocks
specified in the FCBS statement, the system closes the least-recently used FCB
and opens a new file.  The files that are protected from being closed are not
included in the list of least-recently used FCBs.  If a program tries to read
or write to a file that has been closed because it is the least-recently used
FCB, the system displays an error message.

In addition, the value of the first number must be greater than or equal to the
value of the second number.  If you set the two values equal to each other in
the FCBS statement and a program tries to open more than the total number of
file control blocks you specified, no files can be closed.  If a program tries
to open more than the number of file control blocks you specified, no new files
are opened.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FCBS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify the total number of file control blocks that can be open at one time
to 15, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

FCBS=15

To set the total number of file control block files that can be open at one
time to 10, and set the number protected from being closed to 3, type the
following in the CONFIG.SYS file.

FCBS=10,3


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.60. FDISK - Partition Hard Disks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows you to create or delete a primary partition or a logical drive in an
extended partition.


ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ FDISK ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ FDISK ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

                                      ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                                           Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /QUERY ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö┤Γöñ
              Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /CREATE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /NAME:name  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
              Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /DELETE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /DISK:n ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
              Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇ /SETNAME:name  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /FSTYPE:x ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
              Γö£ΓöÇ /SETACCESS        ΓöÇΓöñ  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /START:m ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
              Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /STARTABLE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /SIZE:m ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
              ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ /FILE:filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /VTYPE:n ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                       Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /BOOTABLE:s ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                       ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /BOOTMGR ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands: FDISKPM, SETBOOT

Related Information: Hard Disk Information

o The Fixed Disk Utility (FDISK) - Full-screen

  The full-screen version of FDISK is used during installation of the operating
  system.  It provides users with the same functions as the FDISKPM version.
  The full-screen version supports windows and looks and acts much the same as
  FDISKPM but it does not support a mouse.

o The Fixed Disk Utility (FDISK) - Command Line

  Use the FDISK command at the command prompt to establish or change partition
  values.  Use the parameters and options with the FDISK command to specify and
  limit the values and characteristics of the partitions.

The following syntax shows how to use the FDISK command to take advantage of
the Boot Manager for unattended environments:

FDISK /parameter:value /option:value

The Boot Manager allows you to create up to four primary partitions on a hard
disk.  A primary partition is an area on the hard disk that cannot be shared. A
partition that cannot be shared means that only one entity can reside there and
only one primary partition can be active at one time.  The data of an operating
system in a primary partition cannot be accessed by an operating system in
another primary partition but it can be accessed by a logical drive in an
extended partition.

You can create an extended partition in place of one of the four primary
partitions. This partition can be subdivided into multiple logical drives.  You
can install a different operating system on each of the logical drives.  These
logical drives are shareable; any data installed on these logical drives can be
used by an operating system running from any other logical drive on your
system, if the file systems are compatible.

Note:   All versions of DOS must be in a primary partition.  Other operating
        systems can be installed on logical drives in an extended partition.

Return codes:  FDISK issues a return code of 0 for normal completion or the
appropriate error message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FDISK Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The /QUERY parameter displays a list of all partitions and free space on the
hard disks of the system.  For example, here is a query that returned
information about 4 partitions and a free space entry:

Name     Partition   Vtype   FStype   Drive   Status   Start  Size

System 1   C:        01      04       1        1       00     30
System 2    :        01      01       1        1       30     10
OS2-HPFS   D:        02      07       2        1       00     60
data-vol   E:        02      06       1        0       40     70
01000061    :        03      00       2        0       60     55

To display a list of all partitions and free space on your system, type the
following:

FDISK /QUERY

To create a logical drive in an extended partition on disk 1 with the name
OS2FAT, type the following:

FDISK /CREATE:OS2FAT /VTYPE:2 /DISK:1

To delete a logical drive with the name OS2FAT, type the following:

FDISK /DELETE /NAME:OS2FAT

To specify the name DOS4.0 of a partition, type the following:

FDISK /SETNAME:DOS4.0

To specify a partition as accessible, type the following:

FDISK /SETACCESS

To specify a partition as startable, type the following:

FDISK /STARTABLE

To process FDISK commands in the file MYFILE, type the following:

FDISK /FILE:myfile

You can create a file to process FDISK commands.  You must have commas
separating the arguments of each command in the file and the commands are
processed just once. For example, the file, MYFILE, contains the following
commands:

/query
/create:OS2,/vtype:1,/disk:1,/name:01000030,/size:20
/startable,/name:OS2
/query,/name:OS2

The processing of these commands is as follows:

Command 1       Displays a list of all partitions and unused space on all hard
                disks.

Command 2       Creates a primary partition on disk 1 with a size of 20MB in
                the free space name 01000030 and assigns it a name of OS2.

Command 3       Sets the partition named OS2 to be startable on the Boot
                Manager menu.

Command 4       Displays the partition information of the partition named OS2.

Options limit the actions of the FDISK command and parameters.

To delete a partition named dos, type the following:

FDISK /DELETE /NAME:dos

To display all partitions on drive 2, type the following:

FDISK /QUERY /DISK:2

To display a partition with a FAT file system, type the following:

FDISK /QUERY /FSTYPE:FAT

To create a primary partition starting at the top of the partition, type the
following:

FDISK /CREATE /START:t

To create a primary partition with a size of 8MB, type the following:

FDISK /CREATE /SIZE:8

To display unusable space on a disk, type the following:

FDISK /QUERY /VTYPE:0

To specify a primary partition to be displayed, type the following:

FDISK /QUERY /VTYPE:1

To specify a logical drive in an extended partition to be displayed, type the
following:

FDISK /QUERY /VTYPE:2

To display free space that can be used to create a primary or extended
partition, type the following:

FDISK /QUERY /VTYPE:3

To display all partitions that are bootable from the Boot Manager menu, type
the following:

FDISK /QUERY /BOOTABLE:1

To create the Boot Manager partition, type the following:

FDISK  /CREATE /BOOTMGR


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.61. FDISKPM - Partition Hard Disks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows you to create or delete a primary partition or a logical drive in an
extended partition.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ FDISKPM ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands: FDISK  Related Information: Hard Disk Information

FDISKPM presents menus and displays to guide you through the tasks necessary to
set up your hard disks. Help is available for all selectable items and entry
fields within FDISKPM.

You can use the choices on the Options menu to:

o Install the Boot Manager partition.
o Create a primary partition or logical drive.
o Add a partition to the Boot Manager menu.
o Change the partition name.
o Assign the accessibility of primary partitions.
o Specify startup values such as a default partition, startup selection time,
  or mode for the Boot Manager menu.
o Remove a partition from the Boot Manager menu.
o Delete a primary partition or logical drive.
o Set a primary partition as installable.
o Specify a primary partition as being startable.
o Exit FDISKPM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FDISKPM Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start FDISKPM to set up the hard disks on your system, enter the following:

FDISKPM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.62. FILES - Set Maximum Number of Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Determines the maximum number of files available in DOS sessions.

This statement has no effect in OS/2 sessions.

FILES = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ nΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at a command
prompt.

When a DOS session is started, 20 files are available to be used by all
programs running in that DOS session.  A file is in use when a program is
processing some kind of operation in it.  When a program is using a file for
its operation, that file is unavailable to another program.  The file is
returned to availability when the program has finished its operation and the
file is closed.

Regardless of the FILES= setting, all DOS programs are initialized to a maximum
of 20 files.  It is the responsibility of an application to increase the number
of files up to the maximum set by the FILES= statement.

Placing a FILES= statement in the CONFIG.SYS file increases the default value
for all DOS sessions.  Each session can also be customized by changing the
appropriate DOS setting.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILES Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify a maximum of 40 files to be open at the same time in a DOS session,
type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

FILES=40


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.63. FIND - Search Files for Strings of Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Searches for a specific string of text in a file or files and sends the
specified lines to your output device.

                                  ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                                        Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ FIND ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ            Γö£ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /V ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöñ
                                    Γöé ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /C ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ Γöé
                                    Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /I ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                    ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /N ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇ "string" ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                 Γöé
              Γöé                                        Γöé
              ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

It is important to note:

o You must type the phrase or word in quotation marks in the exact format
  (uppercase or lowercase) in which it is written in the text. Two single
  quotes in succession are not equivalent to quotation marks.
o When searching for strings that contain quotation marks, an extra set of
  quotation marks must be entered both before and after the string.  For
  example, to find the string "Quotation Marks" in a file named PUNCTUATION,
  enter the following:

    FIND ""Quotation Marks"" PUNCTUATION

o You must specify the specific file name you want the FIND command to search.
  Global characters such as the asterisk (*) or question mark (?) do not work.
o You can specify parameter /V together with /C or /N, but parameter /N cannot
  be used with /C.
o Within a search string containing quotation marks, you can represent
  quotation marks by preceding the double quotation mark character with a
  backslash (\).  For example:

    FIND "SAY \"Hello\"" FILE1

o You must use a double backslash (\\) to find lines that contain the backslash
  (\) character.

Return Codes:  FIND issues a return code of 0 for normal completion.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FIND Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display all lines that do not include the word CHAPTER in a file named
BOOK.TXT, enter the following.

FIND /V "CHAPTER" BOOK.TXT

To display a count of the number of lines in a file named BOOK.TXT that include
the word CHAPTER, enter the following:

FIND /C "CHAPTER" BOOK.TXT

To display the line number where each occurrence of CHAPTER is found in the
text of the file named BOOK.TXT, enter the following:

FIND /N "CHAPTER" BOOK.TXT

To make a search for the string CHAPTER not case-sensitive in the file
BOOK.TXT, enter the following:

FIND /I "CHAPTER" BOOK.TXT

To display all the lines from files named BOOK1 and BOOK2 (in that order) that
contain the word CHAPTER, enter the following:

FIND "CHAPTER" BOOK1 BOOK2

To find a string that has quotation marks such as "Boca Raton, FL." in a file
named CITIES, enter the following:

FIND ""Boca Raton, FL."" CITIES

To find all lines that contain a backslash (\) character in the file
SAMPLE.TXT, enter the following:

FIND "\\" SAMPLE.TXT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.64. FOR - Process Commands Repetitively ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows repetitive running of OS/2 commands.

To use FOR from the OS/2 command prompt:


FOR ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ % variable ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ IN ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ (set) ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ DO ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ command ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

To use FOR from a batch file:


FOR ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ %%c ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ IN ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ (set) ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ DO ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ command ΓöÇΓöñ

It is important to note that:

o The items in parentheses specify the "set," which can include file and path
  names.

o An item in the set can contain the global file-name characters * or ?.

o Use only one percent sign ( % ) before the variable if you are processing
  from the command prompt; use two percent signs ( %% ) if you are using the
  variable in a batch file.

o For OS/2 sessions, piping and redirection can be used with the FOR command.

  The following example shows three C-language program files being compiled and
  compiler messages being saved in three files that have a .OUT extension.

    FOR %1 IN ( FILE1 FILE2 FILE3 ) DO CL /C %1.C > %1.OUT 2>&1

  For DOS sessions, piping and redirection are not used with the FOR command.

o For OS/2 sessions, you can specify more than one FOR command at a command
  prompt.

  For example, type the following in order to print these files: FILE1.C,
  FILE1.LST, FILE2.C, FILE2.LST, FILE3.C, FILE3.LST:

    FOR %1 IN ( FILE1 FILE2 FILE3 ) DO FOR %J IN ( C LST ) DO PRINT %1.%J

In the following example, FOR sequentially sets the %%D parameter to each item
in the set and then evaluates the command you want to run (TYPE).

Assume you want a batch file to process the commands, TYPE FILE1 and TYPE
FILE2, and have the result be the same as if you typed both commands from the
command prompt:

FOR %%D IN (FILE1 FILE2) DO TYPE %%D

Assume you want to process the commands TYPE FILE1 and TYPE FILE2 from the
command prompt:

FOR %H IN (FILE1 FILE2) DO TYPE %H


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FOR Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To compile three C-language program files and save the compiler messages in
three files that have a .OUT extension, enter the following:

FOR %1 IN ( FILE1 FILE2 FILE3 ) DO CL /C %1.C > %1.OUT 2>&1

Piping and redirection are not available for DOS sessions.

To specify more than one FOR command for OS/2 sessions at a command prompt and
print the files FILE1.C, FILE1.LST, FILE2.C, FILE2.LST, FILE3.C, and FILE3.LST,
enter the following:

FOR %1 IN ( FILE1 FILE2 FILE3 ) DO FOR %J IN ( C LST ) DO PRINT %1.%J

To process the commands, TYPE FILE1 and TYPE FILE2, and have the result be the
same as if you typed both commands from the command prompt enter the following:

FOR %%D IN (FILE1 FILE2) DO TYPE %%D

To process the commands TYPE FILE1 and TYPE FILE2 from the command prompt enter
the following:

FOR %H IN (FILE1 FILE2) DO TYPE %H


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.65. FORMAT - Prepare a Disk for Use ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Formats a disk in the specified drive to accept OS/2 files by marking the
directory and file allocation tables on the disk. FORMAT also checks the disk
for defects.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ FORMAT ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
     ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

            ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                     Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /ONCE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /4 ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /T:tracks ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /N:sectors ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /F:xxxx ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /FS:xxxxx ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /L ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /V ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ
                        ΓööΓöÇ :label ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  IFS, LABEL, and VOL

If you format a drive for the High Performance File System, FORMAT checks the
IFS statement in the CONFIG.SYS file to determine if the drive is listed with
the /AUTOCHECK parameter. If the drive is listed, FORMAT does not update the
IFS statement. If the drive is not listed, FORMAT adds the drive letter.

If you format a diskette or hard disk that already contains information, all
the information is erased.  Also, be sure to specify a drive letter, followed
by a colon (for example, A:); otherwise, the system displays an error message
that you have not specified a target drive.

Be sure to set up an OS/2 partition on all hard disks before formatting them.
FORMAT does not recognize a hard disk as being an OS/2 disk if an OS/2 or a DOS
partition does not exist.  When FORMAT finds such a disk, it skips to the next
disk and begins formatting it.

Do not attempt to format a diskette to an incorrect capacity, because such a
diskette will not store your data reliably.

By default, the FORMAT command attempts to format the media to the maximum
capacity of the diskette drive.  The /F:xxxx parameter allows you to format
3.5-inch diskettes to less than the maximum capacity of the diskette drive.

FORMAT does not work on drives that have an ASSIGN, JOIN, or SUBST command in
effect. Also, FORMAT does not work on network drives.

FORMAT does work on the IBM read/write optical disc drive.  To format and
install the file system on an optical disc the first time requires about 20
minutes using the /L parameter.  Reformatting a previously formatted optical
disc requires only a few minutes when you do not use the /L parameter.

Return Codes:

0 - Normal completion

3 - Ended by user

4 - Ended due to error

5 - Ended due to NO response when user was prompted to format a hard disk

6 - FORMAT was unable to process another file system's format program

7 - Volume not supported by another file system's format program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FORMAT Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To format a 5.25-inch high-capacity diskette in high-capacity diskette drive B,
enter the following:

FORMAT B:

To format one diskette on drive A, enter the following:

FORMAT A: /ONCE

To format a 360KB diskette in a 1.2MB drive, enter the following:

FORMAT B: /4

You can also enter:

FORMAT B: /N:9 /T:40

To format a 3.5-inch 720KB diskette in a 1.44MB drive (drive A), enter the
following:

FORMAT A: /T:80 /N:9

To format a diskette in drive A and give the diskette a volume label of MYDISK,
enter the following:

FORMAT A: /V:MYDISK

To label a diskette using blanks as in the label My Disk, enter the following:

FORMAT A:/v:"My Disk"

To format a 3.5-inch 720KB diskette in a 1.4MB drive (drive A), enter the
following:

FORMAT A: /F:720

To format a hard disk partition on drive D for the High Performance File
System, enter the following:

FORMAT D: /FS:HPFS

To change the HPFS partition on drive D to a FAT partition, enter the
following:

FORMAT D: /FS:FAT

To format and install the file system on a read/write optical disc, enter the
following:

FORMAT D: /L

where drive D is designated as the optical disc drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.66. FSACCESS - Change Access to the OS/2 File System from DOS Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

           ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                                 Γöé
FSACCESS ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
             ΓööΓöÇ ! ΓöÇΓöÿ Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ DOSletter ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                     Γö£ΓöÇ DOSletter - DOSletter ΓöÇΓöñ
                     ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ DOSletter = OS2drive ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands: FSFILTER, VMDISK

Related Information: Starting a Specific Version of DOS

FSACCESS can be called multiple times to re-assign drive letters, make new
drives accessible, or remove access to drives.  Drives cannot be in use (the
current drive) when remapped.

When a specific version of DOS is started from an image file, references to
drive A in that session access the image file.  The use of the physical
diskette drive A is not available.

The command

FSACCESS A:

closes the image file and maps drive letter A to the physical diskette drive A.

Note:   Specifying no parameters displays the current drive mappings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FSACCESS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FSACCESS            Displays which DOS drive letters are mapped to OS/2 drives.
                    The format will be:

                    Local DOSletter is mapped to OS/2drive

                                        Local C: is mapped to OS/2 C:
                                        Local D: is mapped to OS/2 D:
                                        Local E: is mapped to OS/2 E:

FSACCESS K          Registers DOS drive letter K.  All references for K will
                    now be sent to the OS/2 file system. (Allows DOS drive
                    letter K to access an OS/2 file system).

FSACCESS !E         Removes access of DOS drive letter E to the OS/2 file
                    system.

FSACCESS !E-H       Removes access of DOS drive letters E, F, G, and H to the
                    OS/2 file system.

FSACCESS M=C        Causes functions specifying DOS drive letter M to be routed
                    to the OS/2 file system as function requests for drive C.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.67. FSFILTER -  Access the OS/2 File System from DOS Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE= ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ FSFILTER.SYS ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Related Commands: FSACCESS, VMDISK

Related Information: Starting a Specific Version of DOS

FSFILTER is a DOS device driver that provides access to OS/2 disk partitions
when running a specific version of DOS.  This device driver is provided in the
OS2\MDOS directory, and must be loaded by the CONFIG.SYS file that is processed
by the specific version of DOS.

Do this by copying FSFILTER.SYS to the diskette or disk partition that will be
started, and add the following statement to the CONFIG.SYS file of the diskette
or disk partition from which the DOS session will be started.

DEVICE=FSFILTER.SYS

The FSFILTER statement must be the first DEVICE= statement in the CONFIG.SYS
file.  In addition, it must precede any statement with a reference to a file
stored in an HPFS partition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FSFILTER Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To be able to access the OS/2 file system from a specific version of DOS
running in a disk partition or from a diskette, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file of the disk partition or the diskette:

DEVICE=FSFILTER.SYS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Hard Disk Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following is a brief description of the hard disk architecture in the OS/2
2.1 operating system to help you plan ahead and be able to use the Boot
Manager.

A hard disk is divided into partitions.  A partition defines the area of the
hard disk that belongs to a particular operating system.

Although each hard disk can be divided into multiple primary partitions and/or
one extended partition, the first hard disk must have a primary partition.
Each extended partition can be further divided into one or more logical drives.

The assignment of drive letters is done by the operating system's volume
manager at start time.  The first hard disk is searched for an active primary
OS2/DOS partition and the letters starting with "C" are sequentially assigned.
After all volumes in primary partitions have been assigned, the logical drives
in extended partitions are assigned drive letters sequentially.

Important facts to remember are:

o An operating system only assigns drive letters to file system types it
  supports.  For example, DOS would not assign a drive letter to an HPFS
  partition.
o Only one primary partition per drive is accessible at a time.
o All logical drives in an extended partition are accessible if their file
  systems are recognizable by the operating system in use.

You can assign names to logical drives to simplify their identity. These names
are important especially in the event of a hardware reconfiguration such as
adding other hard disks to the system.  The logical drive names assigned to the
original hard disk will not change and still identify the same area on the
disk, unlike the drive letters which could change because of the
reconfiguration.

You select the logical drive when you start the system. You will see a menu,
and you can either select an operating system to start or let the default
operating system start.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Presentation Manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trademark of the IBM Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.68. GOTO - Transfer Processing to a Specified Label ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Transfers control to the line that follows the one containing the appropriate
label.


GOTO ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ label ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Related Commands:  IF

It is important to note that:

o A label is a set of characters within your batch file that indicates what
  action the operating system is to take.  It can be a name or a string of
  characters, the first eight characters being significant (making it
  different).

o A label is indicated by a colon (:), followed by the label name. If you
  specify a label that is not defined in the batch file, the current processing
  of the batch file ends.

o A label cannot contain a period (.).

o The operating system does not display labels within a batch file while it
  processes the batch file.  Therefore, nonreferenced labels provide a
  convenient way for placing comments (within your batch file) that the
  operating system does not display when it processes the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> GOTO Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To go to a section in your batch file that has a label of WXYZ, if the error
level of the program you are running is 1 or greater, type the following in
your batch file:

IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO WXYZ
 .
 .
:WXYZ

To show an indefinite sequence of the message "Be Prepared !" on your screen,
type the following in the batch file:

:LOOP
@ECHO Be Prepared !
@GOTO LOOP

This file will continue to run until you press Ctrl+Break.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.69. GRAFTABL - Display Extended Character Sets ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Loads a table of additional characters into memory for graphics mode. Because
GRAFTABL is a DOS command, it has no effect on OS/2 sessions.


ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ GRAFTABL ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ nnn ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                        Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ? ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                        ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /STA ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Enter this command without a parameter to display the current graphics
code-page table that is loaded.

GRAFTABL allows the ASCII extended character set to be displayed when display
adapters are being used for graphics. GRAFTABL works only for modes 4, 5, and 6
of the Color Graphics Adapter, Enhanced Graphics Adapter, and Video Graphics
Array.

Return Codes:

0 - No previously loaded character table exists and a code page is now
resident.
1 - A previously loaded character table exists.  If a new table was requested,
it replaces the previous table at its original location.
2 - No previously loaded character table exists and no new table is loaded.
3 - Incorrect parameter
4 - Incorrect DOS version


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> GRAFTABL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify the Multilingual 850 graphic code page, enter the following:

GRAFTABL 850

To display the number of the graphic code page currently being used, and a list
of graphic code-page options, enter the following:

GRAFTABL ?

To display the number of the graphic code page currently being used, enter the
following:

GRAFTABL /STA


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.70. HELP - Provide System Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Provides a help line as part of the command prompt, displays help information
for warning and error messages, or displays a specific topic within a book.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ HELP ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöñ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ             Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  ON ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                     Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  OFF ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                     Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ message help ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                     ΓööΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ topic ΓöÇΓöÿ
                                      ΓööΓöÇ book ΓöÇΓöÿ

Enter this command without a parameter to display the HELP options available
for the current mode of operation. These options allow you to:

o Return to the desktop.
o Switch to the next session
o Exit the current OS/2 session
o Get additional help on error and warning messages.

If you are writing an application program or working with unfamiliar software,
it is advisable to specify HELP OFF, or messages from your program might not
appear on the display screen.

If you specify HELP ON, the value of the PROMPT environment is overwritten
until you specify HELP OFF.  Specifying HELP OFF resets the prompt back to the
default system prompts for DOS and OS/2 sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.70.1. Obtain Help on System Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To request help for a message, enter HELP with the message number. HELP then
displays the original message, which is usually followed by explanation and
action statements. If the original message contains variable data, such as the
name of a file, HELP substitutes three asterisks (***) for the variable data
when it responds to your help request. In addition, if you enter an incorrect
message ID, you get a message stating "No help is available for the message ID
number requested."

If HELP is unable to find the help message file (OSO001H.MSG) in the current
directory, it searches for the file in the directories contained in the DPATH
and APPEND statements.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> HELP Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the HELP options available for the current operating environment,
enter the following:

HELP

To display a help line as a part of the command prompt, reminding you which
keys to press to return to the desktop, enter the following:

HELP ON

To request additional help for error message number SYS0003, enter the
following:

HELP 3

To view information in the OS/2 Command Reference about the COPY command, enter
the following at the OS/2 command prompt:

HELP CMDREF COPY

To view information about functions in the REXX Information, enter the
following at the OS/2 command prompt:

HELP REXX FUNCTIONS

To view information about the COPY command, enter the following at the OS/2
command prompt:

HELP COPY


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.71. IF - Process Commands Conditionally ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows conditional processing of OS/2 commands.  When the condition is true,
the operating system processes the command; otherwise, it skips the command and
processes the next command in the file.

Piping and redirection should not be specified on the IF command line.

IF ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ ERRORLEVEL ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ number ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
     ΓööΓöÇ NOT ΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇ string1==string2 ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
     ΓööΓöÇ EXIST ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
                ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  command  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

For readability, the file name parameters are shown on a separate line in this
diagram.  When you type the IF command, you can specify either an error level,
string, or a file name.

Related Commands:  GOTO


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> IF Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To reverse the truth value of conditional parameters from true to false or
false to true, type the following statements in your batch file.

COPY MARY\*.* NAMES\*.*
IF NOT ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO STEP2
ECHO COPY FAILED
PAUSE
GOTO END
:STEP2
ECHO COPY PROCEDURE COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY
:END

To test the system to see if the DPATH statement is defined, and to define it
as C:\OS2, and then test to see that it was set, type the following statements
in your batch file.

IF "%DPATH%" == "" DPATH C:\OS2;
IF "%DPATH%" == "" GOTO LABEL
ECHO DPATH SET
:LABEL
DPATH

To provide the true status of your STATUS files when the first string is
identical to the second string, type the following in your batch file:

IF EXIST C:\STATUS\*.STS ECHO I have status files
IF NOT EXIST C:\STATUS\*.STS ECHO I do not have status files

To test if a program ended because of an error and, if so, to display "FAILED"
on your screen, type the following in your batch file:

PROGRAM.ONE C:\*.* A: /S
IF ERRORLEVEL 4 ECHO FAILED

To test if the %1 parameter is equal to HELP and, if so, to display "PROG1
FAILED" on the screen, type the following in the batch file:

IF %1 == HELP ECHO PROG1 FAILED

To test if the %1. parameter is equal to HELP. and, if so, display "PROG1
FAILED" on the screen, type the following in the batch file:

IF %1. == HELP. ECHO PROG1 FAILED

Notice the same character (.) added in each string.  This example avoids the
error of using a blank in the first string.

To test if FILE1 is in the current directory on the default drive and, if so,
to process the GOTO command, type the following in the batch file:

IF EXIST FILE1 GOTO END
  .
  .
  .
:END

To test if the file A:\%1 exists (where %1 is a replaceable parameter), type
the following in the batch file:

IF NOT EXIST A:\%1 COPY B:\%1 A:

If the file exists on drive A, processing continues.  If the file does not
exist, the COPY command is processed.

To test the value of the environment variable path, type the following in the
batch file:

IF "%PATH%" == "" ECHO NO PATH


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.72. IFS (Installable File System) - Install a File System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Installs a file system (IFS) by specifying the path and complete file name of
the file system driver in your CONFIG.SYS file.

IFS =  ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γöñ
         ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ             ΓööΓöÇ arguments ΓöÇΓöÿ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at the OS/2
command prompt.

Related Commands: CACHE, CHKDSK,  FORMAT, IFS (HPFS.IFS)

A file system driver is a file that contains code needed to manage disks and
diskettes formatted for file systems other than the file allocation table
(FAT).

Any time you add or make changes to the CONFIG.SYS file, you must restart the
system in order for the new file system or change to become effective.
Remember, the CONFIG.SYS file is read only during system startup.  Anything
added to this file after system initialization does not work until you restart
the system.

Use this command to replace the FAT file system with a file system of your
choice.  An example of an IFS driver is HPFS.IFS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> IFS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To install the High Performance File System in a system with 6MB of RAM, the
OS/2 Installation program places the following statement in the CONFIG.SYS
file:

IFS=C:\OS2\HPFS.IFS /CACHE:128 /CRECL:4 /AUTOCHECK:C


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.73. IFS (CDFS.IFS) - Install the CD-ROM File System (CDFS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specifies the file system program for loading the CD-ROM File System (CDFS).

IFS =  ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇCDFS.IFS  ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γöñ
         ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ             ΓööΓöÇ arguments ΓöÇΓöÿ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at the OS/2
command prompt.

Related Commands: IFS, IFS (HPFS.IFS)

The CD-ROM file system provides file-system functionality for the CD-ROM
devices that are supported by OS/2 2.1.  CDFS.IFS is activated by including an
IFS= statement in the CONFIG.SYS file.

CDFS.IFS provides read-only access to data stored on CD-ROM media.  Programs
can use OS/2-supported APIs to access this media.  Any functions involving
write access will be denied because they are unsupported.

This version of the CD-ROM file system can only be used with OS/2 Version 2.0
or later.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> IFS (CDFS.IFS) Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To install the CD-ROM file system and suppress initialzation messages, type the
following statement in your CONFIG.SYS file:

IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.74. IFS (HPFS.IFS) - Install the High Performance File System (HPFS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specifies the file system program for loading the High Performance File System
(HPFS).

IFS = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ
           ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ              ΓööΓöÇ /C:nnnn ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
           ΓööΓöÇ /AUTOCHECK:xxx ΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇ /CRECL:x ΓöÇΓöÿ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at the OS/2
command prompt.

Related Commands: CACHE, CHKDSK, FORMAT, IFS

Use this command to replace the FAT file system with a file system of your
choice such as HPFS.  This enables you to:

o Use large disks more efficiently
o Have greater file flexibility
o Increase system performance
o Have more than one active file system.

During OS/2 installation, you were given the option of installing the High
Performance File System (HPFS). The features of this file system include the
following:

o Cache Memory Access

  The High Performance File System uses a high-speed buffer storage, known as a
  cache, to access programs and data.  Often-used programs and data can be
  found in memory, thereby reducing the number of times the operating system
  must read a disk.  The maximum amount of memory that can be used as a cache
  is 2MB regardless of how much memory is available.

o Long File Names

  HPFS accepts file names of up to 254 characters in length.  It also accepts
  any number of separators (.) as part of the file name.  You can include
  blanks in the names of files or directories.  You must, however, include
  double quotation marks around the name of the directory or file if it
  contains blanks.  For example, to change directory to the MY NEW DESKTOP
  directory, type:

    CD "MY NEW DESKTOP"

o File Allocation

  HPFS attempts to keep disk allocation for a file in contiguous sectors.
  Because most files will be located in adjacent sectors, the number of
  operations needed to access the file is reduced.

o Extended Attributes

  HPFS supports extended directory information about files and directories.
  This information is called an extended attribute.  Through extended
  attributes, an application can attach information to a file or directory.

o "Lazy" Writing

  HPFS copies data to an area in cache memory before writing data to a disk
  according to the IFS statement specified in the CONFIG.SYS file.

o Balanced Directory Tree

  HPFS keeps track of files through a structure known as a balanced directory
  tree.  To locate a file, HPFS reads this structure rather than reading the
  full directory list.

HPFS is an installable file system (IFS) designed to provide better performance
than the existing file allocation table (FAT) based file system.  HPFS is
designed to provide extremely fast access to very large disk volumes.  The OS/2
operating system also supports the coexistence of multiple, active file systems
on a single personal computer system, with the capability of multiple and
different storage devices.

If you select HPFS as your standard file system, the OS/2 installation
procedure inserts an IFS statement as the first entry in the CONFIG.SYS file.

System installation automatically sets up the HPFS cache for you if you format
the primary partition with HPFS (using the OS2.INI file).  If you format the
primary partition for FAT instead, and then later want to format another
partition with HPFS, you need to add an IFS statement to the CONFIG.SYS file.

During OS/2 installation on a system with 6MB of RAM, the following IFS
statement was added to the CONFIG.SYS file if you selected the High Performance
File System:

IFS=C:\OS2\HPFS.IFS /CACHE:128 /CRECL:4 /AUTOCHECK:C

Keep in mind that these statements are device-dependent and must be included
before any DEVICE statements.

Note:   Refer to the individual commands for further information on IFS, CACHE,
        and RUN statements.

If you start DOS (from outside the OS/2 operating system, that is, from a DOS
partition or diskette), files on HPFS partitions are not accessible.  (This
means that you cannot start your system from a DOS installation diskette while
using HPFS).  If you start a Specific Version of DOS from within the OS/2
operating system (that is, a version of DOS running in a DOS sesssion), then
files on HPFS partitions are accessible.

Both the FAT-based file system and installable file systems support standard
naming conventions and the existing logical file and directory structure.
Features of HPFS include:

o File names up to 254 characters in length
o Fast access to very large disk volumes
o Strategic allocation of directory structures
o Extended attribute support
o Caching of directories, data, and file system structures
o Processing of metacharacters that are generally used for displaying and
  printing graphics.
o Large file support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> IFS (HPFS.IFS) Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To install the High Performance File System in a system with 6MB of RAM, the
OS/2 Installation program places the following statement in the CONFIG.SYS
file:

IFS=C:\OS2\HPFS.IFS /CACHE:128 /CRECL:4 /AUTOCHECK:C

To indicate to the operating system to check drives D and F before it runs the
CHKDSK program, type the following in your CONFIG.SYS file and restart your
system:

IFS=C:\OS2\HPFS.IFS /C:64 /AUTOCHECK:DF

To set the cache size to 64KB and the maximum record size to 4KB, type the
following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

IFS=C:\OS2\HPFS.IFS /C:64 /CRECL:4


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.75. IOPL - Allow Input/Output Privilege ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows I/O privilege to be granted to requesting processes in OS/2 sessions.


IOPL = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ NO ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ YES ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ list ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ
                                    Γöé
                         ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ , ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at the OS/2
command prompt.

The privilege level assigned to a program determines what code segments and
data segments it can access.  The privilege level also limits the machine
instructions a program can process.

Application programs are usually assigned privilege level 3.  This means that
they can call routines that run at any other privilege level. However, they can
access only their own data segments and cannot issue any I/O instructions.

Programs that are granted I/O privilege run at privilege level 2.  When IOPL is
YES, a program assigned privilege level 2, such as a subsystem that needs to
communicate directly with a specific device, is then permitted to send or
receive instructions to or from that device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> IOPL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To permit I/O privileges to processing programs, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file and restart your system:

IOPL=YES

To prevent I/O privileges from processing programs, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file and restart your system:

IOPL=NO

To allow I/O privileges to be granted to programs named PROC2 and PROC3, type
the following in the CONFIG.SYS file and restart your system:

IOPL=PROC2,PROC3


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.76. JOIN - Join Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Logically connects a drive to a directory on another drive. Therefore, you can
access a drive by a directory name instead of a drive letter. You can join a
drive only at the root directory.

ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ JOIN ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
 ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ drive\directory ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                 ΓööΓöÇ /D ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  ASSIGN, SUBST

Enter this command without a parameter to display the names of the drives
currently joined.

If the directory name does not exist, the OS/2 operating system creates a
directory on the drive you specify.  A directory that already exists must be
empty for the JOIN to work.  Also, after you issue the JOIN command, the first
drive name is no longer correct, and if you try to use it, the operating system
displays an error message.

Note that the following commands do not work in DOS sessions on drives that
have a JOIN command in effect:

CHKDSK
DISKCOMP
DISKCOPY
FORMAT
LABEL
RECOVER
RESTORE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> JOIN Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To join drive A to the path C:\DRIVEA and access drive A as the DRIVEA
subdirectory on drive C, enter the following:

JOIN A: C:\DRIVEA

To turn off the JOIN action on drive A, enter the following:

JOIN A: /D


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.77. KEYB - Select a Keyboard Layout ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selects a keyboard layout to replace the current keyboard layout for all OS/2
and DOS sessions.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ KEYB ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ             ΓööΓöÇ layout ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
            ΓööΓöÇ subcountry ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  CODEPAGE, COUNTRY, and DEVINFO

If your CONFIG.SYS file contains a keyboard DEVINFO statement, then you have
the ability to switch keyboard layouts using KEYB.  If there is no keyboard
DEVINFO statement in the CONFIG.SYS file, typing KEYB with any layout returns
an error message.  Typing KEYB without a layout parameter, whether there is a
DEVINFO statement or not in your CONFIG.SYS file, causes the current keyboard
code-page information to be displayed.

KEYB is useful for quickly accessing the keyboard characters of another
keyboard layout. KEYB must be run only from an OS/2 full-screen command prompt.
Running KEYB from a command prompt of an OS/2 window creates unexpected
results.

KEYB prepares the keyboard in the selected layout for the system code pages.  A
message is displayed when the code pages that are set in the CODEPAGE statement
in the CONFIG.SYS file do not match the code pages associated with the layout
that is being processed by KEYB. Enter a Y (yes) to load the default layout or
an N (no) to end the KEYB command without loading the requested keyboard
layout. Loading the default layout for a keyboard that does not match the
country physical keyboard layout is recommended only for users who understand
the implications for character mismatch.  If you choose to load the default
layout, certain characters typed at the keyboard and read by a program may not
match the characters shown on the keytops. Also, characters entered from the
keyboard could be displayed incorrectly on the screen.

If you use KEYB to switch to a keyboard layout where the keyboard code page
does not match the system code pages, and you decide that the potential
problems with using the default layout are too great, you must change the
CODEPAGE statement in the CONFIG.SYS file to match the keyboard code page
associated with the keyboard layout that you are trying to load.

If you want characters displayed in the same default code page for the layout
you specified using KEYB, change the CODEPAGE statement in the CONFIG.SYS file.

The DEVINFO statement specifies the keyboard layout that the system is to start
in, if all other required CONFIG.SYS parameters are correct.  If you do not
specify a DEVINFO statement in your CONFIG.SYS file, the U.S. keyboard layout
(US) is the default.  Only one DEVINFO is required (for the starting keyboard
layout).  KEYB can be issued for any valid country layout, provided code-page
support for that country has been prepared.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> KEYB  Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To switch to the German keyboard using the keyboard layout, GR enter the
following:

KEYB GR

See the table below for the keyboard layout parameter for the country you wish
to use.

Keyboard Layout Table:

 ΓòöΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòù
 Γòæ  AR  Arabic          Γòæ  HU  Hungary       Γòæ                           Γòæ
 Γòæ  BE  Belgium         Γòæ  IS  Iceland       Γòæ  SV  Sweden               Γòæ
 Γòæ  BR  Brazil          Γòæ  IT  Italy         Γòæ  SF  Switzerland (French) Γòæ
 Γòæ  CF  Canada (French) Γòæ  LA  Latin America Γòæ  SG  Switzerland (German) Γòæ
 Γòæ  CS  Czechoslovakia  Γòæ  NL  Netherlands   Γòæ  TR  Turkey               Γòæ
 Γòæ  DK  Denmark         Γòæ  NO  Norway        Γòæ  TW  Rep. of China        Γòæ
 Γòæ  SU  Finland         Γòæ  PL  Poland        Γòæ  UK  United Kingdom       Γòæ
 Γòæ  FR  France          Γòæ  PO  Portugal      Γòæ  US  United States        Γòæ
 Γòæ  GR  Germany         Γòæ  SP  Spain         Γòæ  YU  Yugoslavia           Γòæ
 Γòæ  HE  Hebrew          Γòæ                    Γòæ                           Γòæ
 ΓòÜΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓò¥

To switch to the Czechoslovakian keyboard using the Czechoslovakian keyboard
layout, CS, and the Czechoslovakian enhanced keyboard, 245, type the following
at the command prompt of a full-screen OS/2 session.

KEYB CS 245

For the subcountry keyboard code for the country you wish to use, select from
the subcountry codes table below:

Enhanced keyboard Table:

 ΓòöΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòù
 Γòæ   Default    Alternate  Countries with more than one keyboard layout  Γòæ
 Γòæ                                                                       Γòæ
 Γòæ   243        245        Czechoslovakia                                Γòæ
 Γòæ   189        120        France                                        Γòæ
 Γòæ   141        142        Italy                                         Γòæ
 Γòæ   166        168        United Kingdom                                Γòæ
 Γòæ                                                                       Γòæ
 ΓòÜΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓò¥

If you do not specify a subcountry code for these countries, the OS/2 operating
system uses the first subcountry code listed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.78. KEYS - Retrieve Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Permits previously issued commands to be retrieved and edited.


KEYS ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ OFF ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ON ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ list ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Enter this command without a parameter to display the status of the KEYS
command.

Entering KEYS ON disables ANSI extended keyboard support in OS/2 sessions.

The amount of memory for the command queue cannot exceed 64KB.  When the queue
is full, the oldest command is discarded as new commands are entered from the
keyboard.

Entering KEYS ON or KEYS OFF at the command prompt, sets an environment
variable named KEYS with a value of ON or OFF.  CMD.EXE checks the KEYS
environment variable when it starts and determines if KEYS is set to ON.  If
so, CMD.EXE acts as an implicit KEYS ON command.

KEYS ON Editing

KEYS OFF Editing


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> KEYS ON Editing Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the following keys for editing commands when KEYS is set to ON:

Esc                   Clears the command line and returns the cursor to the
                      first position following the command prompt

Home                  Moves the cursor to the first character in the command
                      line

End                   Moves the cursor to the last character in the command
                      line

Ins                   Inserts characters

Del                   Deletes characters

Left Arrow            Moves the cursor one position to the left

Right Arrow           Moves the cursor one position to the right

Up Arrow              Displays the previous command in the queue

Down Arrow            Displays the next command in the queue

Ctrl+Left Arrow       Moves the cursor to the first character of a word

Ctrl+Right Arrow      Moves the cursor to the first character of the next word

Ctrl+End              Deletes any character from the cursor position to the end
                      of the line

Ctrl+Home             Deletes any character from the beginning of the line to
                      the left of the cursor position

Enter                 Submits the command for processing


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> KEYS OFF Editing Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the following keys for editing command-prompt commands when KEYS is set to
OFF:

Esc                   Cancels the currently displayed command at the command
                      prompt.

Enter                 Places the command entered at the command prompt into the
                      computer and enters it into the memory of the command
                      queue.

F1                    Displays the last command entered at the command prompt
                      one character at a time as the F1 key is pressed and held
                      in the down position.

F2                    Displays all of the characters in the previous command up
                      to, but not including the character you enter, for
                      example:

                      Assume you have three files named FILE1, FILE2, and FILE3
                      on three different diskettes that you want to copy to
                      your B drive.  One way to do this with KEYS OFF is as in
                      the example that follows:

                      1. At the [B:\] command prompt, Type COPY A:FILE1 and
                      press Enter.

                      2. The command entered into your system and stored in the
                      command-prompt memory buffer is COPY A:FILE1.

                      3. Press F2 and enter the last character number 1.

                      4. As the 1 key is pressed, the previous command, COPY
                      A:FILE1, is retrieved but the number 1 has been dropped
                      as follows:

                                            COPY A:FILE

                      5. The cursor is held in the last position where the
                      number 2 can now be entered to copy the next file from
                      the second diskette and so on, returning to step 1 and
                      repeating until the copy process has been completed.

F3                    Displays the entire command previously entered at the
                      command prompt.

F4                    Deletes all of the characters in the previous command up
                      to, but not including, the selected character you enter;
                      for example:

                      The previous command entered is COPY FILENAME. Press F4
                      and enter the letter F. Press F3 and the previous command
                      FILENAME is retrieved as follows:

                                            FILENAME

F5                    Accepts the command that is present, or has been edited
                      at the command prompt as the current command and enters
                      it into the command-prompt queue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> KEYS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To enable retrieving commands, enter the following:

KEYS ON

KEYS ON Editing

To stop retrieving commands, enter the following:

KEYS OFF

KEYS OFF Editing

To display the list of commands in the queue, enter the following:

KEYS LIST

To set a KEYS statement in the CONFIG.SYS file, type the following in your
CONFIG.SYS file and restart your system.:

SET KEYS=ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.79. LABEL - Create or Change Volume Label ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Creates or changes the volume identification label on a disk.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ LABEL ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöñ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ           ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ label ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands: VOL

Enter this command without a parameter to display the current label and volume
serial number.  LABEL prompts you if you want to change it.  Type a volume
label up to 11 characters long and press Enter.  If you press Enter without
entering a label, the volume label remains unchanged.

Any leading blanks entered before a volume label are removed from the label,
and the first letter of the label is automatically positioned at the first
digit space allowed for the label.

LABEL does not work in DOS sessions on drives that have an ASSIGN, JOIN, or
SUBST command in effect. Also, LABEL does not work on network drives.

Return Codes: The LABEL command issues a return code of 0 for normal
completion.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LABEL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the volume label of drive A and be prompted by the system for the
new label, enter the following:

LABEL A:

To create a volume-label name of FIXEDISKC for your hard disk, drive C, type
the following:

LABEL C:FIXEDISKC


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.80. LASTDRIVE - Number of Accessible Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specifies the maximum number of drives that are accessible.

This statement has no effect in OS/2 sessions.

LASTDRIVE = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ xΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at a command
prompt.

The value you specify with this command represents the last valid drive that is
recognized.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LASTDRIVE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set the last drive = to M, giving your system access to 13 logical disks,
type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

LASTDRIVE=M


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.81. LIBPATH - Identify Dynamic Link Libraries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Identifies the locations of dynamic link libraries for OS/2 programs.


LIBPATH = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ                 Γöé
           Γöé                                Γöé
           ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  ;  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

LIBPATH is used to identify a set of directories to be searched when the OS/2
operating system loads dynamic link libraries. Because dynamic link library
modules are shared globally, this command allows path searching to be defined
globally rather than on a per-process basis (as done by the PATH command).

LIBPATH is not a part of the environment and therefore cannot be viewed with
the SET command.  Also, unlike the PATH environment variable, the current
directory is not searched first.

The installation program places this statement in your CONFIG.SYS file:

LIBPATH=.;C:\OS2\DLL;C:\OS2\MDOS;C:\;

Note:   The initial period indicates the current directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LIBPATH Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify the LIB subdirectory as the directory to be searched for dynamic
link libraries, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file and restart your
system:

LIBPATH=C:\;C:\LIB;

To reset the LIBPATH statement in your CONFIG.SYS file to what is set by the
installation program, type the following in your CONFIG.SYS file and restart
your system:

LIBPATH=.;C:\OS2\DLL;C:\OS2\MDOS;C:\;


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.82. LH or LOADHIGH - Load DOS TSR Programs into Upper Memory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Loads Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR) DOS programs into an available upper
memory block (UMB) for a DOS session.

LOADHIGH ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöñ
LH         ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ            ΓööΓöÇ arguments ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  DEVICEHIGH, DOS (UMB/NOUMB)

You can load a DOS TSR program into an upper memory block (UMB) by typing the
LH or LOADHIGH command at the DOS command prompt.  If no UMB is available, the
TSR program will be loaded into low memory (below 640KB).  To enable UMBs, type
the DOS=UMB statement in the CONFIG.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LOADHIGH Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To load the APPEND program with the parameters C:\OS2 and C:\TOOLS into a UMB,
enter the following:

LOADHIGH APPEND C:\OS2;C:\TOOLS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.83. MAKEINI - Recover User and System INI Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

System settings, such as application defaults, display options, and file
options, are contained in the OS2.INI startup file located in the C:\OS2
directory of your hard disk.  There is also a system file called OS2SYS.INI,
which contains information about installed fonts and printer drivers.

 ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ MAKEINI ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
    ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇ user ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                            ΓööΓöÇ system ΓöÇΓöÿ

If you receive a message stating that the OS2.INI file is corrupted, the
OS2.INI file installed on your system must be replaced by another valid copy of
the OS2.INI file.

To accomplish this, use the MAKEINI program from your command prompt.

Added to your system during the installation process, the MAKEINI.EXE file
creates a new OS2.INI file containing default information.  You should
re-create both the user and system INI files using MAKEINI (located in the
C:\OS2 directory of your hard disk).

Note:   You can rename the OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI files to names of your choice
        as long as the same file names are reflected in the PROTSHELL statement
        in the CONFIG.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MAKEINI Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Creating New INI Files

Note:   The following procedure assumes that you have the OS/2 2.1 operating
        system installed on drive C of your system.  If you have installed OS/2
        2.1 on another drive, you must use that drive instead of drive C to do
        the procedure.

To create new user and system INI files, follow these steps:

 1. Insert the Installation diskette in drive A; then, press and hold the Ctrl,
    Alt, and Del keys together to restart the system.

 2. When the screen displaying the logo appears, remove the Installation
    diskette and insert diskette 1 into drive A.

 3. Press Enter to continue.

 4. Press Esc when the screen, "Welcome to OS/2," appears.

 5. To change to drive C, enter:

        C:

 6. To change to the OS2 subdirectory, enter:

        CD \OS2

 7. To erase the current OS2.INI file, enter:

        ERASE OS2.INI

 8. To erase the current OS2SYS.INI file, enter:

        ERASE OS2SYS.INI

 9. To re-create a new user INI file, enter:

        MAKEINI OS2.INI INI.RC

10. To re-create a new system INI file, enter:

        MAKEINI OS2SYS.INI INISYS.RC

11. Remove diskette 1 from drive A.

12. Restart the system by pressing the Ctrl, Alt, and Del keys together.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.84. MAXWAIT - Set Maximum Wait ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sets the amount of time a ready-to-run thread waits before the system assigns
it a higher priority.

When a regular-class thread is denied the processor for a defined number of
seconds, it receives a temporary increase in priority up to a minimum time
slice.

MAXWAIT = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ x ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at the OS/2
command prompt.

Related Commands:  PRIORITY, THREADS, TIMESLICE

The system limits the time that a regular-class thread waits to be processed.
When the time limit is reached, the system raises the priority of the thread to
give it a chance to be processed.

The most appropriate amount of time to set depends on the number of
applications that must run concurrently and the kinds of activities the
applications perform (the system default is three seconds). Experiment with
this time to improve overall system performance.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MAXWAIT Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To cause a thread to wait up to 5 seconds before it receives a temporary
increase in priority, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

MAXWAIT=5

You can specify a number from 1 through 255.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.85. MEM - Display Used and Free Memory in DOS Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays the amount of used and free memory in the DOS environment.


MEM  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                       Γö£ΓöÇ /P ΓöÇΓöñ
                       Γö£ΓöÇ /D ΓöÇΓöñ
                       ΓööΓöÇ /C ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands: CHKDSK

Use the MEM command to display information about allocated memory areas, free
memory areas, and programs that are currently loaded into memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MEM Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the status of the total memory available in the DOS environment,
that is, conventional, expanded, and extended, and to display a list of
programs currently loaded into memory, type the following:

MEM /P


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.86. MEMMAN - Select Storage Allocation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selects storage allocation options for the OS/2 environment.

                     ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ , ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                          Γöé
MEMMAN = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ SWAP ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                       Γöé  ΓööΓöÇ NOSWAP ΓöÇΓöÿ   Γöé
                       Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ MOVE ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                       Γöé  ΓööΓöÇ NOMOVE  Γöÿ   Γöé
                       Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ COMMIT ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                       ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ PROTECT ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ



Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at the OS/2
command prompt.

Related Commands:  SWAPPATH

Applications consist of groups of segments that can be either loaded into
physical memory at the same time or called when needed.  If not enough memory
is available to satisfy a request, the system attempts to provide more memory
by writing the least frequently used data segments to a temporary file on a
disk.  This file is called a swap file.

Segments in the swap file are brought back into memory only as needed.
Swapping makes it possible for applications to overcommit the amount of
physical memory in the system.

If the system is started from a hard disk, swapping (SWAP) is the system
default; from a diskette, the default is no swapping (NOSWAP).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MEMMAN Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To permit segment swapping, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

MEMMAN=SWAP

To run a time-dependent application and prevent the OS/2 operating system from
swapping the contents of storage to disk, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS
file:

MEMMAN=NOSWAP

The default is SWAP.

To permit segment swapping and enable a program to receive an error return code
when there is not enough space in the swap file for the program to run, type
the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

MEMMAN=SWAP,COMMIT

To permit segment swapping and enable APIs to allocate and use protected
memory, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

MEMMAN=SWAP,PROTECT

The command can be typed with a comma or a space as a separator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.87. MD or MKDIR - Make Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Makes new subdirectories within the root directory (the directory you are in
when the OS/2 operating system starts) or within another subdirectory. MKDIR
creates a multilevel directory structure, which is helpful in keeping related
program or data files together.


MKDIR ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
MD      ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ        ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ                Γöé
                Γöé                              Γöé
                ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  CD, DIR, RD, and TREE

Enter this command with a directory name to create a subdirectory within the
current directory. Do not use the backslash (\) symbol if you have changed
directories and you want to create a subdirectory in your current directory.
If you use the backslash symbol, the subdirectory is created within the root
directory.

Each directory can contain file and directory names that also appear in other
directories.  In other words, two or more files or directories can have the
same name, if you define them in separate directories.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MD or MKDIR Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To make a subdirectory named LEDGERS within the root directory on drive C,
enter the following:

MD C:\LEDGERS

You can also create more than one directory at a time.

To make two separate directories named ACCOUNTS and LEDGERS in the root
directory on drive C, enter the following:

MD C:\ACCOUNTS C:\LEDGERS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.88. MODE - Set Operation Modes for Devices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sets operation modes for devices.

MODEΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ device ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                      ΓööΓöÇ arguments ΓöÇΓöÿ

There are four different MODE commands you can use:

COM#              Sets asynchronous communications modes.

Display           Sets the display modes for video adapters.

LPT#              Sets parallel printer modes.

DSKT              Sets diskette input/output write verification.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MODE (COM#) - Set Communication Modes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sets asynchronous communications modes for both OS/2 and DOS sessions.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ MODE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ COM# ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                   ΓööΓöÇ : ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ , ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  ΓööΓöÇ baud ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
           ΓööΓöÇ ,parity ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                       ΓööΓöÇ ,databits ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                     ΓööΓöÇ ,stopbits ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                                   ΓööΓöÇ ,P ΓöÇΓöÿ

            ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                       Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ,TO = state ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ,XON = state ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ,IDSR = state ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ,ODSR = state ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ,OCTS = state ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ,DTR = state ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ,RTS = state ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ,BUFFER = state ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Before using MODE to set up communications port modes, be sure the base
asynchronous communication device driver (COM.SYS) is installed.

Related Commands:

MODE (LPT#) - Sets parallel printer modes

MODE (Display) - Sets video modes

MODE (DSKT) - Sets diskette I/O write verification

The baud, parity, databits, stopbits, and P parameters are positional.  If you
omit a positional parameter but include a parameter that follows it, you must
enter a comma to designate the position of the omitted parameter. For example,
to accept the defaults for the baud, parity, stopbits, and databits parameters
and specify the P parameter, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,P

Note that the P parameter can be used only in DOS sessions; baud, parity,
databits, and stopbits can be used in either DOS or OS/2 sessions.

When a positional parameter is omitted or designated only with a comma, the
parameter returns to the original system default.  If a keyword parameter is
omitted, the current setting of that parameter is unchanged.

To set asynchronous communication modes, you can issue the command at either a
DOS or OS/2 command prompt.  This means you can set asynchronous communication
modes in DOS or OS/2 sessions.  You can also query the status of communications
ports in both sessions.  The output of a MODE COMx query can be redirected,
modified, and used as input to another MODE command.

Redirection of parallel-printer output to a serial device is not supported by
the MODE command.  However, this function is supported by the SPOOL command.

The following asynchronous-communication device-driver parameters are reset by
MODE every time it sets COM parameters when processing in OS/2 sessions.

o Output handshaking using DCD (data carrier detect) is prevented.
o Automatic receive flow control (XON or XOFF) is prevented.

For DOS sessions, the states of these parameters remain unchanged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MODE COM#: Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To query the status of asynchronous COM port 1, enter the following:

MODE COM1

To select a baud rate of 2400, enter the following:

MODE COM1:24

Baud Transmission Rate Facts:

o You must specify at least the first two digits of the desired rate.
o Valid Baud Rates

   110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600, 14400, 19200,
   38400, or 57600.

o The default is 1200.

To specify odd parity bits enter the following:

MODE COM1:,O

Parity Values Table

N (none), means that there is no parity bit.
O (odd), means odd parity.
E (even), even means even parity.
M (mark), means that the parity bit is always 1.
S (space), means that the parity bit is always 0.
The default is E.

To specify 8 data bits of data, enter the following:

MODE COM1:,,8

The values are 5, 6, 7, or 8 bits of data,
The default is 7.

To specify 1 stop bit of data, enter the following:

MODE COM1:,,,1

Stop-bit Value Facts.

Values are 1, 1.5, or 2.
Only 1 or 1.5 is valid if databits is specified as 5.
If stopbits is specified as 1.5, only 5 is valid for databits.
The default is 2 when the baud rate is 110; otherwise, the default is 1.

To specify a timeout value of approximately 30 seconds in a DOS session, enter
the following:

MODE COM1:,,,,P

The previous 5 examples normally would be entered together on the DOS command
prompt or typed in a batch file as follows:

MODE COM1:2400,N,8,1,P

To accept the defaults for the baud, parity, stopbits, and databits parameters
and specify the P parameter in a DOS session, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,P

To ensure that a printer write timeout never occurs, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,TO=ON

To prevent automatic transmit flow control, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,XON=OFF

To allow input handshaking using DSR, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,IDSR=ON

To allow output handshaking using DSR, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,ODSR=ON

To allow output handshaking using CTS, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,OCTS=ON

To allow data terminal ready, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,DTR=ON

To allow RTS toggling in transmit mode, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,RTS=TOG

To permit maximum device performance, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,BUFFER=AUTO


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MODE (Display) - Set Video Modes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sets display modes for switching display adapters, sets the display mode of the
color graphics monitor adapter, and allows you to specify the number of
character lines on the screen.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ MODE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
     ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ              ΓööΓöÇ CONx ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ display ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                 ΓööΓöÇ ,rows ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:

MODE (COM#) - Sets communications modes

MODE (LPT#) - Sets parallel-printer modes

MODE (DSKT) - Sets diskette I/O write verification

The display mode that is set with the MODE command affects only the current
session in which MODE is issued.  This includes any programs or command
processors running in this session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MODE (Display) Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set a mode on display number 1:

MODE CON1

To set a mode on display number 2:

MODE CON2

Examples using the CONx parameter:

To set a color 80x43 mode on display number 1:

MODE CON1 CO80,43

To set a monochrome mode on display number 2:

MODE CON2 MONO

To set a color 80x50 mode on the first BVH display in the list that it
supports:

MODE CON0 CO80,50
or

MODE CON CO80,50

To switch the active display adapter to the color graphics monitor adapter,
enter the following:

MODE CO40

The valid options are:

40, 80, 132, BW40, BW80, BW132, CO40, CO80, CO132, or MONO.

To specify a 50-line display enter the following: the number of rows

MODE CO80,50

Valid rows are 25, 43, or 50, depending on the display adapter


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MODE (LPT#) - Set Parallel Printer Modes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sets parallel-printer modes.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ MODE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ LPT# ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ PRN ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ chars ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
              ΓööΓöÇ ,lines ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
                            ΓööΓöÇ ,P ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:

MODE (COM#) - Sets communications modes

MODE (Display) - Sets video modes

MODE (DSKT) - Sets diskette I/O write verification

The chars, lines, and P parameters are positional.  When a positional parameter
is omitted, but the one that follows it is specified, its position must be
designated by a comma. Once you have issued the MODE command and specified
values for the chars or lines parameters (or both), those values become the
default values.

Note:   The spooler ignores all mode commands for setting printer parameters
        while the spooler is active.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MODE (LPT#) Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set up your printer as LPT1 and accept the system defaults (80 characters
per line and 6 lines per vertical inch), enter the following:

MODE LPT1 ,,,

o Specifies the printer number.  The pound sign (#) defines printer number 1,
  2, or 3.

o If you are using a network printer, the MODE command supports LPT4 through
  LPT9 for printing to a network printer.

To set up your printer as LPT2 and use 132 characters per line and 8 lines per
inch, enter the following:

MODE LPT2 132,8,,

o The value is either 80 or 132.

o The default is 80.

To set up your printer as LPT3 and specify 8 lines per inch for vertical
spacing, enter the following:

MODE LPT3 ,8,,

o The value is either 6 or 8.

o The default is 6.

To set up your printer as LPT2 and specify infinite retry, enter the following:

MODE LPT2 ,,P


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MODE (DSKT) - Set Diskette I/O Write Verification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sets diskette I/O write verification.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ MODE ΓöÇΓöÇ DSKT ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                  ΓööΓöÇ VER=state ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:

MODE (COM#) - Sets communications modes

MODE (LPT#) - Sets parallel-printer modes

MODE (Display) - Sets video modes

This function of MODE is different from the function offered by the VERIFY
internal command, which verifies file-system I/O write operations for each
session.

If you do not have a hard disk, a diskette (any diskette) must be present in
drive A before the MODE command can turn diskette verification on or off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MODE (DSKT) Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set diskette verification to ON, enter the following:

MODE VER=ON

To set diskette verification to OFF, enter the following:

MODE VER=OFF


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.89. MORE - Display Output One Screen at a Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Reads data from the standard input device and sends data to the standard output
device (usually the display) one full screen at a time. After each screen, the
OS/2 operating system pauses with the message --More-- until you press any key
to continue.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ MORE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
     ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  FIND, SORT

"One screen at a time" does not imply one physical window's worth of
information at a time when used in a window session.

MORE is useful for viewing long files or directories.  To view the next screen,
press any key.  However, if you do not want to continue, press the Ctrl and
Break keys together.

Return Codes:  The MORE command issues a return code of 0 for normal
completion.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MORE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the large subdirectory C:\MYDIR one screen at a time, using the |
symbol, enter the following:

DIR C:\MYDIR | MORE

To display the contents of a file named MYFILES.NEW one screen at a time, using
the redirection symbol (<), enter the following:

MORE <MYFILES.NEW


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.90. MOVE - Move Files to Another Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Moves one or more files from one directory to another directory on the same
drive.

MOVE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
         ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ     ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                  ΓööΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
            ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÿ

You can use the global file-name characters ? and * in the filename parameter
of both the source and target files.  If you type global characters in the
source file name, the names of the files will be displayed as the files are
being moved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MOVE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move a file named FRIDAY to a directory named WEEKLY and rename the file
DAILY, enter the following:

MOVE FRIDAY \WEEKLY\DAILY

To move all files in the current directory with an extension of .STA to the
STATUS directory, enter the following:

MOVE *.STA \STATUS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.91. PATCH - Apply Software Repairs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows you to apply IBM-supplied patches to make repairs to software.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ PATCH ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                 ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename.ext ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                       ΓööΓöÇ /A ΓöÇΓöÿ

PATCH should be used only by those who understand the need for a patch, how to
make a patch, and the effect the patch has on the operation of a program. PATCH
has prompts that guide you through inserting changes to the operating system's
software.

If you select the /A option to automatically apply patches shipped by IBM to
make fixes to IBM-supplied code, verification is performed before the patch is
applied.  Verification might not be done on non-IBM-supplied patches.

If you decide to manually apply a patch by entering the command without any
options, you are asked to supply an offset to indicate where the patch is to be
made. PATCH displays the contents of the location specified by the offset and
allows you to enter the patch.  You must enter both the offset and the patch
contents in hexadecimal notation.

When you supply a hexadecimal offset, the operating system displays the 16
bytes at that offset and you can change any or all 16 bytes or quit without
making any changes. The cursor is initially positioned on the first byte.  You
can type one or two hexadecimal digits to change this byte or press the
Spacebar to leave the byte unchanged and move to the next byte.  You can press
Backspace to move the cursor to the previous byte if you make a mistake.  You
can continue changing bytes until you press Enter.  If you move the cursor past
the 16th byte, the operating system displays the next 16 bytes, allowing you to
also change those bytes.

After you press Enter, the patch information is saved in memory and the
following message is displayed:

Do you want to continue patching filename (Y/N)?

If you enter Y (yes), PATCH prompts for an offset. PATCH also saves any more
patch requests in memory.  When you have entered all patches, the operating
system displays them on your screen and asks you to verify that they should be
applied.  If you respond with a Y, all the saved patch requests are written to
the disk in the same order in which you entered them.

If you specify automatic mode (/A), PATCH gets the information needed from a
patch information file received from IBM.

Return Codes:  PATCH issues a return code of 0 for normal completion.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PATCH Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:   All patches are addressed in hexadecimal.

To manually PATCH an information file you created named MYFILE.EXE, enter the
following:

PATCH MYFILE.EXE

Note:   The /A parameter for automatic mode is designed for IBM applied
        patches.  The following is only an example.

To specify automatic mode from a PATCH information file named DATA.DAT, that
looks like this:

123456

Type the following in a patch file called REPAIR.FIL:

FILE DATA.DAT
VER 0 313233
CHA 0 343536

To start the patch process on the file DATA.DAT enter the following:

PATCH REPAIR.FIL /A

The result of the patch would be:

456456

Note:   The preceding example for patching an ASCII text file and this utility
        program would be used on an executable file. You can use the PATCH
        command on any .EXE file as long as you understand what you want to do
        and where the information is located within the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.92. PATH - Set Search Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sets a search path for commands and programs.

PATH ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ                 Γöé
           Γöé                                Γöé
           ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  ;  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  APPEND, DPATH, and SET

Enter this command without a parameter to display the paths currently in
effect.  To delete the use of the PATH command, enter the command followed by a
semicolon (;).

Setting the PATH in the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files lets you avoid having
to set PATH from the command prompt each time you turn on your system.

As you create your own subdirectories, you can change the PATH statement in
your CONFIG.SYS to reflect your new directory structure. For DOS sessions, you
update the PATH statement in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.

PATH searches specified directories for commands or batch files that the system
did not find when it searched the current directory. PATH only finds files that
can be run, such as files with the following extensions: .COM, .EXE, and .BAT
(for DOS sessions), or .CMD (for OS/2 sessions).

PATH is a system environment variable.  If the system cannot find an external
command or program in your current directory, it queries the environment for a
value for PATH. Application programs can also query the environment for the
value of PATH and, depending on what they find, change their behavior.

If you enter a command that is not found in the current directory, the system
searches the named directories in the order in which you entered them.  The
length of a path can be up to five characters less than the number of
characters allowed on the command line.

When you install the OS/2 operating system, the installation program places the
following PATH statement in your CONFIG.SYS file:

SET PATH=C:\OS2;C:\OS2\SYSTEM;C:\OS2\MDOS;C:\OS2\INSTALL;C:\;

System installation also creates the following PATH statement in your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file for use with DOS sessions:

PATH C:\OS2;C:\OS2\MDOS;C:\;


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PATH Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To determine the current active PATH environment, enter the following:

PATH

To delete the current PATH environment, enter the following:

PATH ;

To search the MEMOS subdirectory on drive A and then search the REPORTS
directory on drive C, enter the following:

PATH A:\MEMOS;C:\REPORTS

To add the path to the ABC subdirectory on drive A to the existing path known
to CMD.EXE., enter the following:

PATH %PATH%;A:\ABC


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.93. PAUSE - Suspend Batch Operation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Suspends processing of the batch file and displays the following message:

Press any key when ready . . .

PAUSE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                  ΓööΓöÇ comment ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  ECHO, REM

Enter this command to display the message:

Press any key when ready....

You can control how much of a batch file you want to process by placing PAUSE
commands at strategic points in the file.  At each PAUSE statement, the system
stops and gives you time to decide whether to stop the processing.  Press and
hold Ctrl+Break, and type Y to stop a batch file from processing.  In a DOS
session, press any key to continue processing.  In an OS/2 session, you cannot
continue processing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAUSE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To pause batch processing and display the message, "Press any key when
ready...", type the following in your batch file:

PAUSE

To suspend processing of your commands in a batch file so that you can change
diskettes, type a statement like the following in your batch file:

@ECHO INSERT COPY DISKETTE #2 IN DRIVE A
@PAUSE

or

PAUSE INSERT COPY DISKETTE #2 IN DRIVE A


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.94. PAUSEONERROR - Pause CONFIG.SYS Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows or prevents pausing when error messages are issued during the processing
of the CONFIG.SYS file.

PAUSEONERROR = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ YES ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                       ΓööΓöÇ  NO   ΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAUSEONERROR Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To prevent the system from pausing before starting the user interface or
command processor during the processing of the CONFIG.SYS file, enter the
following:

PAUSEONERROR=NO

To pause the screen and read any error messages generated during the processing
of the CONFIG.SYS file, enter the following:

PAUSEONERROR=YES

If if there is not a PAUSEONERROR statement in the CONFIG.SYS file, the default
is true, and PAUSEONERROR is equal to YES.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.95. PICVIEW - Display a Picture File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays a picture file.

PICVIEW ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
         ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ            Γö£ΓöÇ /P ΓöÇΓöñ
                                           ΓööΓöÇ /S ΓöÇΓöÿ                              ΓöÇΓöÿ

You can select Picture Viewer from the Productivity folder or issue a PICVIEW
command at an OS/2 command prompt.

If you enter PICVIEW without a parameter at the OS/2 command prompt, the
Picture Viewer window appears.  If you type PICVIEW with a file name, PICVIEW
starts displaying the picture file immediately.  If you do not specify a file
name, you can select the files to be displayed from the Picture Viewer window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PICVIEW Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To view a metafile named AIRPLANE, enter the following:

PICVIEW AIRPLANE.MET

To view a picture interchange format (PIF) file named TRADSHOW, enter the
following:

PICVIEW TRADSHOW.PIF

To send a metafile named AIRPLANE to be printed, enter the following:

PICVIEW AIRPLANE.MET /P

To view a metafile named SHIP and then return the Picture Viewer window to the
default position on the screen, enter the following:

PICVIEW SHIP.MET /S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.96. PMREXX - Display Output from REXX Procedures ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays output from REXX procedures and provides an input field for them.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ PMREXXΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ              ΓööΓöÇ arguments ΓöÇΓöÿ

PMREXX is a Presentation Manager* window application that enables you to browse
the output of your REXX procedures.

You start the PMREXX program and a REXX procedure from an OS/2 command prompt.
You do this by typing PMREXX and a target procedure name that generates an
output or input function, as follows:

PMREXX  filename.CMD arguments

where the arguments and .CMD extension are optional.

By using PMREXX, you add the following features to REXX:

o A window for the display of the output of a REXX procedure, such as:

   - The SAY instruction output
   - The STDOUT and STDERR outputs from secondary processes started from a REXX
     procedures file
   - The REXX TRACE output (not to be confused with OS/2 tracing).

o An input window for:

   - The PULL instruction in all of its forms
   - The STDIN data for secondary processes started from a REXX procedures
     file.

o A browsing, scrolling, and clipboard capability for REXX output.
o A selection of fonts for the output window.
o A simple environment for experimenting with REXX instructions through the use
  of the REXXTRY.CMD program.  REXXTRY interactively interprets REXX
  instructions and can be started from an OS/2 command prompt.

For more information about REXX and PMREXX, select REXX Information in the
Information folder.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PMREXX Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start the PMREXX program and a REXX procedure named TEST.CMD from an OS/2
command prompt, type:

PMREXX TEST

Typing the .CMD extension is optional.

The following REXX program SAMPLE.CMD displays environment variables requested
as arguements:

/**/
'@ECHO OFF'
env = 'OS2ENVIRONMENT'
Parse Arg all
Do i=1 to words(all)
   word = translate(word(all,i))
   Say
   If value(word,,env)=''
     Then Say '"'word'" is not in the environment!.'
     Else Say word'="'value(word,,env)'".'
End

To display the current PATH and DPATH statements in the CONFIG.SYS file that
you have indicated in the REXX program, SAMPLE.CMD, enter the following:

PMREXX Sample PATH DPATH


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.97. PRINT - Print Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Prints or cancels printing of one or more files.

                                     ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                                       Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ PRINT ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ               Γö£ΓöÇ /D:device ΓöÇΓöñ
                                       ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /B ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
                                         ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                                         Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö┤Γöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ             Γöé    Γöé  Γö£ΓöÇ /C ΓöÇΓöñ   Γöé
  Γöé                                   Γöé    Γöé  ΓööΓöÇ /T ΓöÇΓöÿ   Γöé
  ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ /D:device ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  SPOOL

It is important to note that:

o The /C and /T parameters are valid for OS/2 sessions only.

o The /C or /T parameter cannot be used with the /B parameter.

o The /C and /T parameters cannot be used together.

o A file name cannot be specified with the /C or /T parameter.

You can enter more than one file name (along with its appropriate parameters)
at the command prompt.  The global file-name characters (* and ?) are allowed.
Also, the files are queued for printing in the order in which you enter them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRINT Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print a file named C:\LISTING\REPORT.STA on the LPT2 print device, enter the
following:

PRINT /D:LPT2 C:\LISTING\REPORT.STA

To prevent Ctrl+Z characters from being interpreted as end-of-file characters
when a file named LISTING prints, enter the following:

PRINT /B LISTING

To print a file named REPORTS in the current directory, enter the following:

PRINT REPORTS

To cancel the file that is currently printing on LPT1 (the default print
device), enter the following:

PRINT /C

To cancel all files in the LPT2 print queue and any file currently printing,
enter the following:

PRINT /D:LPT2 /T


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.98. PRINTMONBUFSIZE - Set Parallel-Port Device-Driver Buffer Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sets parallel-port device-driver buffer size.

PRINTMONBUFSIZE = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ x,ΓöÇΓöÇ x,ΓöÇΓöÇ xΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at a command
prompt.

The PRINTMONBUFSIZE= statement enables you to increase the size of the OS/2
parallel-port device-driver buffer and thereby increase performance of data
transfer to devices connected to the parallel port.  This device-driver monitor
buffer is used only if a printer character monitor is active.  The parallel
port device driver will allocate and register its monitor chain buffer based
upon the value specified.

Note:   If you increase this value, additional system memory is used.
        Therefore, you should increase the value only when using a printer
        character monitor that can take advantage of the additional memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRINTMONBUFSIZE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set the parallel-port device-driver buffer size for LPT1 as 2048 bytes, for
LPT2 as 134 bytes, and for LPT3 as 134 bytes, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

PRINTMONBUFSIZE=2048,134,134


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.99. PRIORITY - Schedule Threads ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selects priority calculation in scheduling regular-class threads.

PRIORITY = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ DYNAMIC ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ ABSOLUTE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at the OS/2
command prompt.

Related Commands:  MAXWAIT, TIMESLICE, THREADS

The system assigns a thread based on its display status (background or
foreground), recent input and output activity, and frequency of processor use.
Most threads are assigned Regular priority.

Applications can adjust priorities, but the system has a built-in method of
handling access to the processor.  The default method is Dynamic.  Changing
this to Absolute can help achieve predictable results by determining the order
of priority strictly on the basis of class and level.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRIORITY Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the PRIORITY statement so the OS/2 operating system varies the
priorities of threads as they are running, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS
file and restart your system:

PRIORITY=DYNAMIC

To change the PRIORITY statement so the OS/2 operating system does not vary the
priorities of threads as they are running, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS
file and restart your system:

PRIORITY=ABSOLUTE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.100. PRIORITY_DISK_IO - Set Disk Input/Output Priority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specifies disk input/output priority for applications running in the
foreground.

PRIORITY_DISK_IO = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ   YES   ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ    NO    ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at a DOS or
OS/2 command prompt.

When PRIORITY_DISK_IO=YES is specified in the CONFIG.SYS file, an application
running in the foreground will receive disk I/O priority over applications
running in the background.  This means that the application in the forground
will have a better response time than applications running in the background.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRIORITY_DISK_IO Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify that applications in the foreground are to receive priority for disk
access, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

PRIORITY_DISK_IO=YES

To specify that all applications (foreground and background) are to be treated
equally with regard to disk access, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

PRIORITY_DISK_IO=NO


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.101. PROMPT - Change System Command Prompt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Changes the system command prompt.

PROMPT ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ text ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands: DATE, HELP, SET, TIME, and VER

Typing this command without a parameter resets the system prompt to the system
default. PROMPT can be specified with the SET command. You can also set the
PROMPT command in the CONFIG.SYS file.

In DOS sessions, the default system prompt is the default drive letter followed
by the > symbol.  If you are in the root directory of the default drive, your
DOS command prompt looks like this:

C>

The default OS/2 system prompt is the current directory of the default drive
enclosed within bracket symbols. If you are in the \OS2 directory of the
default drive, your OS/2 command prompt looks like this:

[C:\OS2]


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PROMPT Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set the command prompt to show special text, for example, GOOD MORNING, type
the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

SET PROMPT=GOOD MORNING

To set the command prompt to display the current drive and directory plus the >
character (OS/2 sessions), type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

SET PROMPT=$P$G

To set the prompt to display the default drive plus the > character (DOS
sessions), type

PROMPT

To set the command prompt to display the date and time in OS/2 sessions, type
the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

SET PROMPT=TIME = $T$_DATE = $D

If you have allowed extended keyboard and display support, you can use escape
sequences in your prompts.  The following example sets the prompt to show help
on the first line, the date and time on the second line, and [drive\path] on
the current line.

SET PROMPT=$i[$p]$e[s$e[2;1H$e[34;47m$d$_$t$e[0m$e[u

Note:   Issuing the HELP ON or HELP OFF commands will overwrite any previous
        value you have set your prompt to.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.102. PROTECTONLY - Select Operating Environments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selects one or two operating environments.

PROTECTONLY ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ NO ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ YES ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at the OS/2
command prompt.

Related Commands:  PROTSHELL, RMSIZE, and SHELL

The OS/2 operating system requires this statement in the CONFIG.SYS file.  The
PROTECTONLY=YES statement allows memory under 640KB, which is normally used for
DOS programs, to be available for OS/2 programs.  When PROTECTONLY=YES, you
cannot run programs in DOS sessions. If you later decide that you want to run
DOS programs in the lower 640KB of memory, specify PROTECTONLY=NO.  This allows
you to use both DOS and OS/2 programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PROTECTONLY Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set up your system for OS/2 sessions only, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

PROTECTONLY=YES

To set up your system for both OS/2 and DOS sessions, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

PROTECTONLY=NO


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.103. PROTSHELL - Load a User Interface Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Loads the user interface program and OS/2 command processor. PROTSHELL also
replaces the default OS/2 command processor, CMD.EXE, with another command
processor.

PROTSHELL = ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
              ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
            ΓööΓöÇ arguments ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands: CMD, PROTECTONLY, RMSIZE, and SHELL

If you do not specify PROTSHELL in your CONFIG.SYS file, the default user
interface for OS/2 2.1 is loaded and started with an argument of CMD.EXE.

For a system that is set up for both OS/2 and DOS sessions, the user interface
is started and automatically displayed.  The DOS command processor also is
started but does not begin running until the DOS command prompt is selected
from the Command Prompts folder.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PROTSHELL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you accept the system installation default for the PROTSHELL statement, the
installation program places the following default statement in your CONFIG.SYS
file:

PROTSHELL=C:\OS2\PMSHELL.EXE
SET USER_INI=C:\OS2\OS2.INI
SET SYSTEM_INI=C:\OS2\OS2SYS.INI
SET OS2_SHELL=C:\OS2\CMD.EXE
SET AUTOSTART=PROGRAMS,TASKLIST,FOLDERS

If you want to run the Presentation Manager* program AIRLINE.EXE instead of the
default PMSHELL.EXE, type the following in your CONFIG.SYS file:

PROTSHELL=C:\AIRLINE.EXE
SET USER_INI=C:\OS2\OS2.INI
SET SYSTEM_INI=C:\OS2\OS2SYS.INI
SET OS2_SHELL=C:\OS2\CMD.EXE

Note:   You should also delete the SET AUTOSTART= line from the CONFIG.SYS file
        to disable the OS/2 Workplace Shell.

If you want to pass a default batch file to CMD.EXE to establish an
environment, type the following in your CONFIG.SYS file:

PROTSHELL=C:\OS2\PMSHELL.EXE
SET USER_INI=C:\OS2\OS2.INI
SET SYSTEM_INI=C:\OS2\OS2SYS.INI
SET OS2_SHELL=C:\OS2\CMD.EXE /K INIT.CMD


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.104. PSTAT - Display Process Status Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays process, thread, system-semaphore, shared-memory, and dynamic-link
library information.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ PSTAT ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
    ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /C ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                             Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /S ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                             Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /L ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                             Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /M ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                             ΓööΓöÇ /P:pid ΓöÇΓöÿ

Enter this command without a parameter to display information about the
following:

o Current processes and threads
o System semaphores
o Shared memory for each process
o Dynamic-link libraries

PSTAT displays process status information, such as current processes and
threads, system- semaphores, dynamic-link libraries, and shared memory.  PSTAT
helps you determine which threads are running in the system, along with their
current status and current priorities.

This command also aids you in determining why a given thread is blocked
(waiting for a system event), or why the thread's performance is slow (low
priority compared to other threads.)  Moreover, it displays the process ID that
has been assigned from each process.  The process ID can then be used as input
to the TRACE utility program for tracing on a per-process basis.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PSTAT Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the current process and thread-related information on the system
for:

o Process ID
o Parent process ID
o Session ID
o Process name

and display values for:

o Thread ID
o Thread state
o Thread priority
o Block ID

enter the following:

PSTAT /C

To display system-semaphore information for each thread and display:

o Process module name
o Process ID
o Session
o Index
o Number of references
o Number of requests
o Flag
o Name of the system semaphore

enter the following:

PSTAT /S

To display the dynamic-link libraries for:

o Process module name
o Process ID
o Session ID
o Library list

enter the following:

PSTAT /L

To display the shared information for each process:

o Handle
o Selector
o Number of references
o Name of the shared memory

enter the following:

PSTAT /M

To display the related information on the process ID 0002.

o Process ID
o Parent process ID
o Session ID
o Process module name
o Dynamic-link libraries
o Shared memory data

and display:

o Thread ID
o Thread priority
o Thread status
o Block ID
o Semaphore information

enter the following:

PSTAT /P:2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.105. RECOVER - Recover Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Recovers files from a disk that contains defective sectors.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ RECOVER ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   Γöé  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ                              Γöé
   Γöé                                           Γöé
   ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
      ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  CHKDSK

OS/2 2.1 reads the specified disk, sector by sector.  If RECOVER finds a bad
portion, the sector is marked and data is no longer allocated to it.  All the
files on the disk can be recovered if the directory has been damaged.

RECOVER cannot recover files on the disk that contains the RECOVER.EXE file or
the disk used to start the OS/2 operating system.  RECOVER locks the drive to
be recovered so that no other applications or processes are allowed to access
the drive.

The OS/2 message file, C:\OS2\SYSTEM\OSO001.MSG, must not be on the disk to be
recovered.  To be sure it is not, do the following:

o Copy the following files to a blank, formatted diskette; C:\OS2\RECOVER.COM,
  C:\OS2\SYSTEM\OSO001.MSG
o Delete these files from the disk to be recovered.
o Start the system from the OS/2 Install Diskette.
o At the A: prompt, type:

    SETDPATH=A:\
    SETPATH=A:\

o Put the diskette prepared earlier into drive A and type:

    RECOVER C:filenames

RECOVER does not work on drives that have an ASSIGN, JOIN, or SUBST command in
effect. Also, RECOVER does not work on network drives.

Note:   Use RECOVER with a specific file name or group of file names to ensure
        that only the specified files are recovered and that other files on the
        target disk will maintain their integrity.

Extended Attributes:  RECOVER will attempt to recover the clusters that contain
the extended attributes of a file. An extended attribute is a special area used
for storing data that describes the file to the system or to an application. If
errors occur in any extended attribute chain, RECOVER writes extended attribute
information into a file that follows this naming format:  EAnnnn.REC (nnnn is a
sequential number starting with 0000). The data from any bad sector appears in
the file as zeroes; the original recovered file no longer contains extended
attributes. RECOVER also recovers the file or directory associated with the
extended attribute chain and places it in a file that follows this naming
format:  FILEnnnn.REC.  The number in this file name corresponds to the number
shown in the EAnnnn.REC file name.

When recovering files or directories that have extended attributes, be sure to
use OS/2 2.1 to ensure all extended file attributes are recovered.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.105.1. High Performance File System Considerations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When using RECOVER on a disk formatted for the High Performance File System
(HPFS), it is important to note the following:

o RECOVER does not recover an entire disk; only individual files are recovered.

o RECOVER uses the original file name.  If the old file cannot be recovered,
  RECOVER creates a file that follows this naming format: FILEnnnn.REC and
  places that file in the same directory as the original file.

o If a sector in the damaged file cannot be recovered, RECOVER fills the area
  occupied by the sector with zeroes in the new file, preserving the original
  file size.

Return Codes:

0 - Normal completion
1 - Undefined
2 - Undefined
3 - Ended by user
4 - Ended due to error
5 - Unable to read or write to one of the file allocation tables
6 - Unable to execute another file system's recover program


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECOVER Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To recover a file named ADDRESS.FIL in the root directory of drive A, enter the
following:

RECOVER A:\ADDRESS.FIL

To recover all the files on drive A, enter the following:

RECOVER A:

To recover files on a drive that is the hard disk from which you normally start
the operating system, follow these steps:

 1. Insert the system installation diskette in diskette drive A.
 2. Restart the system.  At the Logo panel, remove the installation diskette
    and insert diskette 1.  Press Enter to continue.
 3. At the first text panel that appears (Welcome to OS/2), press Esc.
 4. If the drive containing the files to be recovered is a drive formatted for
    HPFS, the file UHPFS.DLL has to exist on the same diskette as CHKDSK, or
    UHPFS.DLL has to exist in a directory in the LIBPATH statement. To display
    the LIBPATH statement, enter TYPE \CONFIG.SYS in the drive of the disk that
    the system started from.
 5. In order for the system to display error messages, the file OSO001.MSG has
    to be on the same disk as CHKDSK or it has to exist in a directory in your
    DPATH statement.  To display your DPATH statement, enter DPATH at the
    command line.
 6. Run CHKDSK in drive A, while specifying the letter of the drive containing
    the files to be recovered.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.106. REM - Display Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Adds comments or line spacing in a batch file or a CONFIG.SYS file.

REM ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                  ΓööΓöÇ comment ΓöÇΓöÿ

 When adding remarks or line spacing in a batch file, it is important to note
that:

o The OS/2 operating system displays the remark when batch processing reaches
  the REM command.  If ECHO is OFF, the system does not display the remarks.
o You can use REM by itself to improve the readability of your batch file.

The OS/2 operating system treats the preceding REM commands as comments only
and does not attempt to act on the comments.

You can use the REM command to add remarks or line spacing to your CONFIG.SYS
file. Any lines of text added using REM are ignored by the system during
CONFIG.SYS processing and are not displayed on your display terminal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> REM Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display REM and the remark, THIS IS A BATCH FILE from within a batch file,
type the following:

REM THIS IS A BATCH FILE

To prevent REM from displaying the remark THIS IS A BATCHFILE from within a
batch file, type the following:

@REM THIS IS A BATCHFILE

To prevent the operating system from interpreting the piping symbol (|),
enclose it in double quotes.

REM USE DOUBLE QUOTES "|" DIR

To add a line of text to explain the use of your device commands or as a
reminder for future reference, follow this example.

REM
REM These four lines I added
REM so that I can use the
REM mouse I borrowed
REM from Marion. They should
REM be deleted when I return
REM Marion's mouse.
REM
DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
DEVICE=MSSER01.SYS SERIAL=COM2 MODEL=199
DEVICE=MOUSE.SYS TYPE=MSSER$ MODE=P QSIZE=15
DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM02.SYS
REM

To add a line to explain system configuration and improve readability, follow
this example:

REM
REM The following statement
REM sets the size of DOS environment
REM to 512KB.
REM
RMSIZE=512
REM
REM This allows Ctrl+Break
REM in DOS environment
REM
BREAK=ON
REM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.107. RENAME - Rename Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Changes a file name or extension without changing the contents of the file.
You can use RENAME or REN interchangeably. In OS/2 sessions, you can also
change the name of a directory.

RENAME ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ filename1 ΓöÇΓöÇ filename2 ΓöÇΓöñ
        Γöé ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ
REN ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  COPY, MOVE

You cannot specify a drive and path in the second file name; therefore, the
file stays in the same directory after you rename it.

You can use global file name characters (* or ?) in either file name.  All
files matching the first file name are renamed.  If global file-name characters
appear in the second file name, the corresponding character positions are not
changed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RENAME Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the name of a file from MEMOS to LETTERS in the current directory on
the current drive, enter the following:

REN MEMOS LETTERS

To change the extension of all files in the current directory of the current
drive from .OLD to .NEW, enter the following:

REN *.OLD *.NEW

To rename a program named MY.COM in the LEVEL1 subdirectory on drive B to
YOUR.COM, enter the following:

REN B:\LEVEL1\MY.COM YOUR.COM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.108. REPLACE - Replace Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selectively replaces files on the target drive with files of the same name from
the source drive.  Also, it selectively adds files from the source drive to the
target drive.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ REPLACE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ               ΓööΓöÇ source drive ΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ target drive ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
  ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                                  ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

      ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
        Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ /A ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
        Γöé     ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ /S ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ      Γöé
        Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /P ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
        Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /R ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
        Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /W ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
        Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /U ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
        ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /F ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Hidden and system files are not found on the source and are not replaced on the
target.  Also, if you use the /A parameter with the /S parameter, the system
displays an error message.

Extended Attributes:  REPLACE will copy the source file's extended attributes
to the target file (See the /F parameter). When replacing files that have
extended attributes, be sure to use OS/2 2.1 to ensure all extended file
attributes are replaced.

Return Codes:

0 - Normal completion
1 - No files were found to replace
2 - Some files not replaced (or added) due to file errors
4 - Ended due to error


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> REPLACE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To replace the LETTERS file on drive A with the LETTERS file on drive C, enter
the following:

REPLACE C:LETTERS A:

You can also use the global characters * and ? when specifying a file name.

To replace all files on drive C that have an extension of .EXE with files from
drive A that have the same file name and extension, enter the following:

REPLACE A:*.EXE C:

To copy all files from the current directory on drive C (that do not exist on
drive A) to drive A, without overwriting the files that currently exist on
drive A, enter the following:

REPLACE C:*.* A: /A

To replace the files found in all directories of drive C with files matching
the source file name of YEARLY in the current directory on drive A, enter the
following:

REPLACE A:YEARLY C:\ /S

To be prompted with (Y/N?) before replacing each file from the root directory
on drive C to the root directory on drive A, enter the following:

REPLACE C:\*.* A:\ /P

To replace all files on drive C (including read-only files) with files of the
same name from drive A, enter the following:

REPLACE A:*.* C: /R

To replace the LETTERS file on drive A with the LETTERS file on drive C, and
have the system wait for you to insert a diskette before searching for source
files, enter the following:

REPLACE C:LETTERS A: /W

To replace all files on drive C named LETTER.FMT with a new LETTER.FMT file
from drive A, enter the following:

REPLACE A:LETTER.FMT C:\ /U  /S

To replace a file named REPORTS.TXT to the STATUS directory on drive D and have
REPLACE fail if drive D does not support extended attributes, enter the
following:

REPLACE REPORTS.TXT D:\STATUS /F


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.109. RESTORE - Restore Backed-Up Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Restores one or more backed-up files from one disk to another.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ RESTORE  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ source drive ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ target drive ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÿ

            ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                      Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /P  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /M ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /B:mm-dd-yy ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /A:mm-dd-yy ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /E:hh:mm:ss ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /L:hh:mm:ss ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /S ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /N ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /F ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /D ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  ATTRIB, BACKUP

You must have used the BACKUP command to place the files you want restored on
the source.  Note that:

o RESTORE works only within the source directory unless you specify the /S
  parameter, which copies files in the source directory and in all directories
  below the starting source directory.

o When RESTORE prompts you to insert the source diskette, make sure that you
  insert the correct backup diskette. When you restore all your files, RESTORE
  prompts you to insert the backup diskettes in order.

o RESTORE can restore files from disks of different types.

o The RESTORE command does not restore COMMAND.COM, CMD.EXE, or the hidden OS/2
  and DOS system files on the root directory.  Therefore, you cannot use
  RESTORE to create a startable disk or diskette.

o You must restore files to the same directory they were in when BACKUP copied
  them.  If you try to restore them to a different directory, the system
  displays an error message.

o If you use global file-name characters, RESTORE prompts you to insert the
  next diskette after it has restored all files on the backup diskette that
  match the specified file name.

o If you are sharing files, you can restore only files that you have access to.
  If you attempt to access a file that you do not have access to, the system
  displays an error message.

Extended Attributes:  RESTORE will copy the extended attributes of a backed-up
source file or directory to the target (See the /F parameter). An extended
attribute is a special area used for storing data that describes the file to
the system or to an application.

When restoring files that have extended attributes, be sure to use OS/2 2.1 to
ensure all extended file and directory attributes are restored. Extended
attributes of a backed-up source subdirectory will only be copied to the target
when the subdirectory does not already exist on the target.

Return Codes:

0 - Normal completion
1 - No files were found to restore
2 - Some files were not processed due to file errors
3 - Ended by user
4 - Ended due to error


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RESTORE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To restore a file named MONDAY to the REPORTS subdirectory on drive C from the
backup diskette in drive A, enter the following:

RESTORE A: C:\REPORTS\MONDAY

To be prompted with (Y/N)? before restoring any read-only file or file changed
since the last time you did a backup, enter the following:

RESTORE A: C:*.* /P

To restore files that were changed or deleted since they were last backed up,
enter the following:

RESTORE A: C:*.* /M

To restore all files changed on or before November 12, 1988, type the following
(using the current date format):

RESTORE A: C: /B:11-12-88

To restore all files changed on or after November 12, 1988, type the following
(using the current date format):

RESTORE A: C: /A:11-12-88

To restore only those files that were changed at or earlier than 11:45 a.m.,
enter the following:

RESTORE A: C: /E:11:45:00

To restore only those files that were changed at or later than 11:45 a.m.,
enter the following:

RESTORE A: C: /L:11:45:00

To restore all files (including subdirectories) on the backup diskettes in
drive A to drive C, enter the following:

RESTORE A: C:\*.* /S

To restore files that no longer exist on the target drive, enter the following:

RESTORE A: C: /N

To restore a file named REPORTS.TXT to the STATUS directory on drive D and have
RESTORE fail if drive D does not support extended attributes, enter the
following:

RESTORE REPORTS.TXT D:\STATUS /F

To display the files on the backup diskette that match the files that were
backed up by the BACKUP command without restoring them, enter the following:

RESTORE /D


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.110. RD or RMDIR - Remove a Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Removes empty directories from a multilevel directory structure.

RMDIR ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
RD      ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ        ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ       ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ    Γöé
               Γöé                                    Γöé
               ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  CD, DIR, MD, and TREE

You cannot remove the root directory or the current directory.  You also cannot
remove a subdirectory of the current directory.

To process this command, it is important that you:

o Empty the directory of all files by using DEL or ERASE before using the RD or
  RMDIR command.  Only the two special hidden files of (.) and (..) remain.

o Empty the directory of all files in each subdirectory, if the directory
  contains subdirectories.

o Remove all hidden file attributes from all files except (.) and (..).

You cannot use this command on drives that have a SUBST or JOIN command in
effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RD or RMDIR Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To remove a subdirectory named NAMES from your root directory on the current
drive, delete all the files and subdirectories within NAMES, and enter the
following:

RD \NAMES

To remove a subdirectory named ANNUAL within a subdirectory ACCOUNTS, which is
in the root directory on the current drive, enter the following:

RD \ACCOUNTS\ANNUAL

To remove the subdirectory REPORTS from the SALES directory and the
subdirectory PROGS from the ACCT directory (OS/2 sessions only), enter the
following:

RD \SALES\REPORTS \ACCT\PROGS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.111. RMSIZE - Specify DOS Environment Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specifies the highest storage address allowed for the DOS operating
environment.

RMSIZE = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ x ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Related Commands:  PROTECTONLY, PROTSHELL, and SHELL

If you specify a number that exceeds the amount of memory allowable for your
system configuration, the system sends you an error message and ignores the
statement. It then automatically calculates the largest default value for your
system.

If you do not have an RMSIZE statement in your CONFIG.SYS file, the default is
the total amount of low memory installed (either 512KB or 640KB).

If you decided to specify PROTECTONLY=NO, you can further reduce the size of
the DOS environment by specifying RMSIZE.  This allows you to make the size of
the DOS environment smaller than the maximum amount available if all the
remaining memory below 640KB were used for DOS sessions.

This statement specifies the highest storage address allowed for a DOS session.
It is important to note that if you specify a number that exceeds the amount of
memory allowable for your system configuration, the system sends you an error
message.  This message states that the value was not acceptable and ignores the
statement.  If you do not specify a RMSIZE statement in your CONFIG.SYS file,
the default depends on the total memory installed.  If this total is 640KB or
less, then the default size is the total memory minus the minimum required for
protect-mode operations.  If this total is 1024KB or greater, the default size
is the amount of memory installed below 1024KB, either 512KB or 640KB.

This is the largest usable size for DOS sessions at which your system can
operate.  If you enter a size that is too large for your system, the system
displays an error message during startup and automatically calculates the
largest default value possible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RMSIZE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specifies a number from 0 through 640, representing a multiple of 1024 bytes.

To set the size of the DOS environment to 256KB, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

RMSIZE=256


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.112. RUN - Start System Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Loads and starts a system program during system initialization.  RUN does not
start a Presentation Manager* application.

RUN = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
              ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
            ΓööΓöÇ arguments ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  START

It is important to note that more than one RUN statement might appear in the
CONFIG.SYS file.  The RUN statements are processed in the order in which they
appear in the file, but all DEVICE statements are processed before any RUN
statements.

If a program started with a RUN statement requests a window before the user
interface is started, it receives a unique error code.  The program might
respond by delaying its processing until the user interface is started.

A program started with a RUN statement can establish a keyboard or mouse
monitor for any non-detached program.  Also, it can issue I/O requests to the
keyboard, mouse, or display only after it has established a window.

Because RUN programs are started before initialization of the user interface
and disk error handling, the program must prevent the OS/2 operating system
from performing disk handling and perform its own.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RUN Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To run a system checkout program named MARY.EXE located in the UTILS directory,
type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file.

RUN=C:\UTILS\MARY.EXE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.113. RUN - Logging Daemon Process ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Controls the start of the Logging Daemon process for system error-log files.
The System-Error Logging Service supports software that detects errors and logs
those errors in the system-error log file.

RUN = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ LOGDAEM.EXE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
              ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
            ΓööΓöÇ /E:filename ΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇ /W:x ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  SYSLOG, DEVICE (LOG.SYS)

A RUN=LOGDAEM.EXE command must be in the CONFIG.SYS file to control the start
of the Logging Daemon process.  It must be included whenever you specify the
DEVICE=LOG.SYS command in the CONFIG.SYS file to install the System Logging
Service device driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RUN = LOGDAEM.EXE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify C:\OS2\SYSTEM as the path for the error-log file, LOG0001.DAT, type
the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

RUN=C:\OS2\SYSTEM\LOGDAEM.EXE /E:C:\OS2\SYSTEM\LOG0001.DAT

To set the size of the error-log file, LOG0001.DAT, with the path C:\OS2\SYSTEM
to 32KB, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

RUN=C:\OS2\SYSTEM\LOGDAEM.EXE /E:C:\OS2\SYSTEM\LOG0001.DAT /W:32
*Frequent changes of DOS and OS/2 mode to session or environment in file


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.114. SET - Set Environment Variables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sets one string in the environment equal to another string for later use in
programs. You can use the SET command in your CONFIG.SYS file or batch files to
set search paths and environment variables.

To use SET from the command prompt:

SET ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöñ
        ΓööΓöÇ string1= ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
                     ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ string2 ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

 To use SET in your CONFIG.SYS file:

SET ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ string1 ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ string2 ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Related Commands:  APPEND, DPATH, KEYS, PATH, and PROMPT

Enter this command without a parameter to display the environment variables for
the current mode of operation.

If the name specified by the first string of the SET command already exists in
the environment, the command processor replaces its current value with the new
value specified by the second string.  If you enter the SET command with only
the first string and the equals sign (=), the command processor removes the
environment variable or replaceable parameter name and its associated value
from the environment, if the name exists.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.114.1. Environments and Command Processors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The environment is a special place in storage that is used by the command
processor to store and look up information, such as the values assigned to
names. You can use SET to create a replaceable parameter or to set the value of
a system variable, such as PATH. Application programs (particularly compilers
and assemblers) and batch files can use the information stored in the
environment to affect their processing.

Because DOS sessions and OS/2 sessions operate independently, each command
processor that starts a session can have its own environment.  For information
on how command processors within a session inherit the environment, refer to
the COMMAND.COM and CMD.EXE command processors.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.114.2. Replaceable Parameters for Batch Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use the SET command in a batch file to define a replaceable parameter
that will be replaced by values supplied when the batch file runs. In OS/2
sessions, replaceable parameters can also be set on the command line. You must
begin and end the name with a percent sign (%).  For example, suppose you have
a batch file that contains multiple occurrences of a file name.  To avoid
having to change each occurrence when you want to change the name of the file,
you can specify the file name as a replaceable parameter; for example:

%MYFILE%

To set %MYFILE% to a specific file name, include a SET command in your batch
file:

SET MYFILE=SAMPLE.ABC

After the batch processor interprets the SET command, it changes each
occurrence of %MYFILE% it meets in the batch file to SAMPLE.ABC.

You can also use names of system variables as replaceable parameters in batch
files.  Assume that you have the following replaceable parameter in a batch
file:

%PATH%

When the batch processor meets this replaceable parameter, it looks in the
environment for the current value of PATH and substitutes that value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.114.3. Commands That Are System Variables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use the SET command to set the value of OS/2 system variables. These
system variables for OS/2 sessions are:

PATH           Sets a search path for executable files.

DPATH          Sets a search path for data files.

KEYS           Permits previously issued commands to be retrieved and edited.

PROMPT         Sets a new command prompt.

The system variables for DOS sessions are:

PATH           Sets a search path for executable files.

PROMPT         Sets a new command prompt.

APPEND         Sets the search path for data files if the APPEND command is
               entered with the /E option.

The system variables for the Workplace Shell are:

USER_INI              Sets the INI file used by the Workplace Shell for system
                      information about such items as program defaults, display
                      options, and file options.

SYSTEM_INI            Sets the INI file used by the Workplace Shell for system
                      information about such items as installed fonts and
                      printer drivers.

OS2_SHELL             Sets the command processor for OS/2 sessions.

RESTARTOBJECTS        Sets the objects that will be automatically started by
                      the Workplace Shell.  The YES and NO options determine if
                      objects running at time of shutdown and objects in the
                      Startup folder are to be started.  The STARTUPFOLDERSONLY
                      option is used if only objects in the Startup folder are
                      to be started.  The REBOOTONLY option is used if objects
                      are to be started only when the Workplace Shell is
                      started by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del or turning on the
                      computer.

AUTOSTART             Sets the parts of the Workplace Shell that are
                      automatically started.  Parts of the Workplace Shell that
                      are started by default include FOLDERS, PROGRAMS,
                      TASKLIST (the Window List), and CONNECTIONS (network
                      connections).  Deleting any of these options means that
                      the deleted options will be disabled the next time the
                      system is started.  For example, deleting the FOLDERS
                      option from the AUTOSTART statement means that all
                      folders, including the desktop itself, will not start.
                      Similarly, deleting the TASKLIST option means that no
                      Window List will be displayed.  Deleting the PROGRAMS
                      option means that programs, except those in the Startup
                      folder, cannot be started from the Workplace Shell even
                      if RESTARTOBJECTS=YES.  Deleting CONNECTIONS means that
                      network connections will not be started.  Modifying the
                      AUTOSTART statement is not recommended for general use.

RUNWORKPLACE          Sets the interface that is started by the OS/2 operating
                      system.  PMSHELL.EXE is the program for the Workplace
                      Shell.

The command processor recognizes system variable commands that are entered at
the command prompt.  You can also enter the system variables with the SET
command.  The SET command is optional at the command prompt for system
variables except those for the Workplace Shell.  It is always required when
used to set system variables in the CONFIG.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.114.4. Replaceable Parameters at the OS/2 Command Prompt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In OS/2 sessions, substitution of replaceable parameter names by their values
in the environment can be made at the command prompt. Using this feature of
OS/2 2.1, you can append values to the values of system variables already in
the environment. For example, assume that your current path to data files is:

DPATH
C:\OS2;C:\OS2\SYSTEM;
C:\OS2\INSTALL;

To append a path to the \MYDIR directory on drive C, enter:

SET DPATH=%DPATH%;C:\MYDIR;

Or you can enter:

DPATH %DPATH%;C:\MYDIR;

In both these examples, the C:\MYDIR directory is appended to the current path
to data files in the environment of the current OS/2 session.  In this example,
assume that your current path ends with a semicolon. If no environment variable
exists by the name you specify, no substitution is made.  The system will not
generate a message stating that the substitution was not made.

The following is the contents of the batch file ADDPATH.BAT or ADDPATH.CMD.  It
will append the first parameter to the end of the current path setting:

@PATH=%PATH%%1;


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SET Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the environment variables for the current mode of operation enter
the following:

SET

To set the search path of executable files to null, enter the following:

SET PATH=
The environment will no longer have a PATH value.

To set the search path to another value for your environment (such as the APPS
subdirectory on drive C), enter the following:

SET PATH=C:\APPS

To avoid having to change the file name for each occurrence when you want to
change the name of the file, you can specify the file name as a replaceable
parameter as in the following:

%THEFILE%

To set %THEFILE% to a specific file name, include a SET command in your batch
file as follows:

SET THEFILE=EXAMPLE.ABC

After the batch processor interprets the SET command, it changes each
occurrence of %THEFILE% it finds in the batch file to EXAMPLE.ABC.

To use the name of a system variable such as PATH as a replaceable parameter in
a batch file to substitute the current value of PATH, type the following
replaceable parameter in your batch file:

%PATH%


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SET Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Below are examples of how SET can be used to set the environment variables in
your CONFIG.SYS file.

SET COMSPEC=C:\OS2\CMD.EXE
SET PATH=C:\OS2;C:\OS2\SYSTEM;C:\OS2\INSTALL;C:\UTILS;C:\TOOLS;
SET DPATH=C:\OS2;C:\OS2\SYSTEM;C:\OS2\INSTALL;C:\UTILS;C:\TOOLS;
SET PROMPT=$i[$p]
SET HELP=C:\OS2\HELP
SET BOOKSHELF=C:\OS2\BOOK
SET TOOLS=C:\WORDPROC
SET TOOLS=C:\SPELCHK
SET KEYS=ON
SET AUTOSTART=PROGRAMS,TASKLIST,FOLDERS,CONNECTIONS
SET RUNWORKPLACE=C:\OS2\PMSHELL.EXE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.115. SETBOOT - Sets Up the Boot Manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Provides the ability to set up the Boot Manager for a hard disk.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ SETBOOT ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
      Γöö drive Γöÿ Γöö path Γöÿ           Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇ /T:x ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                   Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇ /T:NO ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                   Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇ /M:m ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                   Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ/Q ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                   Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ/B ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                   Γö£ΓöÇ  IBA:n ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                   Γö£ΓöÇ  IBD:d ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                   Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇ /X:x ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                   ΓööΓöÇ /N:name ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands: FDISK   Related Information: Hard Disk Information

The SETBOOT utility program helps you to set up the Boot Manager.  It allows
you to enter parameters at the command prompt that enable you to take full
advantage of the Boot Manager.  The Boot Manager can operate in attended or
unattended mode.  In attended mode, the Boot Manager displays a list of
startable systems which enables you to select the system to be started.

The system index determines the mode.  A value of 0 indicates attended mode.
Any value above 0 indicates unattended mode.  Unattended mode means that you
can construct a fallback startup sequence.  This means that each time you start
the computer, the system index is decreased by 1 if the previous value was
greater than 1.  When the current system index reaches 1, it remains there
until reset by the SETBOOT command.  Type the following command to display the
SETBOOT parameters that you can use:

SETBOOT /option:parameters


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SETBOOT Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set the startup selection timer to 15 seconds, type the following:

SETBOOT /T:15

To disable the startup selection timer, type the following:

SETBOOT /T:NO

To set the normal mode for the Boot Manager menu, type the following:

SETBOOT /M:n

To set the Boot Manager menu to advanced mode, type the following:

SETBOOT /M:a

To query the current startup environment, type the following:

SETBOOT /Q

To shutdown the file system buffers and caches and then restart the system,
type the following:

SETBOOT /B

To set the startup index to put the Boot Manager in attended mode, type the
following:

SETBOOT /X:0

To set the startup index to put the Boot Manager in unattended mode, type the
following:

SETBOOT /X:3

To specify the logical drive with the alias MYSYSTEM as the default operating
system to be started, type the following:

SETBOOT /0:MYSYSTEM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.116. SETLOCAL - Define Local Variables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Lets you define the drive, directory, and environment variables that are local
to the current batch file.

SETLOCAL ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Related Commands:  ENDLOCAL

This command saves the current drive, directory, and environment variables and
lets you define local variables for the batch file. The previous drive,
directory, and environment settings are restored when the ENDLOCAL command is
encountered, or when the batch file ends.

If a matching ENDLOCAL command is not found, the saved elements are restored
when the processing of the batch file that issued the SETLOCAL command ends. In
this way, any environment variable and the current drive and directory can be
altered without affecting the command processor. Issuing multiple SETLOCAL
commands without matching ENDLOCAL commands is not considered an error.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SETLOCAL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the path of PATH A:\;A:\MICSPGM within a batch file and restore the
previous drive, directory, and environment settings when the processing of the
batch file ends, type the following:

 .
 .
 .
SETLOCAL
A:
CD\XYZ
PATH A:\;A:\MICSPGM
 .
 .
ENDLOCAL


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.117. SHELL - Install a Command Processor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Loads and starts the DOS command processor, COMMAND.COM, or allows you to
replace the DOS command processor with another command processor.

SHELL = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
              ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
            ΓööΓöÇ arguments ΓöÇΓöÿ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter this command at a DOS
command prompt.

Related Commands:  COMMAND, PROTSHELL, and RMSIZE

If SHELL is omitted from the CONFIG.SYS file, the default DOS command processor
is loaded and started with a /P parameter to retain COMMAND.COM in storage. In
addition, SHELL does not affect either the OS/2 SET command, or the SHELL
command in BASIC.

Also, remember that if you are using a DOS command processor other than
COMMAND.COM, internal commands and the batch processor are not available to you
unless they are duplicated in your command processor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SHELL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To install COMMAND.COM as the command processor, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

SHELL=C:\OS2\MDOS\COMMAND.COM C:\OS2\MDOS /P

If you specify a SHELL statement that contains a file specification other than
the default, set the COMSPEC environment variable to the same file
specification when a DOS session is started.  For example, if you have a
command processor named DOSPROC.COM in a DOSPGMS subdirectory, you can place
the following SET command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file:

SET COMSPEC=C:\DOSPGMS\DOSPROC.COM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.118. SHIFT - Use More Than 10 Replaceable Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows command lines to use more than 10 replaceable parameters in batch file
processing.

SHIFT ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

It is important to note that:

o Command files are limited to handling 10 parameters, %0 through %9, unless
  you use the SHIFT command.

o All parameters on the command line are shifted one position to the left, the
  %1 parameter replacing the %0 parameter, the %2 parameter replacing the %1
  parameter, and so on.  Each following shift command causes all the parameters
  to be shifted to the left by one position.

o There is no backward shift.  Once SHIFT is run, the %0 parameter that existed
  before the shift cannot be recovered.

As an example, assume:

%0 = 'A'
%1 = 'B'
%2 = 'C'
%3 - %9 are empty

A SHIFT results in the following:

%0 = 'B'
%1 = 'C'
%2 - %9 are empty


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SHIFT Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To shift the parameters on the command line one position to the left, with the
%0 parameter being replaced by the %1 parameter and so on, type the following
in your batch file.

ECHO %0
.
.
.
ECHO %8
SHIFT
ECHO %9
.
.
.

As an example, assume:

%0 = 'round'
%1 = 'square'
%2 = 'flat'
%3 - %9 are empty

A SHIFT results in the following:

%0 = 'square'
%1 = 'flat'
%2 - %9 are empty

In the following batch file named PROCESS.CMD, you could use a file such as
this to call other processes and call on more than the 10 (%0 through %9)
variables that only batch-file processing allows.  The file will process the
first batch file specified, and the SHIFT command will then move to the next
specified batch file.  This allows you to specify the files to be processed in
any order that you want as well as vary the number of files to be processed.

@ECHO OFF
:CHECK
IF "%1" == "" GOTO DONE

ECHO PROCESSING THE FILE %1
CALL %1
SHIFT
GOTO CHECK

:DONE
ECHO PROCESSING COMPLETED

To process three files named FILE1, FILE6, and FILE2 using the batch file in
the previous example, enter the following at the command line:

PROCESS FILE1 FILE6 FILE2

The SHIFT results in the following:

PROCESSING THE FILE FILE1
(output of file1 if there is any...)
PROCESSING THE FILE FILE6
(output of file6 if there is any...)
PROCESSING THE FILE FILE2
(output of file2 if there is any...)
PROCESSING COMPLETED


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.119. SORT - Sort Information by Letter or Number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Reads data from standard input, sorts the data, and writes it to standard
output.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ SORT ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ           ΓööΓöÇ /R ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ /+n ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  CODEPAGE, COUNTRY

It is important to remember that:

o When you are sorting large files, you might have to wait a few minutes until
  processing is completed.  The maximum size of a file you can sort is
  approximately 63KB, or 64 512 bytes.

o The standard input and output devices cannot be redirected to the same file
  name.

o Characters are sorted according to their ASCII values, with the following
  exceptions: lowercase letters (a - z) are equated to uppercase letters (A -
  Z), and characters above ASCII value 127 are sorted according to rules based
  on the currently selected country code.

Note that the word sort means to rearrange lines of text according to specific
instructions.  Use SORT if you want to arrange a file in alphabetic or numeric
sequence.  For example, you could use SORT to alphabetize applicant names or
number a schedule according to dates.

Return Codes:  SORT issues a return code of 0 for normal completion.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SORT Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To sort a file named BOOK1 in reverse order and write the output to a file
named REV, enter the following:

SORT /R <BOOK1 >REV

To sort a file named BOOK1 starting at column 1, and send the output to your
screen, enter the following:

SORT <BOOK1

To sort a file named CALENDAR.88, starting at column 7, type the following:

SORT /+7 <CALENDAR.88

To direct the output of DIR to SORT, sort the listing starting with the 25th
column, and send the output to your screen, enter the following:

DIR | SORT /+25

To cause the output listing from DIR to be used by SORT as its input, redirect
the output to your screen, and pause after each screen with the message
--More--, enter the following:

DIR | SORT | MORE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.120. SPOOL - Print Redirection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Redirects printer output from one device to another, for example, from one
parallel printer to another, or from a parallel printer to a serial printer.

                                       ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                                      Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ SPOOL ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö┤Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ              Γöé Γö£ΓöÇ /D:device ΓöÇΓöñ Γöé
                                      Γöé ΓööΓöÇ /O:device ΓöÇΓöÿ Γöé
                                      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /Q ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  DEVICE, CODEPAGE, and PRINT

The Base Asynchronous Communications device driver supports COM1 through COM4.
For the system to spool to a serial printer, it must load the COM.SYS device
driver during system initialization. This requires a DEVICE statement in your
CONFIG.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.120.1. Change Serial Printer Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When spooling to a serial printer, you may need to issue the MODE command so
that the Asynchronous Device Driver works correctly with the serially attached
printer. The communications setting used by the Asynchronous Device Driver must
match the setting used by the serially attached printer.  Serial settings
include such items as the baud rate, the parity, the start and stop bits, and
the hardware or software handshaking.  You only need to issue the MODE command
if the Presentation Manager* printer driver installed in the spooler does not
use the Serial Port settings. The MODE command can be issued before or after
starting SPOOL.

The recommended way is to change the communications settings using the Serial
Port Settings window.  To do this, do the following:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for your printer object by clicking mouse button 2
    on the object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Output tab.
 5. Display the menu for the COM port to which your serial printer is attached.
 6. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 7. Select Settings.
 8. Determine the communications settings for your serial printer using the
    Serial Port Settings window.

If you change the communications settings using the MODE command and the Serial
Port Settings window, the settings in the window will override the settings set
by the MODE command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.120.2. Start the Spooler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you have installed a printer on your system, the spooler is automatically
enabled by default.  To disable the spooler:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select System Setup.
 3. Display the menu for the Spooler object by clicking mouse button 2 on the
    object.
 4. Select Disable spooler.

To enable a previously disabled spooler, follow the above procedure and select
Enable spooler from the spooler object menu since this will be the menu choice
because the spooler was disabled.  You can also enable the spooler by entering
the SPOOL command with no parameters at the OS/2 command prompt.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.120.3. Redirect Printing to a Serial Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For non-Presentation Manager* (PM) applications and PM applications that use
non-PM printing, the spooler supports spooling of data only to parallel devices
(PRN, LPT1, LPT2, and LPT3) as input devices.

Output devices, on the other hand, can be parallel devices and serial devices
COM1, COM2, COM3, and COM4.

Before you begin, ensure that your system has serial device support.  You have
serial device support when the serial communication parameter settings are
displayed after you enter the following command at a DOS or OS/2 command
prompt:

MODE COM1

To add serial device support to your system, do the following:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select System Setup.
 3. Select Selective Install.
 4. On the System Configuration window, select Install support in the Serial
    device support field.
 5. Follow the instructions in the window and insert the specified OS/2
    installation diskettes when requested.

Using the SPOOL command, you can redirect parallel printer output to a serial
device by specifying a parallel printer as the input device (/D) and a serial
printer as the output device (/O).

To redirect input from a parallel port to the printer attached to a serial port
(for example, COM1), enter the following:

SPOOL /D:LPT2 /O:COM1

To print a file named LETTER on the serial printer you just set up, enter the
following:

PRINT LETTER /D:LPT2

To cancel the redirection specified in the previous SPOOL statement, enter the
following:

SPOOL /D:LPT2 /O:LPT2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.120.4. DOS Application Printing Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The print spooler spools output from a program into a file until it is
instructed to close the file and print its contents. Many DOS programs do not
contain the instructions required by the print spooler, so output is not
printed until the application program ends.

If you wish to force printer output for a DOS program, you can do so while you
are still interacting with the program by pressing the Ctrl, Alt, and PrtSc
keys together.  This causes the temporary spool file to be closed and prepared
to print.  Make sure that you wait until the entire file has been sent to the
queue by your application program.  Pressing the Ctrl, Alt, and PrtSc keys too
soon can cause the print file to split into two separate print files.

Another method to force printer output for a DOS application is to set the DOS
Settings printer option with the following procedure:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for a DOS session by clicking mouse button 2 on a
    DOS full-screen or DOS window object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Session tab.
 5. Select the DOS settings pushbutton.
 6. Select Print_timeout in the DOS Settings window.
 7. Specify the number of seconds to wait after the DOS application completes
    printing before the spooler closes the file and begins printing.

Setting the number of seconds too small can cause the print file to be split
into two separate print files.  This behavior can vary depending on the DOS
application that is running.  Many applications print correctly with a small
delay.  The printer timeout is set only for applications running in the window
in which the option was set.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.120.5. Switch Code Pages for DOS sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you plan to use code-page switching for DOS sessions, you must start the
print spooler before selecting a DOS command prompt from the Command Prompts
folder.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SPOOL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start the spooler from the OS/2 command line, enter the following:

SPOOL

To redirect input from a parallel port to the printer attached to a serial port
(for example, COM1), enter the following:

SPOOL /D:LPT2 /O:COM1

To print a file named LETTER on the serial printer you just set up, enter the
following:

PRINT LETTER /D:LPT2

To cancel the redirection specified in the previous SPOOL statement, enter the
following:

SPOOL /D:LPT2 /O:LPT2

To query existing device redirection, enter the following:

SPOOL /Q


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.121. START - Start Programs Automatically ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Starts an OS/2 program in another session.

The primary use for START is to automatically start programs at system startup.
The special batch file, STARTUP.CMD, allows you to do this.

To imbed redirectional signals into the command session, enclose the command
and command inputs in quotation marks.

START ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
        Γöé "program  Γöé      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇ /K ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇ /F ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
        ΓööΓöÇ title"  ΓöÇΓöÿ      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇ /C ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ /B ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
                           ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ /N ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
         ΓööΓöÇ /PGM ΓöÇΓöÿ        Γö£ΓöÇ /FS  ΓöÇΓöñ      Γö£ΓöÇ /MAX ΓöÇΓöñ
                           Γö£ΓöÇ /WIN ΓöÇΓöñ      ΓööΓöÇ /MIN ΓöÇΓöÿ
                           Γö£ΓöÇ /PM  ΓöÇΓöñ
                           ΓööΓöÇ /DOS ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ command ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
          ΓööΓöÇ /I ΓöÇΓöÿ                     Γöé   command   Γöé
                                       ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ inputs  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  RUN

Enter this command without a parameter to start an OS/2 command processor.

If you use the /WIN, /FS, or /PM parameter, your program runs in the foreground
session.  If you do not use one of these parameters, you can use the /F
parameter to make the program run in the foreground session.

Make sure that you specify the correct drive and path when you use the START
command to run a batch file with the STARTUP.CMD file.  Also, if you plan to
redirect I/O using the START command, enclose the command and command inputs
within quotation marks.

You can use START to run full-screen applications or applications running in a
window such as Presentation Manager* programs.

START determines the type of application and will run it in the appropriate
window or full-screen session.  However, you have the option to override the
determined default by using the /FS, /WIN, /PM, or /I parameter.

You cannot start a batch file (.CMD) with the /PM parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> START Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start XCOPY directly without invoking the CMD.EXE command processor, copy
the complete contents of the root directory on drive C to drive A, and display
XCOPY C-A as the program title, type the following:

START "XCOPY C-A" /N XCOPY C:\ A:

To run the XCOPY command in the foreground session, enter the following:

START "XCOPY C-A" /F XCOPY C:\ A:\

To start MY EDITOR without specifying a title, enter the following:

START /PGM "MY EDITOR"

To start MY EDITOR and give it a title, enter the following:

START "MY FAVORITE EDITOR" /PGM "MY EDITOR"

The name MY FAVORITE EDITOR would appear on the Window List, rather than the
name of the program, MY EDITOR.

If the /PGM parameter is not used, START interprets the first quoted string as
the name of a user-supplied title, and the second quoted string as the command
to be passed to another session which is running CMD.EXE.

To start the XCOPY command in a full-screen session and copy the files from
drive A to drive B, enter the following:

START "XCOPY A-B" /FS XCOPY A:\ B:

To start a batch file named CRAYON.CMD in an OS/2 window session, enter the
following:

START /WIN CRAYON.CMD

To start a batch file named MYFILE.BAT in a DOS window session, enter the
following:

START /WIN MYFILE.BAT

To start the CRAYON.EXE program to run as a Presentation Manager* program,
enter the following:

START "CRAYON GAME" /PM CRAYON.EXE

To start the XCOPY command in a background session, enter the following:

START "XCOPY C-A" /B XCOPY C:\ A:\

To start the ACCT.EXE program to run as a full-screen program and cause the new
session to inherit the environment defined by the SET statements in the
CONFIG.SYS file, enter the following:

START "ACCOUNT" /FS /I ACCT.EXE
 From a DOS Command Prompt:

To start a COMMAND.COM session, enter the following:

START /DOS

To start a COMMAND.COM session in a window, enter the following:

START /WIN /DOS

To start a full-screen COMMAND.COM session, enter the following:

START /FS /DOS
 From an OS/2 Command Prompt:

To start a Presentation Manager or any window application in a maximized state,
enter the following:

START /MAX

To start a Presentation Manager or any window application in a minimized (icon)
state, enter the following:

START /MIN

To start XCOPY in a new OS/2 session, copy the complete contents of the root
directory on drive C to the root directory on drive A, and display XCOPY C-A as
the program title, enter the following:

START "XCOPY C-A" XCOPY C:\ A:\


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.122. SUBST - Substitute Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Substitutes a drive letter for another drive and path so that you can access
that drive and path using only the drive letter.  When OS/2 2.1 finds a drive
that was created with the SUBST command, it replaces the reference with the new
path.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ SUBST ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ       ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ drive\path ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                  ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /D ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  ASSIGN and JOIN

Enter this command without a parameter to display the names of the
substitutions currently in effect on your system.

The following commands do not work in DOS sessions on drives that have a SUBST
command in effect:  BACKUP, CHKDSK, DISKCOMP, DISKCOPY, FORMAT, LABEL, RECOVER,
and RESTORE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SUBST Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To substitute the drive letter G for the path C:\OS2\OS2.DTP, enter the
following:

SUBST G: C:\OS2\OS2.DTP

You can now enter DIR G: instead of entering DIR C:\OS2\OS2.DTP.

To delete substitutions currently in effect on drive G, enter the following:

SUBST G: /D


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.123. SWAPPATH - Specify Swap File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specifies the size and location of the swap file.

SWAPPATH = drive ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇ minfree ΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇ initial ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  MEMMAN

The swap file (SWAPPER.DAT) is used to temporarily store data segments that the
system has removed from physical memory to satisfy a request for memory.  If
moving and swapping are enabled, use this command to specify the location and
size of the swap file.

You can isolate the swap file in either a subdirectory or a separate partition
on a hard disk.  A separate partition is recommended, because the swap file can
become quite large.  For example, if the default location for the swap file is
drive C, you can direct the swap file to a subdirectory on drive D.  The
following examples show the default location and a location in a subdirectory
(SWAPPER) that you have created on drive D:

The default location is:

SWAPPATH=C:\OS2\SYSTEM

A location in the SWAPPER subdirectory created on drive D is:

SWAPPATH=D:\SWAPPER

Note:   After you have relocated the swap file to a subdirectory or separate
        partition, shut down and restart your system, and erase the old swap
        file from its previous location.

The minfree parameter specifies the minimum free space that can remain on the
disk before you receive a warning that the swap file has increased to a size
that leaves less than this amount of free space on the disk.  The initial
parameter specifies the size of the swap file initially allocated by the
operating system at time of installation.  This value is variable and depends
on the amount of physical memory in the system.

Note:   The minfree value does NOT define the amount of free space on the disk
        at any given time because applications could cause less free space to
        be available on the disk than what is specified by the minfree value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SWAPPATH Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For swapping to be active, MEMMAN must be in your CONFIG.SYS file as follows:

MEMMAN=SWAP

To store the swap file in the C:\OS2\SYSTEM directory, type the following in
the CONFIG.SYS file:

SWAPPATH=C:\OS2\SYSTEM

To store the swap file in the D:\SWAPPER directory on drive D, type the
following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

SWAPPATH=D:\SWAPPER

The default SWAPPATH statement for a system with 8MB of physical memory is:

SWAPPATH=C:\OS2\SYSTEM 2048 4096

The default SWAPPATH statement for a system with 12MB of physical memory is:

SWAPPATH=C:\OS2\SYSTEM 2048 2048

To specify 8MB as the initial size of a swap file on a partition with 10MB of
free space and a minfree value of 2MB, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS
file:

SWAPPATH=C:\OS2\SYSTEM 2048 4096


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.124. SYSLEVEL  - Displaying Operating System Service Level ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays operating-system service level

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ SYSLEVEL ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
    ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

This utility program displays the corrective service level of the system.

The following message will appear while SYSLEVEL checks the current corrective
service level of your system

Please wait...

Once the corrective service level has been determined the following will be
displayed on your monitor.

C:\OS2\INSTALL\SYSLEVEL.OS2
IBM OS/2 Base Operating System
Version 2.10     Component ID 562107701
Type 0
Current CSD level: XR00000
Prior   CSD level: XR00000

An example of the information displayed and an explanation of the displayed
items follows:

o C:\OS2\INSTALL\SYSLEVEL.OS2

   - The subdirectory and file containing the information.

o IBM OS/2 Base Operating System

   - The system name.

o Version 2.10, Component ID:

   - The version, release, and modification number, followed by the Component
     ID of the system.

o Current CSD Level: nnnnnnn

   - The current corrective service level.

o Prior CSD Level: nnnnnnn

   - The prior corrective service level.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SYSLEVEL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To run the SYSLEVEL utility program enter the following:

SYSLEVEL


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.125. SYSLOG - System Log File Formatter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allows you to view or print the formatted contents of the system error-log
file.

SYSLOG ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
            Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /S ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
            Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /R ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
            ΓööΓö¼ΓöÇ /P:pathname ΓöÇΓö¼Γöÿ
             ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /W:x ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands: DEVICE (LOG.SYS), RUN (LOGGING)

You can enter this command with parameters to do the following:

o Suspend system error logging
o Resume system error logging
o Redirect error logging data from one file to another.
o Specify the size of an error-log file.

If you enter the SYSLOG command with no parameters, the SYSLOG utility program
is started.

SYSLOG is a Presentation Manager* application that runs in a window.  You can
use SYSLOG to suspend or resume error logging, format the contents of error-log
files, print the contents of those log files, or redirect error logging to a
different file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SYSLOG Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the SYSLOG utility program, enter the following:

SYSLOG

To suspend error logging, type the following:

SYSLOG /S

To resume error logging, type the following:

SYSLOG /R

To redirect the current error-log file to the file LOG0001.DAT in the path
C:\OS2\SYSTEM, type the following:

SYSLOG /P:C:\OS2\SYSTEM\LOG0001.DAT

To set the size of a new error-log file named LOG0001.DAT, with the path
C:\OS2\SYSTEM, to 32KB, type the following:

SYSLOG /P:C:\OS2\SYSTEM\LOG0001.DAT /W:32


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.126. THREADS - Set Number of Independent Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sets the maximum number of independent actions, known as threads, for OS/2
sessions.

THREADS = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ x ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Related Commands: MAXWAIT, PRIORITY, TIMESLICE

Applications consist of a series of instructions.  The processor reads each
instruction and performs the associated activity.  The sequential execution of
the instructions by the processor is called the thread of execution.  More than
one thread of execution can exist within a single process.  Typically, OS/2
applications contain many threads.

Several threads can be ready to execute at the same time, but only one thread
at a time can have access to the processor.  Access to the processor is managed
by the system scheduler, which assigns each thread a priority.  The thread that
has the highest priority, and that is ready to run, is allocated to the
processor.  For example, if a thread is being processed, and another thread
with a higher priority becomes ready to run, the system stops processing the
thread with the lower priority and allocates the processor to the thread with
the higher priority.  That thread is processed until it relinquishes control of
the processor or until a thread of higher priority is ready to run.

The system supports a maximum of 4095 threads, which it allocates to itself and
the applications running on it.  Reducing the number of threads while running
complex applications or system extensions, can force activities that COULD be
performed concurrently, to be performed serially, thus slowing performance.  If
no THREADS statement is in the CONFIG.SYS file, the default number of threads
is 64.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> THREADS Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To have the system handle up to 512 active threads, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

THREADS=512

If no THREADS statement is in the CONFIG.SYS file, the system defaults to a
value of 64.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.127. TIME - Set System Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays or changes the time known to the system and resets the time on your
computer's clock. This time is recorded in the directory when you create or
change a file.

TIME ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
       ΓööΓöÇ hh ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
              ΓööΓöÇ :mm ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      ΓööΓöÇ :ss ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  COUNTRY, DATE, and PROMPT

Enter this command without a parameter to display the system time and be
prompted about changing it.

Specify time in hours and minutes, using a 24-hour clock (military time),
separated by a colon or period.  You can also add the seconds and hundredths of
a second separated by a period or a comma, depending on the decimal separator
shown on your screen.

Note:   If you do not enter a valid time, the system displays an error message.
        Also, as with the DATE command format, you can change the TIME
        separators by editing the COUNTRY statement in your CONFIG.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TIME Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To query the system clock and allow you to update the clock prompted by the
system, enter the following:

TIME

To enter or change the time in the system to 6:45 a.m. without being prompted
by the system, enter the following:

TIME 6:45

Time Parameters

hh    Specifies the hours.  The new hours must be entered using 0 to 23 only.

mm    Specifies the minutes. The new minutes must be entered using 0 to 59
      only.

ss    Specifies the seconds. The new seconds must be entered using 0 to 59
      only.

cc    Specifies the hundredths of seconds. The new hundredths of seconds must
      be entered using 0 to 99 only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.128. TIMESLICE - Allocate Process Wait Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sets the minimum and maximum amount of processor time allocated to processes
and programs for both OS/2 and DOS sessions.

TIMESLICE = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ x ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                                 ΓööΓöÇ ,y ΓöÇΓöÿ

Type this command in the CONFIG.SYS file; do not enter the command at the OS/2
command prompt.

Related Commands:  MAXWAIT, THREADS, PRIORITY

Unless a dispatching priority is explicitly defined by an application, the
system assigns one to each thread of execution.  The system uses round-robin
(that is, time-distribution) time slicing to ensure that threads of equal
priority are given equal chances to be processed.

The first value (x) in the statement is the minimum amount of time a thread can
be processed before yielding the processor to a thread of the same priority
level; the second value (y) is the maximum amount of time a thread can be
processed before yielding processor time.

The default is dynamic time slicing based on system load and paging activity.
Dynamic time slicing gives the best performance in all situations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TIMESLICE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set the minimum TIMESLICE value to 32 and allow the maximum value to
default, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

TIMESLICE=32,

To set the maximum TIMESLICE value to 32 and allow the minimum value to
default, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

TIMESLICE=,32

To change the minimum and maximum time slice allowed to 45 milliseconds, type
the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

TIMESLICE=45

This value must be an integer greater than or equal to the default value of 32.

To change the maximum time slice allowed to 125 milliseconds to support a
communication program, and the minimum time slice to 40 milliseconds, type the
following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

TIMESLICE=40,125

Note:   This value must be an integer greater than or equal to the minimum
        default value of 32, and less than the maximum default value of 65536.

If you do not have a TIMESLICE statement in your CONFIG.SYS file, the minimum
and maximum default values are set.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.129. TRACE - Select or Set System Trace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Selects or sets the tracing of system events.

This command is intended to be used with the assistance of your technical
coordinator.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ TRACE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ OFF ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                    ΓööΓöÇ ON  ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   Γö£Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ major_code_spec ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γöñ    Γöé  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /S ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ   Γöé
   ΓöéΓööΓöÇ (minor_code_spec) ΓöÇΓöÿΓöé    Γöé  ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /R ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ   Γöé
   Γö£Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ tdf_spec ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γöñ    ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /C ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
   ΓöéΓö£ΓöÇ (minor_code_spec) ΓöÇΓöñΓöé
   ΓöéΓööΓöÇ (event_type_spec) ΓöÇΓöÿΓöé
   Γö£Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ tdf_keyword ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γöñ
   ΓöéΓö£ΓöÇ (minor_code_spec) ΓöÇΓöñΓöé
   ΓöéΓööΓöÇ (event_type_spec) ΓöÇΓöÿΓöé
   ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /P: ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ pid_spec ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

To allow system trace in your CONFIG.SYS file:

TRACE = ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ OFF ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                 ΓööΓöÇ ON  ΓöÇΓöÿ            ΓööΓöÇ x ΓöÇΓöÿ     Γöé
                                 Γöé                 Γöé
                                 ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ , ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  PSTAT, TRACEBUF, and TRACEFMT

Related Information:  Trace Point Overview and Trace Definition Files (TDF)

The OS/2* operating system processes TRACE statements in the order in which
they appear in the CONFIG.SYS file; the effects of the statements are
cumulative.  If any part of a statement is incorrect, the OS/2 operating system
ignores the statement.

If you do not specify TRACE in the CONFIG.SYS file, events are not traced.
However, if you have a TRACEBUF statement in CONFIG.SYS, this allocates a trace
buffer.  Then, you can trace events by entering the TRACE command at the OS/2
command prompt.

If TRACE=OFF or TRACE=ON appears in the CONFIG.SYS file without a TRACEBUF
statement, the system allocates a 4KB trace buffer.

If you do not specify TRACE or TRACEBUF statements in the CONFIG.SYS file, OS/2
2.1 does not allocate a trace buffer and system tracing is not available.

The System Trace facility is used to record a sequence of system events,
function calls, or data.  The record is usually produced for debugging
purposes.  After the trace data is recorded, the System Trace Formatter is used
to retrieve it from the system trace buffer and format the data to your
display, printer, or file.

On request, the OS/2 operating system tracing facility records certain
important events in the system and system extensions in a circular buffer.

If a system problem can be duplicated without a system failure, the TRACE OFF
function allows tracing to be stopped after the problem has been re-created.
This allows the state of the trace buffer to be preserved from the time the
TRACE OFF command is processed.

The tracing mechanism is performance critical; therefore, no statistical
processing of recorded data is performed by the tracing routines.

Records in the buffer are identified by major and minor codes (you can only
specify TRACE by major code in the CONFIG.SYS file).  Some of the data that may
be recorded in the circular buffer will include system events such as
interrupts and task switches.

If you need to use the System Trace facility, your technical coordinator will
provide the buffer size.  When the trace is complete, you can use the trace
formatter (TRACEFMT) to organize the data into a report.  This helps you
isolate causes of problems in the OS/2 system by formatting the information
placed in the trace buffer by the Trace facility.

An OS/2 enhancement to the Trace utility program allows you to trace a given
process or set of processes, so that you can focus on the events of the
specified process without intermixing events from other processes in the
system.  This reduces the possibility of trace-buffer overflow by minimizing
the number of events which are recorded.  Analyzing the formatted trace data is
quicker and easier because only events of the specified process are recorded
and displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TRACE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To allow system trace, type the following in your CONFIG.SYS file:

TRACE=ON

To prevent system trace, type the following in your CONFIG.SYS file:

TRACE=OFF

or

REM TRACE=ON

If there is no TRACE statement in your CONFIG.SYS file, the default is active
and system trace is not allowed (TRACE=OFF).

To indicate that a major event code (15) is to be traced, type the following in
your CONFIG.SYS file:

TRACE=ON 15


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TRACE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To allow system trace, type the following in your CONFIG.SYS file:

TRACE=ON

The default is system trace is not allowed (TRACE=OFF).

To turn all static trace points on, enter the following:

TRACE ON

To turn all static trace points off, enter the following:

TRACE OFF

In dynamic tracing, to trace DOSCALL1 (2, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8), enter the
following:

TRACE ON DOSCALL1 (2, 4-8)

This TRACE command remains in effect until one of the following occurs:

o The system is powered off.

o The operating system removes the dynamic-link library.

o You enter either of the following commands:

    TRACE OFF

  or

    TRACE OFF DOSCALL1

  Notice that the event list is not specified.

To activate tracing for all current and future processes, enter the following:

TRACE ON /P:ALL

To specify tracing the process ID (pid) of hexadecimal value 0034, enter the
following:

TRACE ON /P:34

To suspend tracing without removing the existing set of trace points, enter the
following:

TRACE OFF /S

To resume tracing activity for the currently specified set of trace points,
enter the following:

TRACE ON /R

To Clear the trace buffer, enter the following:

TRACE OFF /C


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.130. TRACEBUF - Set Size of Trace Buffer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sets the size of the trace buffer. This statement is intended to be used with
the assistance of your technical coordinator.

TRACEBUF= ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ x ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

Related Commands:  TRACE and TRACEFMT

TRACEBUF sets the size of the trace buffer in the CONFIG.SYS file.  If any
valid TRACE statements are in CONFIG.SYS (including TRACE=OFF), the default
size of the trace buffer is 4KB.

The x parameter specifies a trace buffer size of up to 63KB.  If you have a
TRACEBUF statement without a TRACE statement in the CONFIG.SYS file, the trace
buffer size requested is specified and tracing is turned off (the same as if
you specify TRACE=OFF). If you need to use the System Trace facility, your
technical coordinator will provide the buffer size.

If you do not specify a TRACE or TRACEBUF statement in CONFIG.SYS file, OS/2
2.1 does not allocate a trace buffer, and system tracing is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TRACEBUF Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set the size of the trace buffer to 25KB, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

TRACEBUF=25

Specifying a number from 1 through 63, represents a multiple of 1024 bytes.

The default is 4KB.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.131. TRACEFMT - Display Formatted Trace Records ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays formatted trace records in reverse time-stamp order. This command is
intended to be used with the assistance of your service coordinator. Your
technical coordinator will analyze the formatted data to help diagnose your
problem.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ TRACEFMT ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  TRACE and TRACEBUF

TRACEFMT works only if you have the TRACE or the TRACEBUF statement in your
CONFIG.SYS file.

You use the TRACEFMT utility program to format the information placed in the
trace buffer by system trace. TRACEFMT is a Presentation Manager* application
running in a window. The TRACEFMT application provides choices on the menu bar.
From these choices, you can select items that allow you to do the following
tasks:

o Open a file
o Get system trace buffer
o Save As

   - Save unformatted trace data
   - Save formatted trace data
   - Save either summary mode (process ID or major code)

o Print

   - Formatted data
   - Either summary mode

o View formatted data
o View summary by process ID
o View summary by major code.

Your technical coordinator will analyze the formatted data to help diagnose
your problem.  You can use TRACEFMT as many times as required to diagnose a
problem without having to restart the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TRACEFMT Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACEFMT is intended to be used as a Presentation Manager utility program.

To start the OS/2 System Trace Formatter and display the contents of the system
trace buffer when system tracing is available, enter the following:

TRACEFMT

To format a data file named RECORDS that contains unformatted trace data when
tracing is not active, enter the following:

TRACEFMT RECORDS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.132. TREE - Display Directory Structure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays all the directory paths found on the specified drive, and optionally
lists the files in the root directory and in each subdirectory.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ TREE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ            ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ /F ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  CHDIR, DIR, MKDIR, and RMDIR

Enter this command without a parameter to display all directory paths found on
the current drive.

You can also:

o Print a directory listing on a printer

o Pause a directory listing on a display

The display (or output) indents at each subdirectory level and uses block
graphics.

Return Codes:  TREE issues a return code of 0 for normal completion.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TREE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To list the directory names on drive C, enter the following:

TREE C:

To list the directory paths and the names of all files in the root directory
and each subdirectory on drive C, enter the following:

TREE C: /F

To have a directory listing sent to a printer, enter the following:

TREE >PRN

To display directory names on the screen and pause with the message --More--
after a full screen of information appears, enter the following:

TREE | MORE

To create a directory names file called MYTREE, enter the following:

TREE > MYTREE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.133. TYPE - Display File Contents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays the contents of one or more files on the screen. In a DOS session,
only one file is displayed.

TYPE ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
               ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ                Γöé
           Γöé                                            Γöé
           ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

You can also:

o Print a file
o Pause the display screen while viewing a file

You can use TYPE to display ASCII files. Text files appear in a legible format;
however, other files, such as object program files, may appear unreadable
because of the presence of nonalphabetic or nonnumeric characters.

Note that the data is unformatted except that tab characters are expanded to an
eight-character boundary (that is, columns 1, 9, 17, 25 and so on).  In an OS/2
session, TYPE displays files consecutively on the screen if you specify
multiple file names. You can include a drive and path when specifying multiple
file names and can also use the global file-name characters * and ? in the file
name you specify.

In an OS/2 session if multiple files or files with global characters are
listed, TYPE precedes the file data with the file name.  A blank line appears
before and after each file name.  TYPE writes the file data to Standard Output
and writes the file name to Standard Error. For example, to display data in
files named FILE1, FILE2, and FILE3 and place the file names in a file named
FILE.LST, enter the following:

TYPE FILE1 FILE2 FILE3 2> FILE.LST

To display the file names on the screen and place all the file data in a file
named FILE.TXT, enter the following:

TYPE FILE1 FILE2 FILE3 > FILE.TXT

Note:   If you TYPE a text file that is not in the current directory, the
        operating system searches the directories in the order that is
        specified in your DPATH statement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TYPE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the file FILE1.TXT in the STATUS directory on drive C, enter the
following:

TYPE C:\STATUS\FILE1.TXT

To look at a file named CALENDAR in the current directory and have the display
pause with the message --More-- after a full screen of information appears,
enter the following:

TYPE CALENDAR | MORE

or

MORE < CALENDAR

You can display the contents of more than one file at a time. To display the
files FILE1.TXT in the STATUS directory on drive C and FILE2.TXT on drive A,
enter the following:

TYPE C:\STATUS\FILE1.TXT A:FILE2.TXT

To display data in files named DATA1, DATA2, and DATA3 and place the file names
in a file named DATA.LST, enter the following:

TYPE DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 2> DATA.LST

To display the file names on the screen and place all the file data in a file
named DATA.TXT, enter the following:

TYPE DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 > DATA.TXT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.134. UNDELETE - Recover Deleted or Erased Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Recovers files that have been deleted or erased.

UNDELETE Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
         ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇfilename ΓöÇΓöÿ

      ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                         Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
         Γöé  Γö£ΓöÇ /L ΓöÇΓöñ  Γöé
         Γöé  ΓööΓöÇ /S ΓöÇΓöÿ  Γöé
         Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /A ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
         ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /F ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

The UNDELETE command provides the capability of recovering files that have been
deleted or erased.  UNDELETE is designed to delay the removal of a file, which
lets you retrieve a file before it is permanently discarded.

The environment variable DELDIR defines the path and maximum size of the
directories used to store deleted files.  One such directory is specified for
each logical drive on the system.  The DELDIR statement is written in the
CONFIG.SYS file as follows:

SET DELDIR = drive:\path, maxsize; drive2:\path, maxsize

The path and maximum size values in KB for each logical drive are separated
from each other by a comma; the logical drive names are separated by a
semicolon. When the DEL or ERASE command is issued from any session type, the
file is copied to the directory specified in the DELDIR statement for that
logical drive.

If the size of deleted files combined exceeds the maximum size of the specified
directory, files are automatically removed from the directory to conform to its
maximum size specified in the DELDIR statement.  Files are removed in
first-in-first-out (FIFO) order.  To disable storage of deleted files in a
directory, remove the directory name from the DELDIR statement.

When UNDELETE is specified, if the file is still recoverable, it is reclaimed
and restored to its specific path.  If a duplicate file name exists, you are
prompted to rename it or it is ignored by the system.

UNDELETE can be used in both DOS and OS/2 sessions.  Files that are available
for recovery are reported as used bytes on the disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> UNDELETE Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To list deleted files that are available to be recovered without recovering the
files, type the following:

UNDELETE /L

To recover all deleted files if they are still present without prompting for
confirmation on each file, type the following:

UNDELETE /A

To recover all files in the specified directory and all subdirectories, type
the following:

UNDELETE /S

To remove files so they cannot be recovered, type the following:

UNDELETE /F


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.135. UNPACK - Decompress a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Unpacks (decompresses) compressed files and copies files that are not
compressed but are located on the OS/2 installation diskettes.  Compressed
files have a @ as the last character in their file name.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ UNPACK ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ          ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇ /V ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ /F ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ /N:filename ΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ UNPACK ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ          ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                        ΓööΓöÇ /SHOW ΓöÇΓöÿ

Do not specify an output file name; UNPACK uses the file name from the original
uncompressed file as the destination file name.  It also preserves the date,
time, and file attribute of the original uncompressed file.

UNPACK copies files that are not compressed and handles file information such
as date, time, and file attributes in the same way the COPY command does.
Therefore, you can unpack a diskette that contains a combination of compressed
and uncompressed files.

Return Codes:

0 - Normal completion
1 - No files were found to unpack or copy
2 - Some files or directories were not unpacked or copied due to file errors
3 - Ended by user
4 - Ended due to error


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> UNPACK Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To unpack a compressed file named FORMAT.CO@ from the current directory on
drive A to the OS2 directory on drive C, enter the following:

UNPACK A:FORMAT.CO@ C:\OS2

To unpack a compressed file named FORMAT.CO@ from the current drive and
directory to the OS2 subdirectory on drive C, enter the following:

UNPACK FORMAT.CO@ C:\OS2

To verify the compressed files on drive A are correctly copied to drive C,
enter the following:

UNPACK A:\*.* C:\ /V

To specify that extended attributes should not be discarded when unpacking or
copying files from drive A to drive C (when drive C does not support extended
attributes because of its file system), enter the following:

UNPACK A:\*.* C:\ /F

To display the destination path and file name for every compressed file in the
packed file, BUNDLE.DA@, enter the following:

UNPACK BUNDLE.DA@ /SHOW

To specify the file, FORMAT.CO@, to be extracted and decompressed from a packed
file, BUNDLE.DA@, containing multiple compressed files, enter the following:

UNPACK BUNDLE.DA@ /N:FORMAT.COM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.136. VER - Display OS/2 Version Number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays the OS/2 version number.

VER ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ

This command can be entered at either the OS/2 or DOS prompt.  The OS/2 version
number is displayed on your screen; for example:

The Operating System/2 Version is 2.10


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VER Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the OS/2 version number, enter the following:

VER

The version number for the OS/2 operating system is displayed on your screen as
follows:

The Operating System/2 Version is 2.10


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.137. VERIFY - Set Data Verification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Confirms that data written to a disk has been written correctly.

VERIFY ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                       Γö£ΓöÇ ON  ΓöÇΓöñ
                       ΓööΓöÇ OFF ΓöÇΓöÿ

Enter this command without a parameter to display the current VERIFY status.

You can use the VERIFY command to tell the system to verify that files are
written correctly to the disk (for example, no bad sectors).  The system does a
VERIFY action each time you write data to a disk.  You receive an error message
only if the system is unable to write the data to the disk successfully.

When you issue VERIFY ON, verification is done for file system I/O write
actions for both hard disks and diskettes on a per session basis.

This command has the same purpose as the /V parameter in the COPY and XCOPY
commands.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VERIFY Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To check the conditional status of VERIFY, enter the following:

VERIFY

To verify that your files are written correctly to the disk, enter the
following:

VERIFY ON

To turn VERIFY off, enter the following:

VERIFY OFF

The default is off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.138. VIEW - Display Online Documents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays online documents created with the Information Presentation Facility
(IPF) compiler.  VIEW displays IPF files that have a .INF extension.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ VIEW ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ              ΓööΓöÇ topic ΓöÇΓöÿ

VIEW displays files that have been compiled by the IPF compiler as online
documents having a .INF extension.  VIEW can display the entire file or
individual topics that are located in the Contents of the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIEW Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the CMDREF.INF file that is located in the OS2\BOOK directory on
drive C, enter the following:

VIEW C:\OS2\BOOK\CMDREF

To display the Functions topic in the REXX.INF file that is located in the
OS2\BOOK directory on drive C, enter the following:

VIEW C:\OS2\BOOK\REXX FUNCTIONS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.139. VMDISK - Create an Image File of a DOS Startup Diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Creates a file that contains the image of a DOS startup diskette.  After
creating an image, you can create a DOS session by starting from this image
file.

VMDISK ΓöÇΓöÇ sourcedrive ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöñ
                        ΓööΓöÇ targetdrive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands: FSFILTER, FSACCESS

Related Information: Starting a Specific Version of DOS

To use VMDISK, you need to make changes to the DOS startup diskette.  Select
Starting a Specific Version of DOS in the "Related Information" section above
for more information about preparing the DOS startup diskette.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VMDISK Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Here are some examples of creating an image file of a DOS startup diskette.
These examples assume the diskette is inserted in drive A.

To place the image file in the current directory, type the following:

VMDISK A: DOS50.IMG

Note:   The free disk space on the current drive must be greater than the total
        capacity of the diskette in drive A.

To place the image file in the root directory of drive C, type the following:

VMDISK A: C:\DOS33.IMG

To place the image file in an image file directory on drive D, type the
following:

VMDISK A: D:OS_IMAGE\DOS33.IMG


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Starting a Specific Version of DOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Creating a DOS Startup Diskette

Follow these steps to create a DOS startup diskette:

 1. Restart the system with a prior DOS version.

 2. Format a diskette with the /S option.

 3. Copy the DOS version of these files from the hard disk to the diskette:

   o CONFIG.SYS
   o AUTOEXEC.BAT
   o OS2\MDOS\FSFILTER.SYS

 4. Edit the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files that were created on the
    diskette, following the instructions in the "Modifying the DOS Startup
    Diskette" section below.

 5. Ensure that all programs and device drivers in the CONFIG.SYS and
    AUTOEXEC.BAT files have full drive and path extensions.  The specific
    version of DOS will always start from drive A, and DOS will not search
    drive C for programs or utilities unless the full drive and path is
    specified.

 6. Restart the workstation with the OS/2* operating system.  Use the DOS
    Settings notebook to select the DOS startup drive setting.  Set its value
    to A: and save this change.  You can now use this entry to start the
    specific DOS version diskette from drive A.

Once you verify that the startup diskette is operating properly, you can create
an image file of that diskette on your hard disk using the VMDISK utility.

To start a specific version of DOS, you must make changes to the CONFIG.SYS
file on the disk or diskette from which DOS will be started.  These changes are
needed because a specific version of DOS cannot use the OS/2 file system
without making these updates.  The FSFILTER device driver provides access
between the DOS and OS/2 file systems.

Modifying the DOS Startup Diskette

You must modify the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files on the diskette that will
be started.  You need to edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the DOS startup diskette
by doing the following:

 1. Insert the line DEVICE=FSFILTER.SYS before any other DEVICE= statement in
    the CONFIG.SYS file.  Make sure to copy the file FSFILTER.SYS from
    OS2\MDOS\FSFILTER.SYS to the startup diskette.

 2. If any XMS (HIMEM.SYS) or EMS (EMM386.SYS) device driver statements are in
    the CONFIG.SYS file, replace them with these statements (assuming the OS/2
    operating system is installed on drive C):

        DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\HIMEM.SYS
        DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\EMM386.SYS

 3. Delete any DEVICE= statement that is loading mouse support.  Mouse support
    will be provided by a driver that is loaded when the AUTOEXEC.BAT is
    processed.

 4. Make sure that any other utilities or programs that are referenced have a
    drive and path extension.

Make these changes to the AUTOEXEC.BAT file on the startup diskette:

 1. If mouse support is needed, add this line to the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.

        C:\OS2\MDOS\MOUSE

    This example assumes that the OS/2 operating system is installed on drive
    C.

 2. Make sure that any other utilities or programs that are referenced have a
    drive and path extension.

Information about FSACCESS and FSFILTER

The FSFILTER device driver provides access between the DOS and OS/2 file
systems. The initial mapping of drives is done automatically.  After the filter
is running, the FSACCESS utility can be called to change the drive mappings for
that specific DOS session.  Initial drive mappings are determined in the
following ways when the filter is started:

o Drive A is mapped to DOS only when started from an image file; otherwise,
  drive A is mapped to the OS/2 operating system.
o Drive B is mapped to the OS/2 operating system.
o When FSFILTER is started, all OS/2 defined physical volumes are counted.  DOS
  drive letters for these OS/2 drives are allocated in the DOS startup session
  and are then mapped to the corresponding OS/2 drives.

When a DOS program makes a file-system request, FSFILTER determines what drive
is referenced.  If the drive is mapped, the request is sent to the OS/2 file
system.  If the drive is not mapped, the request is sent to DOS if DOS
recognizes the drive; otherwise it is sent to the OS/2 operating system.

Differences in DOS Environments

There are some differences among the various DOS environments.  These
environments include DOS, DOS sessions in the OS/2 operating system, and
specific versions of DOS started from diskette. As noted earlier, when you are
starting a specific version of DOS from diskette, DOS mouse, XMS, or EMS driver
support must be replaced with the OS/2 version of the driver, supplied in the
OS2\MDOS directory.

Some of the DOS properties are not processed in a DOS session started from the
specific version of DOS.  The ignored DOS properties are those that configure
parameters that are controlled by the CONFIG.SYS file on the DOS startup
diskette.  These ignored properties include:

o BREAK
o DOS Device Drivers
o DOS Memory Size (KB)
o DOS Shell
o LASTDRIVE
o Simulated DOS Version

Other differences include:

o FCB values are restricted to the minimum of the two values in the DOS and
  OS/2 configuration files.
o The EXIT command does not work when issued from the top level prompt in a DOS
  session started from a specific version of DOS.  You need to use the EXIT_VDM
  command to successfully exit from a DOS session started from a specific
  version of DOS.
o There is generally less memory available in a DOS session started from a
  specific version of DOS.
o A DOS session started from a specific version of DOS will not support
  extended attributes on logical drives managed by the file system of that
  specific version of DOS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.140. VOL - Display Disk Volume Label ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays the disk volume label and serial number if they exist. From a DOS
command prompt, VOL displays the label for only one disk.  From an OS/2 command
prompt, if you specify more than one drive, VOL displays the volume labels
consecutively.

VOL ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ          Γöé
              ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Related Commands:  FORMAT and LABEL

Enter this command without a parameter to display the volume label and volume
serial number of the current drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VOL Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the volume label and volume serial number of the current drive,
enter the following:

VOL

To display the volume labels of both drive C and drive D, enter the following:

VOL C: D:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.141. XCOPY - Copy Subdirectories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selectively copies groups of files, which can include lower-level
subdirectories.

ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ XCOPY ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
  ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ               ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ

ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
  ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ   ΓööΓöÇ drive ΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇ path ΓöÇΓöÿ
              ΓööΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÿ

                    ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                                              Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ filename ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ  /D:mm-dd-yy  ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /S ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /E ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /P ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /V ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /A ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γöé    ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /M ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ    Γöé
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /H ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /T ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /R ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /O ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ /F ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


Related Commands:  BACKUP, COPY, RESTORE, and VERIFY

It is important to remember the following:

o Specify the drive, path, and file name for the source and target drives.  If
  you do not specify a path, XCOPY starts from the current directory.  If you
  do not specify a file name, XCOPY uses *.* as the default value.

o XCOPY works only within the source directory unless you specify the /S
  parameter, which copies files in the source directory and in all directories
  below the starting source directory.

o If you use the /D parameter, the month, date, and year may be in different
  positions depending on your country.

o The /M parameter copies files whose archive bit is set, and then turns off
  the archive bit of the source file.  You can use the ATTRIB command to reset
  the archive bit for your files.

o If the specified target path does not exist on the target, XCOPY creates the
  directories before copying.  You can rename files on the target by specifying
  a new file name on the target.

Extended Attributes:  XCOPY will copy the extended attributes of a source file
to the target file as indicated by the parameters in the syntax diagram.  An
extended attribute is a special area used for storing data that describes the
file to the OS/2 operating system or to an application.

When copying files that have extended attributes, be sure to use OS/2 2.1 to
ensure all extended file or directory attributes are copied.  Extended
attributes associated with a source directory will be copied to the target if
the directory does not already exist on the target.

Return Codes:

0 - Normal completion
1 - No files were found to xcopy
2 - Some files or directories were not copied due to file or directory errors
3 - Ended by user
4 - Ended due to error


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> XCOPY Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy the files in the MEMOS subdirectory on drive C to a newly created
subdirectory named LETTERS on drive A, enter the following:

XCOPY C:\MEMOS A:\LETTERS

To copy files changed on or after November 12, 1988 in the MEMOS subdirectory
to the root directory on drive A, enter the following:

XCOPY C:\MEMOS A:\ /D:11-12-88

To copy the subdirectories and their contents from the root directory on drive
C to the root directory on drive A, enter the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /S

To copy the REPORTS subdirectory on drive C, including all files and
subdirectories within it, to the root directory on drive A, enter the
following:

XCOPY C:\REPORTS A:\ /S /E

To be prompted with (Y/N?) before each file is copied from the MEMOS
subdirectory on drive C to the LETTERS subdirectory on drive A, enter the
following:

XCOPY C:\MEMOS A:\LETTERS /P

To verify that the files written from drive C to drive A are recorded properly,
enter the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /V

To copy only those files that have the archive bit set on without changing the
attribute of source drive C when it is copied, type the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /A

To copy files whose archive bit is set on from the root directory on drive C to
the root directory on drive A, then turn the archive bit of the source file
off, enter the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /M

To copy all files, including all hidden files, from the root directory on drive
C to the root directory on drive A, type the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /H

To copy all files, including all files with a system attribute, from the root
directory on drive C to the root directory on drive A, type the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /T

To copy all files from the root directory on drive C to the root directory on
drive A and have all files with a read-only attribute retain this attribute,
type the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /R

To copy all files from the root directory on drive C to the root directory on
drive A and specify that any file with a read-only, system, or hidden attribute
can be overlaid, type the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /O


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Trace Point Overview and Dynamic Tracing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 2.1 operating system contains a mixture of static trace points and
dynamic trace points.

Static trace points are implemented as trace function calls within individual
software modules.  The TRACE command can be used to turn on and off static
trace points by specifying them by major code (and, optionally, minor code).

Dynamic trace points are implemented as Trace Definition File (TDF) entries.
The TRACE command can be used to insert (and turn on) a dynamic trace point by
patching it into its corresponding software module.  Dynamic trace points are
specified by the dynamic library (DLL) prefix (and, optionally minor code).

Individual dynamic trace points can be qualified by separate type and group
qualifiers.  These qualifiers exist so that you can more easily turn on and off
sets of related dynamic trace points.  For example, all the dynamic trace
points that are associated with pre-invocation events might have a type of PRE.
Similarly, all the dynamic trace points that are involved in semaphore
processing might have a group of SEM.  In the TRACE command syntax, group is
considered to have a stronger binding than type.  This means that you can ask
to turn on or off all events that are of a specified group that are also of one
or more specified types.  You do not need to use these qualifiers; they are
there simply to make it easier to control related sets of dynamic trace points.

TDF files are typically found in the \OS2\SYSTEM\TRACE directory. They are
identified by .TDF file name extensions.  There are also Trace Formatting Files
(TFF) found within that directory.  These files are used by the OS/2 2.1 Trace
Formatter (TRACEFMT) utility to format the entries that are logged within the
system trace buffer.

The system .TDF file supports dynamic tracing for the following:

o TRACE ON KERNEL

       Major Code: 5 (decimal) 5 (hex)
       Groups: FS, LDR, NLS, PIP, SEL, SEM, SIG, TIM, TIK, VM
       Types: PRE, POST, API, INT
       Purpose: Dynamic trace point definitions for APIs that reside in
            the OS/2 kernel

o TRACE ON DOSCALL1

       Major Code: 16 (decimal) 10 (hex)
       Groups: FS, LDR, LNK, MSG, MSP, NLS, SEM, TSK
       Types: PRE, POST, API
       Purpose: Dynamic trace point definitions for APIs that reside in
         DOSCALL1.DLL

o TRACE ON QUECALLS

       Major Code: 22 (decimal) 16 (hex)
       Groups: None
       Types: API, PRE, POST, INT
       Purpose: Dynamic trace point definitions for APIs that reside in
             QUECALLS.DLL (queue calls)

o TRACE ON SESMGR

       Major Code: 23 (decimal) 17 (hex)
       Groups: None
       Types: API, PRE, POST
       Purpose: Dynamic trace point definitions for APIs that reside in
             SESMGR.DLL (session manager)

o TRACE ON OS2CHAR

       Major Code: 24 (decimal) 18 (hex)
       Groups: KBD, MOU, VIO
       Types: API, PRE, POST
       Purpose: Dynamic trace point definitions for APIs that reside in
             OS2CHAR.DLL

o TRACE ON PMSHAPI

       Major Code: 192 (decimal) C0 (hex)
       Groups: None
       Types: None
       Purpose: Dynamic trace point definitions for APIs that reside in
             PMSHAPI.DLL (PM shell APIs)

o TRACE ON PMWIN

       Major Code: 194 (decimal) C2 (hex)
       Groups: None
       Types: None
       Purpose: Dynamic trace point definitions for APIs that reside in
             PMWIN.DLL (window manager)

o TRACE ON PMGRE

       Major Code: 195 (decimal) C3 (hex)
       Groups: None
       Types: None
       Purpose: Dynamic trace point definitions for APIs that reside in
             PMGRE.DLL (graphics engine)

o TRACE ON PMPIC

       Major Code: 196 (decimal) C4 (hex)
       Groups: None
       Types: None
       Purpose: Dynamic trace point definitions for APIs that reside in
             PMPIC.DLL (picture interchange)

o TRACE ON PMGPI

       Major Code: 197 (decimal) C5 (hex)
       Groups: None
       Types: None
       Purpose: Dynamic trace point definitions for APIs that reside in
             PMGPI.DLL (graphics program interface)

OS/2 2.1 Static Trace Points

The OS/2 static trace points do not have associated TDF files, but do have
associated TFF files that are used by the Trace Formatter (TRACEFMT).

o Machine Exceptions

       Major Code: 3

o Hardware Interrupts

       Major Code: 4

o Device Helper Routines

       Major Code: 6

o Disk Device Driver

       Major Code: 7

Commonly Used Abbreviations for Groups and Types

o Groups

       FS-  file system
       KBD- keyboard I/O
       LDR- resource loader
       LNK- environment management
       MOU- mouse I/O
       MSG- message management
       MSP- virtual memory management
       NLS- national language support
       PIP- pipe support
       SEL- selector-related
       SEM- semaphore support
       SIG- signal handling
       TIM- timer support
       TK-  task management
       TSK- monitor support
       VIO- video I/O
       VM-  virtual memory management

o Types

       API-  application programming interface
       INT-  internal
       PRE-  pre-processing invocation
       POST- post-processing invocation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Trace Point Overview Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACE ON 15,31,22 /S

      Indicates that all static trace points with major codes of
      15, 31 and 22 are to be traced, and then suspends all
      event tracing.

TRACE ON 17,22(4,9-13)

      Indicates that all static trace points with a major code of
      17, and all static trace points with a major code of 22
      and minor codes of 4, or 9 to 13, are to be
      traced.


TRACE ON DOSCALL1

      Inserts all dynamic trace points that are defined in
      DOSCALL1.TDF.


TRACE ON DOSCALL1(4,23-56,8) /R

      Inserts all dynamic trace points from DOSCALL1.TDF that have
      minor codes of 4, 8, or 23 to 56, and then resumes all
      event tracing.


TRACE ON DOSCALL1(FS=PRE+API,SEM)

      Inserts all dynamic trace points from DOSCALL1.TDF that are
      of group FS and of either type PRE or API, or
      are simply of group SEM.


TRACE ON KERNEL(20-23,182)

      Inserts all dynamic trace points into the OS/2 kernel that
      have minor codes between 20 and 23, or have a minor code
      of 182.


TRACE ON /P:16,14,8

      Indicates that events are to be traced only when pid 8,
      14, or 16 is the current pid
      (the set of events that are to be traced
      is set through other TRACE commands).


TRACE OFF /P:14

      Indicates that events are no longer to be traced when pid
      14 is the current pid.


TRACE ON /P:ALL

      Indicates that event tracing is now performed irrespective
      of the current pid.


TRACE /C /R

      Indicates that the system event trace buffer is to be
      cleared and then event tracing is to be resumed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you place a bookmark on a topic, it is added to a list of bookmarks you
have previously set.  You can view the list, and you can remove one or all
bookmarks from the list.  If you have not set any bookmarks, the list is empty.

To set a bookmark, do the following:

 1. Select a topic from the Contents.

 2. When that topic appears, choose the Bookmark option from the Services menu.

 3. If you want to change the name used for the bookmark, type the new name in
    the field.

 4. Select the Place radio button.

 5. Select OK.  The bookmark is then added to the bookmark list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can specify a word or phrase to be searched.  You can also limit the search
to a set of topics by first marking the topics on the Contents list.

To search for a word or phrase in all topics, do the following:

 1. Select the Search option from the Services menu.

 2. Type the word or words to be searched.

 3. Select All sections.

 4. Select Search to begin the search.

 5. The list of topics where the word or phrase appears is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can print one or more topics.  You can also print a set of topics by first
marking the topics on the Contents list.

To print the document Contents list, do the following:

 1. Select Print from the Services menu.

 2. Select Contents.

 3. Select Print.

 4. The Contents list is printed on your printer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can copy a topic you are viewing into a temporary file named TEXT.TMP.  You
can later edit that file by using an editor such as the System Editor.

To copy a topic, do the following:

 1. Expand the Contents list and select a topic.

 2. When the topic appears, select Copy to file from the Services menu.

The system copies the text pertaining to that topic into the temporary TEXT.TMP
file.

For information on any of the other choices in the Services menu, highlight the
choice and press the F1 key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can control the appearance of the Contents list.

To expand the Contents and show all levels for all topics, select Expand all
from the Options menu.

For information on any of the other choices in the Options menu, highlight the
choice and press the F1 key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The multitasking OS/2 environment allows you to run several programs at the
same time.  This gives each program the potential of taking advantage of the
available physical memory in the system.  The OS/2 environment allows you to
achieve a high level of interaction with an OS/2 program.  It permits you to
run some programs in interactive windows on your screen.  At the same time, you
can run other programs in the background, away from view.  Your operating
system also protects each program so that it cannot change another program that
is running at the same time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When using the OS/2 operating system, you may choose to use the DOS environment
similar to IBM Disk Operating System Version 5.0. Like most programs that run
in an OS/2 session, a program running in a DOS session can run in a window.
You can run several DOS programs at the same time with several active OS/2
programs. You can continue using DOS programs with your new operating system.
A DOS session can run in either a full screen or a window.  It runs
continuously even when you may be running in another DOS session or in an OS/2
session.  The only time a DOS session is frozen is if it is running graphics.
A text program will continue running even when it is running in a background
environment.

You can start DOS tasks or begin a DOS program almost as though you were using
DOS 5.0.  However, not all programs originally written for a personal computer
work properly in the DOS environment (for example, timing- and
network-dependent programs).  Refer to documentation that came with the program
you are using for program limitations and answers to compatibility questions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A keyword has a predefined value.  It appears in uppercase letters and must be
typed exactly as shown.  A command name is a keyword.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Variables represent names or values you supply.  They are shown in lowercase
letters.  A file name is a variable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Your technical coordinator, whose role includes investigating hardware and
software problems, is the first level of customer assistance.  This person, who
could be either an IBM authorized dealer or the person assigned to be the
coordinator for your particular organization, can contact IBM, if necessary.
Please do not provide a dump or any other materials unless directed to do so by
your technical coordinator or service representative.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A batch file is a file containing one or more commands that the operating
system starts one at a time. Batch files can be created for both DOS and OS/2
sessions.  When you run a batch file, the OS/2 command processor processes the
commands in the batch file, one at a time.  If you have a repetitive process
that requires you to enter a series of commands at the command prompt, creating
a batch file that contains these commands shortens process time and reduces the
possibility of typing errors.  All batch files intended for use in DOS sessions
have a .BAT file name extension; batch files intended for use in OS/2 sessions
have a .CMD file-name extension.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A return code is a value returned to a program or batch file to indicate the
results of an operation.  The valid return codes are:

0 - Normal completion
1 - No files were found to be processed
2 - Some files or directories were not processed due to file errors
3 - Ended by user (Ctrl+Break)
4 - Ended due to error
5 - (Specific error defined by the command or utility)
6 - (Specific error defined by the command or utility)
7 - (Specific error defined by the command or utility)

Most commands issue a return code of 0 for normal completion, or display an
error message for unsuccessful completion.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ANSI Command:  ON and OFF Parameters

Specify ON to allow extended display and keyboard support.  Specify OFF to
prevent this support. The default value is ON.

To allow extended display and keyboard support, type the following:

ANSI ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APPEND Command:  /E Parameter

Keeps the APPEND paths in the DOS environment. (This is similar to the DOS PATH
command.) APPEND searches the environment on each call to find the path. Use
the /E parameter to permit application programs to query the environment and,
depending on what they find, to change the actions they take. However, if you
want to ensure that all processes are affected by changes to the APPEND path
string, do not use the /E parameter.

For example, if you want to query the environment for paths to data files and
find any files that have paths in the WORDPROC or CALC subdirectories on drive
C, type the following:

PATH C:\WORDPROC;C:\CALC;
APPEND /E
APPEND C:\WORDPROC;C:\CALC;

If you want to find any files that have paths in the WORDPROC or CALC
subdirectories on drive C but do not want to query the environment for paths to
data files, type the following:

PATH C:\WORDPROC;C:\CALC;
APPEND C:\WORDPROC;C:\CALC;


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APPEND Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drives and directories to be searched.

If you want to access files in the EDITOR directory when you are in another
directory, type the following:

APPEND = C:\OS2;C:\OS2\SYSTEM;
C:\EDITOR;


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

APPEND Command:  /PATH:ON and /PATH:OFF Parameters

Specify /PATH:ON to allow APPEND to search for a file even when the specified
file name includes a drive or path or both.  Specify /PATH:OFF to allow APPEND
to search for a file when you type only a file name. If you specify /PATH:OFF
and then type a drive or a path, APPEND does not search for the file.

If you want to search for a file using only a file name, enter the following:

APPEND /PATH:OFF

If you want to view a file, you can enter the following:

TYPE MYFILE
APPEND searches until it finds the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ASSIGN Command: x and y Parameters

The x parameter specifies the drive to which read and write requests are
currently set.  The y parameter specifies the drive to which you want read and
write requests set.  You can use a space between the drive letters instead of
the equals sign.  Do not type a colon after the drive letter.

To assign all requests for drive A to drive C, enter the following:

ASSIGN A=C or ASSIGN A C

To assign all requests for drives A and B to drive C, enter the following:

ASSIGN A=C B=C


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ATTRIB Command:  +R and -R Parameters

Specify +R to turn on the read-only attribute of a file. Specify -R to turn it
off.

To turn on the read-only attribute of a file named LETTER.TXT, type the
following:

ATTRIB +R LETTER.TXT

To remove the read-only attribute from a file named LETTER.TXT, type the
following:

ATTRIB -R LETTER.TXT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ATTRIB Command:  +A and -A Parameters

Specify +A to turn on the archive bit of a file. Specify -A to turn it off.

To turn on the archive bit of a file named LETTER.TXT, type the following:

ATTRIB +A LETTER.TXT

To turn off the archive bit and turn on the read-only attribute of a file named
LETTER.TXT, type the following.

ATTRIB -A +R LETTER.TXT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ATTRIB Command:  +S and -S Parameters

Specify +S to set a file as a system file.  Specify -S to turn off the system
file attribute.

To set the file, LETTER.TXT, as a system file, type the following:

ATTRIB +S LETTER.TXT

To clear the file, LETTER.TXT, as a system file, type the following:

ATTRIB -S LETTER.TXT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ATTRIB Command:  +H and -H Parameters

Specify +H to set a file as a hidden file.  Specify -H to turn off the hidden
file attribute.

To set the file, LETTER.TXT, as a hidden file, type the following:

ATTRIB +H LETTER.TXT

To clear the file, LETTER.TXT, as a hidden file, type the following:

ATTRIB -H LETTER.TXT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ATTRIB Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the drive, directory, and file name. You do not need to specify the
drive and directory when changing the status of a file in your current
directory.

To turn off the archive bit of the LETTER.TXT file in the REPORTS directory on
drive D, type the following:

ATTRIB -A D:\REPORTS\LETTER.TXT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ATTRIB Command:  /S Parameter

Specify the /S parameter to process all subdirectories.

To display the current settings of the archive and read-only bits for all the
files on drive C, type the following:

ATTRIB C:\*.* /S

To find all occurrences of a file named LETTER.TXT on drive C, type the
following:

ATTRIB C:\LETTER.TXT /S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AUTOFAIL Command:  YES and NO Parameters

Specify NO to cause a window to appear that informs you of an error condition.
Specify YES to have an error code appear instead. The default is NO.

To cause an error code to appear, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

AUTOFAIL=YES


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BACKUP Command:  Source Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the drive, directory, and names of the files to be backed up. You
need to specify a path when backing up files in another directory.

To back up a file named FRIDAY.RPT from the REPORTS directory to drive A, enter
the following:

BACKUP C:\REPORTS\FRIDAY.RPT A:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BACKUP Command:  Target Drive Parameter

Specifies the destination drive for the backed-up files.

To back up all files on drive C to drive A, enter the following:

BACKUP C: A:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BACKUP Command:  /L:filename Parameter

Makes a backup log entry in the file specified. If no file name is given, the
file BACKUP.LOG is placed in the root directory of the source drive.

To back up files from the current directory on drive C to drive A and to create
a log file named BACKUP.LOG, enter the following:

BACKUP C: A: /L

The first line of the entry in the file contains date and time representing the
backup dates and times.  Each subsequent line in the entry corresponds to one
of the files that was backed up.

These lines consist of the file name and the number of the diskette that
contains the file. This information can be used when you need to restore a
particular file from a diskette. You must specify the diskette so that RESTORE
does not have to search for files. If the backup log file already exists, the
current entry is appended to the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BACKUP Command:  /D:mm-dd-yy Parameter

Backs up only those files that were last modified on or after the specified
date.  This parameter expects the date to be entered in the correct format for
the current country specified with the COUNTRY command.

To back up files changed on or after June 15, 1990 from the current directory
on drive C to drive A, enter the following:

BACKUP C: A: /D:06-15-90


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BACKUP Command:  /T:hh:mm:ss  Parameter

Backs up only those files that were last modified at or after a certain time.
It is recommended that /T be used with /D.

To back up files changed on or after 11:45 a.m. from the current directory on
drive C to drive A, enter the following:

BACKUP C: A: /T:11:45:00


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BACKUP Command:  /M Parameter

Backs up only those files that have changed since the last backup.

To back up files in the current directory on drive C that were changed since
the last backup to drive A, enter the following:

BACKUP C: A: /M


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BACKUP Command:  /A Parameter

Adds the files to be backed up to those already on the backup disk.  When you
use this parameter, the old files on the backup disk are not erased. This
parameter is not valid if files exist on the backup disk that were backed up by
DOS Version 3.20 BACKUP or earlier.

To add the files on drive B to the backed-up files already on the diskette in
drive A, enter the following:

BACKUP B: A: /A


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BACKUP Command:  /F:xxx Parameter

Specifies that unformatted target diskettes are formatted before BACKUP starts.
This parameter does not format a hard disk or previously formatted diskette.
If an unformatted diskette is encountered, BACKUP formats it as needed.  You
can specify one of the following sizes for the diskette:

o 360 for 360KB diskettes
o 720 for 720KB diskettes
o 1200 for 1.2MB diskettes
o 1440 for 1.4MB diskettes
o 2880 for 2.88MB diskettes

To back up all files from the root directory on drive C to drive A and to
format any diskettes to 1.2MB, enter the following:

BACKUP C: A: /F:1200


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BACKUP Command:  /S Parameter

Backs up subdirectories.

To back up the contents of drive C, including all files and subdirectories
within it, to multiple diskettes on drive A, enter the following:

BACKUP C:\*.* A: /S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BASEDEV Command:  Filename Parameter

Specifies the complete name of the file, including its extension, that contains
the base device driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BASEDEV Command:  Arguments Parameter

Specifies the parameters of the specified base device driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BOOT Command:  /OS2 Parameter

Prepares your system to start the OS/2 operating system from drive C.

To start the OS/2 operating system, do the following:

 1. Enter BOOT /OS2 and press Enter.

 2. Respond to the prompt that appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BOOT Command:  /DOS Parameter

Prepares your system to start DOS from drive C.

To start DOS, do the following:

 1. Enter BOOT /DOS and press Enter.

 2. Respond to the prompt that appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BREAK Command:  ON and OFF Parameters

Specify ON to check to see if you pressed the Ctrl and Break keys together. In
OS/2 sessions, the check for Ctrl+Break is always set to ON, and you cannot
change it. Specify OFF to have DOS check whether the Ctrl and Break keys were
pressed only during:

o Standard output operations
o Standard input operations
o Standard print operations
o Standard auxiliary operations

The default is OFF.

To check whether Ctrl+Break has been pressed only when output is written to
your screen or printer, or when input is read from your keyboard, type the
following in your CONFIG.SYS file:

BREAK=OFF

To have the system check for Ctrl+Break when you request it, type the following
in your CONFIG.SYS file:

BREAK=ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BUFFERS Command:  x Parameter

Specifies the number of disk buffers the system allocates in memory when it
starts.  Type a number from 1 through 100.  Values greater than 100 are
ignored.  The default is 30.

To assign the number of buffers to 15, type the following in your CONFIG.SYS
file:

BUFFERS=15


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

External Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and location for the command you want to process. External
commands are stored on the disk as program files.  When an external command is
entered, the system searches for it in the current directory of the default or
specified drive. If the command is not found, the system continues searching
for it in the directories listed in the PATH statement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CACHE Command:  /LAZY Parameter

Specifies whether the contents of cache memory are written immediately to disk
or only during disk idle time.  This command pertains only to disks formatted
for the High Performance File System. ON enables writing of cache memory during
disk idle time. OFF specifies immediate writing to disk. This parameter must
not be mixed with other parameters.  It must be entered without other
parameters at a command prompt.  The default state is for lazy-writing to be
ON.  If you want lazy-writing to be OFF as the default, you must add the
following statement to your STARTUP.CMD file:

C:\OS2\CACHE.EXE /LAZY:OFF

To have data in cache memory immediately written to disk, enter the following
at an OS/2 command prompt:

CACHE /LAZY:OFF

Note:   If you turn lazy-writing off by entering the /LAZY:OFF parameter at a
        command prompt and later in the same session want to turn lazy-writing
        back on, enter the DETACH command before CACHE to retain use of the
        same command prompt session.

                DETACH CACHE /LAZY:ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CACHE Command:  /MAXAGE Parameter

Specifies the maximum amount of time (in milliseconds) before data is
transferred to another section of cache memory.  That section contains data and
programs that have not recently been used. The default value is 5000.

To have data that has been in cache memory longer than 4000 milliseconds
written to disk, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

RUN=C:\OS2\CACHE.EXE /MAXAGE:4000


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CACHE Command:  /DISKIDLE Parameter

Sets the amount of time (in milliseconds) that a disk must be idle before it
can accept data from cache memory.  The default value is 1000.  The The minimum
amount of disk idle time must be greater than the value specified in the
BUFFERIDLE parameter.

To set the amount of disk idle time to 2000 milliseconds, type the following in
the CONFIG.SYS file:

RUN=C:\OS2\CACHE.EXE /DISKIDLE:2000


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CACHE Command:  /BUFFERIDLE Parameter

Sets the amount of time (in milliseconds) that the cache buffer can be idle
before the data it contains must be written to a disk. The default value is
500.

To set the amount of cache buffer idle time to 1000 milliseconds, type the
following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

RUN=C:\OS2\CACHE.EXE /BUFFERIDLE:1000


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CALL Command:  Batchfile Parameter

Specifies the name of the batch file to begin running.

For example, to call two files named ACCOUNT.BAT and BILL.BAT, type the
following in your batch file:

CALL ACCOUNT
CALL BILL


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CALL Command:  Argument Parameter

Specifies information passed to the called batch file.

For example, if you want to pass the second and third parameters, along with
the value of FILE, to the batch file named MARKET, type the following in your
batch file:

SET FILE=NEW.TXT
CALL MARKET %2 %3 %FILE%


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CHCP Command:  nnn Parameter

Indicates the code page number you want to use.

If you want to change to the Multilingual code page (850) and your system has
been set up to use code pages 437 and 850, enter the following:

CHCP 850


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CD Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the location of the directory you want to change to.

You can:

o Change from one directory to another on the current drive
o Change to a subdirectory within the current directory
o Change back to the root directory
o Change to the parent directory from any subdirectory

To change from the current directory to a directory named REPORTS on the
current drive, enter the following:

CD \REPORTS

To change to the MONTHLY subdirectory, which is within the REPORTS\ANNUAL
current directory, enter the following:

CD MONTHLY

To change back to the root directory, enter:

CD \

To change to the ANNUAL directory from the REPORTS\ANNUAL\MONTHLY subdirectory,
enter the following:

CD ..


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CHKDSK Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the file or files that are to be analyzed.

Note:   You cannot specify a file on a disk formatted with the High Performance
        File System (HPFS).

To analyze a file named REPORTS.ABC, enter the following:

CHKDSK REPORTS.ABC

You can also use global file-name characters .  For example, to display the
status of all files that begin with "REPORT" and contain other characters,
enter the following:

CHKDSK REPORT*.*


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CHKDSK Command:  /F Parameter

Fixes errors found on a disk or directory.  When you use this parameter, no
activity can occur on the disk.  Therefore, the drive to be fixed cannot be the
one from which you start the operating system, nor can it be the one that
contains the CHKDSK program.

To fix errors that are found in the file allocation table or directory, enter
the following:

CHKDSK /F


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CHKDSK Command:  /V Parameter

Displays all files and their paths on the default or specified drive.

To display all files and directories on the current drive, enter the following:

CHKDSK /V


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CHKDSK Command:  /C Parameter

Specifies that files will be recovered only if the file system was in an
inconsistent state when the computer was started. A file system could be in an
inconsistent state when files were left open. This can happen when:

o The computer was turned off before all files were closed.

o Electrical power to the computer was interrupted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CHKDSK Command:  /F:n Parameter

Specifies a recovery level n.  If no number is specified, CHKDSK assumes
recovery level 2.

The recovery levels are as follows:

/F:0      Specifies that CHKDSK is to analyze the file system, display
          information about its state, but not perform any repairs.

/F:1      Specifies that CHKDSK is to resolve inconsistent file system
          structures.

/F:2      Specifies that CHKDSK is to resolve inconsistent file system
          structures and also scan disk space that is in use but not referred
          to by the file system. If recognizable file or directory structures
          are found, CHKDSK recovers them.

/F:3      Includes all level 2 recovery and also specifies CHKDSK is to scan
          the entire disk partition for recognizable file system structures.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CMD Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Tells CMD.EXE which drive and path to set the value of the COMSPEC environment
variable to.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CMD Command:  /Q Parameter

Provides a NO ECHO function to start a secondary command processor from an
existing CMD.EXE.  The /Q parameter cannot be used after the /K or /C
parameters. To start a secondary command processor and override the default for
copying the command line to standard output, enter the following:

CMD /Q


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CMD Command:  /S Parameter

Tells the command processor being started not to install a signal handler such
as Ctrl+C.  This means that a Ctrl+C request to end the program will be
ignored.

To tell the command processor being started not to install a signal handler
normally used for Ctrl+C (end a program), type the following:

CMD /S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CMD Command:  /K string Parameter

Passes a string to CMD.EXE but does not automatically return to the previous
command processor after the command is completed. The string is the command you
want to pass.

To start another command processor, process the DIR command on drive A, and
retain the current command processor, type the following:

CMD /K DIR A:

To pass quoted filenames to CMD.EXE, you must include the outer set of
quotation marks.

To have the secondary CMD.EXE run the program, C:\UTIL\WORD PROCESSOR.EXE, that
exists on drive C, which is formatted with the HPFS, and retain the current
command processor, type the following:

CMD /K ""C:\UTIL\WORD PROCESSOR.EXE""

If the program requires arguments, type them as:

CMD /K ""C:\UTIL\WORD PROCESSOR.EXE" ARG1 ARG2"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CMD Command:  /C string Parameter

Passes a command to CMD.EXE and automatically returns to the previous command
processor after the command is completed. The string is the command you want to
pass.

To start another command processor, process the DIR command on drive A, and
automatically return to the previous command processor after DIR is complete,
type the following:

CMD /C DIR A:

To pass quoted filenames to CMD.EXE, you must include the outer set of
quotation marks.

To have the secondary CMD.EXE run the program, C:\UTIL\WORD PROCESSOR.EXE, that
exists on drive C, which is formatted with the HPFS, and return to the previous
command processor, type the following:

CMD /C ""C:\UTIL\WORD PROCESSOR.EXE""

If the program requires arguments, type them as:

CMD /C ""C:\UTIL\WORD PROCESSOR.EXE" ARG1 ARG2"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CODEPAGE Command:  xxx and yyy Parameters.

Specifies the primary code page (xxx) and the secondary code page (yyy).

The OS/2 operating system supports these code pages:

437     U.S.

850     Multilingual

852     Latin 2 (Czechoslovakia, Hungary, Poland, Yugoslavia)

857     Turkish

860     Portuguese

861     Iceland

862     Hebrew-speaking

863     Canada (French-speaking)

864     Arabic-speaking

865     Nordic

938     Republic of China

942     Japanese  SAA*

944     Korean   SAA

948     Republic of China  SAA

Note 1    For the DOS environment, code pages 862 and 864 are supported with a
          country supplement available only in certain countries.
Note 2    Code pages 932, 934, 938, 942, 944, and 948 are supported only with
          the DBCS version of the OS/2 operating system on DBCS hardware.

For example, if you have a U.S. keyboard, a VGA display, and a Proprinter that
support code-page switching, and you want to prepare code pages 437 and 850,
insert the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

CODEPAGE=437,850


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COMMAND Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Sets the value of the COMSPEC environment variable to the drive and path
specified.  The file name and extension cannot be changed when using this
parameter.  For example,

COMMAND D:\XYZ

will load a second copy of the command processor and set the new environment
variable.

COMSPEC=D:\XYZ\COMMAND.COM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COMMAND Command:  /C string Parameter

Passes a command to a secondary command processor and returns to the primary
command processor after the command is completed. The string is a command you
want to pass to the command processor.  The command is interpreted and acted on
as if you had entered it at the DOS command prompt.

For example, if you enter the following and press the Enter key:

COMMAND /C DIR B:

a secondary DOS command processor is loaded, runs the command DIR B:, and exits
to the primary DOS command processor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COMMAND Command: /P Parameter

Causes the DOS command processor that has been started to become permanent in
storage.  If you specify /P, the new command processor does not return to the
previous command processor.  You must restart the OS/2 operating system to
remove the second DOS command processor.

To retain the DOS processor, enter the following:

COMMAND /P


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COMMAND Command:  /E:x Parameter

Specifies a base-10 integer that you can select to set the size of the
environment. This number must be in a range of 160 through 32768. It is rounded
up to the nearest paragraph boundary (to a multiple of 16).

To specify the size of the environment as 16KB, enter the following:

COMMAND /E:16384


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COMMAND Command:  /K string Parameter

Passes a string to COMMAND.COM but does not automatically return to the
previous command processor after the command is completed. The string is the
command you want to pass.

To start another command processor, process the DIR command on drive A, and
retain the new command processor, enter the following:

COMMAND /K DIR A:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COMP Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the drive, directory, and names of the files to be compared.

To compare all files in the NOTE subdirectory on drive C with the files in the
MEMO subdirectory on drive C, enter the following:

COMP C:\NOTE C:\MEMO

To compare a file that is not on the same diskette as the COMP command itself
and be prompted for the file names, enter the following:

COMP

To compare all files on drive A that have a .ABC extension with the files on
drive C that have the same extension, enter the following:

COMP A:*.ABC C:

To compare all files on drive A that have a .ALL extension with the files on
drive B that have the same name but an extension of .BAK, enter the following:

COMP A:*.ALL B:*.BAK


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COPY Command:  /A and B Parameters

Specifies the amount of data to be processed by the COPY command. A /A or /B
parameter applies to the filename specified before it.  It also applies to all
remaining files on the command line unless another /A or /B is indicated.

These parameters have the following meaning when used with a source filename:

/A    Treats the file as an ASCII (text) file.  The file's data is copied up
      to, but not including, the first end-of-file character (Ctrl+Z) found in
      the file.  The rest of the file is not copied.

/B    Treats the file as a binary file and copies the entire file (based on the
      directory file size).

These parameters have the following meaning when used with a target filename:

/A    Adds an end-of-file character (Ctrl+Z) as the last character of the file.

/B    Does not add an end-of-file character (Ctrl+Z) as the last character of
      the file.

You can combine ASCII files with binary files by using both the /A and /B
parameters.  For example, to combine an ASCII file named TUES with a binary
file named WED and create a new file named STATUS, enter the following:

COPY TUES + WED /B STATUS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COPY Command:  /V Parameter

Causes the OS/2 operating system to verify that the sectors written to the
target disk are recorded correctly.

To verify that information is recorded correctly, specify /V at the end of the
command.  For example,

COPY REPORTS.TXT C:\STATUS /V
verifies that the REPORTS.TXT file was copied to the STATUS directory on drive
C.

Although recording errors rarely occur when you run COPY, you might want to use
this parameter to verify that critical data was correctly recorded. This
parameter causes the COPY command to run more slowly because the system must
check each entry recorded on the disk.  The system displays an error message if
a write is not verified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COPY Command:  /F Parameter

Causes the copy operator to fail if the source file contains extended
attributes and the destination file system does not support extended
attributes. If the /F parameter is not specified, the copy will succeed if the
source file contains extended attributes, and the destination file system does
not support them.  The extended attributes are not copied. If the /F parameter
is not specified and the source file contains needed extended attributes, the
copy will fail if the destination file system does not support extended
attributes.  In this instance, a message appears.

Assume you want to copy a file named REPORTS.TXT to the STATUS directory on
drive D.  You also want the copy to fail if drive D does not support extended
attributes.  Type the following:

COPY REPORTS.TXT D:\STATUS /F


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COPY Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the source and target file names.  If the target is a directory (a
path with no filename), this command copies files into that directory without
changing their names. For example, to copy a file named MON from the root
directory on drive C to a directory named REPORTS on drive C, enter the
following:

COPY C:\MON C:\REPORTS

You can use the global characters ? and * in the filename parameter and in the
extension parameters of both the source and target files.

If you specify the source drive and path and omit the source file name, all the
files in the source directory are copied to the target.  In other words, an *.*
is assumed for the filename parameter. For example, to copy all the files in a
directory named STATUS on drive A to the REPORTS directory on drive C, enter
the following:

COPY A:\STATUS\*.* C:\REPORTS

You can also copy files to the same disk.  In this case, you must give the
copies different names unless different directories are specified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COPY Command:  Combine-Files Option

Use the combine mode of copy when you can combine several other copy functions
and there is at least one plus sign, and all of the file-name specifications
have a common name that can be substituted by a global file-name character in
them as follows:

Copy *.BAT + *.CMD *.ALL

Another way of thinking about the append and combine copy modes is that the
append mode produces only one target file. The combine mode combines copy
functions and produces a target file for each common source file found.  This
is what happens if we enter the previous example and there are source files of
A.BAT, B.BAT, C.BAT, A.CMD, B.CMD, and C.CMD. The result is three target files
of A.ALL, B.ALL and C.ALL are created. The A.ALL file contains appended copies
of the files A.BAT and A.CMD, the B.ALL file contains appended copies of the
files B.BAT and B.CMD, and the C.ALL file contains appended copies of the files
C.BAT and C.CMD. The global file-name character (*) found three common file
names to append files to or COPY performed a combined operation of three file
name groups to which it could append files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COPY Command:  Append-Files Option

Use this option when you want to combine files while copying.  That is, you can
copy and combine two or more files into one new file, or add additional files
to the end of the first file.

To combine files, follow COPY with a list of any number of source files, each
separated by a plus (+) sign.  The following example copies and combines the
files MYPROG.XYZ and FILEA.ABC from the current drive and directory and file
FILEB.DEF from drive B and puts them into a new file called BIGFILE.TXT in the
current directory:

COPY MYPROG.XYZ+FILEA.ABC+B:FILEB.DEF BIGFILE.TXT

To add (append) files to an existing file, do not specify a target file name.
The following example adds files named MYPROG.XYZ, FILEA.ABC, and FILEB.DEF to
the MYPROG.XYZ file:

COPY MYPROG.XYZ+FILEA.ABC+FILEB.DEF


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COPY Command:  Change-Date-and-Time Option

To change the date and time of a file to the current date and time without
altering its contents, use a plus sign followed by two commas (+ ,,).

To update the date and time of all files in the current directory to the
current date and time, enter the following:

COPY *.* /B + ,,


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COPY Command:  Device-Name Option

Use this option when you want to refer to a character-device name, such as
COM1, LPT1, PRN, or CON.

To copy a binary file named MYFILE.BIN and send it to your printer (LPT1),
enter the following:

COPY MYFILE.BIN /B LPT1

To copy a file named FRIDAY and send it to your plotter (COM1), type the
following:

COPY FRIDAY COM1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DBCS means a set of characters in which each character is represented by two
bytes.  Languages such as Japanese, Chinese, and Korean, which contain more
characters than can be represented by 256 code points, require double-byte
character sets.  As each character requires two bytes, the entering,
displaying, and printing of DBCS characters requires hardware and software that
can support DBCS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COUNTRY Command:  nnn Parameter

Specifies a three-digit value.  For most countries, this value is the
three-digit international country code for the telephone system.

To set the date and time format for Canada (French), use 002 as the country
code and 863 as the desired code page, and specify COUNTRY.SYS as the file
containing the country information. Type the following in your CONFIG.SYS file.

COUNTRY=002,C:\OS2\SYSTEM\COUNTRY.SYS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COUNTRY Command:  Country File Location

Specifies the drive, directory, and name of the file that contains the country
information used.  Normally, this file specification is
C:\OS2\SYSTEM\COUNTRY.SYS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CREATEDD Command:  Target Drive Parameter

Specifies the diskette drive that contains the diskette to be formatted as a
dump diskette.

To create a dump diskette in drive A, type the following:

CREATEDD A:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DATE Command:  Date Parameters

mm    Specifies the month, which must be entered with the numbers 01 through
      12.

dd    Specifies the day, which must be entered with the numbers 01 through 31.

yy    Specifies the year, which must be entered with the numbers 1980 through
      2079, or the numbers 00 through 99. The 00-79 range represents the years
      2000 through 2079, and the 80-99 range represents the years 1980 through
      1999.

To change the date in the system to May 21 1990 without being prompted by the
system, enter the following:

DATE 05-21-90


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEBUG Command: Drive Path Filename Parameters

Specifies the drive, directory, and name of the file to test.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DETACH Command:  Command Parameter

Specifies any program or OS/2 command (and its options) that does not require
any input from the keyboard or mouse or any output to the display.

To start and detach a batch program named SAMPLE.CMD from its command
processor, enter the following:

DETACH SAMPLE.CMD

To detach the CL command for compiling the TEST.C file and redirect the output
to LPT1, enter the following:

DETACH CL -C TEST.C > LPT1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and directory of the file that contains the device driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Filename Parameter

Specifies the complete name of the file, including its extension, that contains
the device driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Arguments Parameter

Specifies the parameters of the identified device driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameter

Specifies the drive and directory that contain the ANSI.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  /X Parameter

Allows keys with extended key values (keys with hexadecimal 0E0 as a low byte)
to be redefined as distinct keys.  Extended key value reassignments can be set
by following these control sequences:

ESC[#;#;...#p

ESC["string"p

ESC[#"string";#;

#;"string";#;

or any other combination of strings and decimal numbers

The first ASCII code in the control sequence defines which code is being
mapped.  The remaining numbers define the sequence of ASCII codes generated
when this key is intercepted. However, if the first code in the sequence is 0
(NULL), the first and second code make up an extended ASCII redefinition.

To install ANSI.SYS and be able to redefine your extended key values, type the
following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\ANSI.SYS /X


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  /K Parameter

Prevents ANSI.SYS from using extended keyboard functions.  This forces the
system to use the conventional keyboard functions when an enhanced keyboard is
installed.  This option provides compatibility for those applications that do
not recognize the extended keyboard function.

To allow a system with an enhanced keyboard to be functionally compatible with
the conventional keyboard, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\ANSI.SYS /K


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and directory that contain the COM.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  COM.SYS Parameter

Specifies the system file.  COM.SYS is for all personal computer models.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  (n,addr,IRQ,S) Parameter

This is the COM.SYS parameter that supports COM ports that have nonstandard
addresses and interrupt request levels (IRQs).  The parameter values are shown
in the following example:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM.SYS (n,addr,IRQ,S) [(n,addr,IRQ,S)]...

where

C =     Drive on which OS/2 is installed.

n =     COM port number (1, 2, 3, or 4).

addr =  COM port address in hex number (3e8, 2e8, 3320, etc.).

IRQ =   IRQ level in decimal number (from 1 to 15).

S =     Unexpected interrupt handling value.  D is to deinstall the COM.SYS
        device driver if more than 1000 unexpected interrupts occur
        consecutively.  I is to ignore unexpected interrupts. (The default is
        D.)  This value is optional.

For ISA/EISA bus computers, this parameter must be specified to support COM3
and COM4 ports.  The COM.SYS device driver assigns the following to COM1 and
COM2:

Address of COM1 is 3f8 and its IRQ is 4.
Address of COM2 is 2f8 and its IRQ is 3.

For Micro Channel bus computers, you do not need to specify this parameter
unless the computer has a COM port with a nonstandard COM port address or IRQ.

OS/2 2.1 cannot share the IRQ level in ISA/EISA bus computers.  Therefore, the
IRQ level must be unique for each COM port on these systems.  IRQ level is
determined by the hardware.  Check the IRQ level of the COM port before setting
the parameter.  On Micro Channel bus computers, the IRQ level can be shared and
no parameter is required to support COM3 or COM4 ports.  However, in order to
ignore unexpected interrupts, you need to specify the value I.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and directory that contain the EGA.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and directory that contain the EXTDSKDD.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  /D Parameter

Specifies the physical drive number, which can have a value of 0 through 255.

To specify the first physical diskette drive, accessed as A: from the command
prompt, specify the value 0. The value 1 specifies the second physical diskette
drive, and the value 2 specifies the third physical diskette drive, which must
be external.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  /T Parameter

Specifies the number of tracks per side. The valid range is from 1 through 999.
The default is 80.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  /S Parameter

Specifies the number of sectors per track. The valid range is from 1 through
99. The default is 9.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  /H Parameter

Specifies the maximum number of heads.  The valid range is from 1 through 99.
The default is 2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  /F Parameter

Specifies the device type (form factor).  The values are 0 - 9. The default is
2.  The values and the diskette drives are as follows:

0 - 360KB           (360)
1 - 1.2MB           (1200) (1.2)
2 - 7.20KB  3.5-inch drives  (720)
3 - not used  8-inch drives
4 - not used  8-inch drives
5 - not used  hard disks
6 - not used  tape drives
7 - 1.44MB  3.5-inch drives  (1440) (1.4)
8 - not used  RW Optical
9 - 2.88MB  3.5-inch drives  (2880) (2.88)

Note:   The values in parentheses can be used in place of the 0-9 values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameter

Specifies the drive and directory that contain the LOG.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  /E:x Parameter

Sets the size of the System-Error Logging Service error-log buffer to a
specified size (x) in KB.  The default is 8KB, the minimum is 4KB and the
maximum is 64KB.

To set the size of the System Logging Service error log buffer to 32KB, type
the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\LOG.SYS /E:32


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  /A:x Parameter

Sets the size of the System Logging Service error-log device driver entry alert
notification buffer to a specified size (x) in KB.  There is no default, the
minimum is 4KB and the maximum is 64KB.

To set the size of the System Error Logging Service error-log device driver
entry alert notification buffer to 64KB, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS
file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\LOG.SYS /A:64


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  /OFF Parameter

Pauses error logging as soon as the device driver is installed.  The default is
that error logging will not be turned off until you suspend it using the SYSLOG
utility program.

To pause error logging, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\LOG.SYS /OFF


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and directory for the mouse device driver file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Filename Parameter

Specifies the complete name of the file, including its extension, that contains
the mouse device driver.

The file names for the IBM Personal System/2 Models 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90, and
95 are:

PCLOGIC.SYS             PC Mouse Systems and some Logitech** devices
VISION.SYS              Visi-On**


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  SERIAL Parameter

Specifies the serial communications port that the serial mouse is connected to.

Note:   This parameter is not valid for the IBM Personal System/2 Mouse,
        Microsoft** Mouse with Bus Interface, or Microsoft In-Port Mouse.

The values for the IBM Personal System/2 Model 55SX, 65, 70, 80, 90, or 95 are
1 through 8.  The default communications port is COM1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameter

Specifies the drive and directory for the MOUSE.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  QSIZE Parameter

Specifies the length of the queue for events to be used for all OS/2 session
tasks.  The valid range is 1 through 100. The default value is 10 event
records.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  TYPE Parameter

Specifies the name of the device driver for the mouse.

PCLOGIC$       PC Mouse Systems Devices
PCLOGIC$       Logitech** Pointing Devices
VISION$        Visi-On** Mouse


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  RELAXED Parameter

Can be used with any three-button mouse if the mouse pointer is jumping
randomly about the screen.  Do not use this parameter unless you are
experiencing this problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameter

Specifies the drive and path of the OS2CDROM.DMD file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  /V Parameter

Specifies the Verbose mode.  This parameter displays the product identification
and firmware level of the CD-ROM drive during OS/2 initialization.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  /Q Parameter

Specifies a quiet fail.  This parameter inhibits the display of an error
message if OS2CDROM.DMD fails to load during OS/2 initialization. /Q is useful
for users who occasionally start the OS/2 operating system with the CD-ROM
drive turned off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and directory that contain PMDD.SYS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and directory that contain the POINTDD.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and directory for the touch device driver file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Filename Parameter

Specifies the complete name of the file, including its extension, that contains
the device driver for the touch device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  CODE Parameter

Specifies the microcode file to download into the touch device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  INIT Parameter

Specifies the parameter file to override the default settings in the device
driver for the touch device.  The default file is TOUCH.INI.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameter

Specifies the drive and directory for the TOUCH.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  QSIZE Parameter

Specifies the length of the queue for events to be used for all OS/2 session
tasks.  The valid range is 1 through 100. The default value is 10.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  TYPE Parameter

Specifies the name of the device driver for the touch device.  The default name
is PDITOU$.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and directory of the VDISK.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Bytes Parameter

Specifies the size of the virtual disk in KB. The valid range is 16 through
4096. The default value is 64.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Sectors Parameter

Specifies the sector size in bytes.  The values are 128, 256, and 512.  The
default value is 512.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Directories Parameter

Specifies the number of directory entries. The valid range is 2 through 1024.
The default value is 64.

The value of directories is rounded up to the nearest sector size boundary.
For example, if you give a value of 25, and your sector size is 512 bytes, 25
is rounded up to 32, which is the next multiple of 16.  (There are sixteen
32-byte directory entries in 512 bytes.)

The file allocation table (FAT) file system cannot support a root directory
containing more than 255 sectors. For example, a 64KB disk with 128-byte
sectors and 1024 directory entries requires 256 sectors.  Therefore, for
128-byte sectors, the maximum number of root directory entries you should
specify is 1020.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and directory that contain VEMM.SYS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command: n Parameter

Specifies, in KB, the limit on the amount of Expanded Memory Manager (EMM)
memory available to each DOS session.  If more than 32MB is specified, 32MB is
used.  Specifying 0 will disable EMM for all DOS sessions unless overridden.
The value can be overridden for a DOS session by specifying an EMS memory limit
in the DOS Settings section of a DOS command-prompt object on the desktop.  The
default is 2048KB (2MB).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and directory that contain VXMS.SYS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command: XMMLIMIT=g,i Parameter

Sets the global (system-wide) maximum memory usage of the VXMS driver to g KB,
and a per-DOS session maximum of i KB. These values should be large enough to
accommodate an automatic 64KB allocation in each DOS session for the High
Memory Area (HMA). Values are restricted to the range of 0 to 65535 (64MB).
The values of g and i are rounded up to the nearest multiple of 4.  Specifying
i=0 suppresses XMS installation in all DOS sessions unless specifically
overridden by a DOS= specific configuration string.

Default: /XMMLIMIT=4096,1024


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command: HMAMIN=d Parameter

Sets the minimum request size (in KB) for a High Memory Area (HMA) request to
succeed.  Values are restricted to the range of 0 to 63.

Default:  /HMAMIN=0


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command: NUMHANDLES=n Parameter

Sets the number of handles available in each DOS session.  Each handle requires
eight bytes of memory. (A handle is a 16-bit binary value created by the system
that identifies a drive, directory, and file so that the file can be found and
opened). Values are restricted to the range of 0 to 128.

Default:  /NUMHANDLES=32


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command: UMB Parameter

Instructs XMS to create upper memory blocks.

Default:  /off


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICE Command: NOUMB Parameter

Instructs XMS not to create upper memory blocks.

Default:  /NOUMB


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICEHIGH Command:  Drive and Path Parameter

Specifies the drive and directory of the DOS device driver to be loaded in an
upper memory block (UMB).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICEHIGH Command:  Filename Parameter

Specifies the complete name of the DOS device driver to be loaded into an upper
memory block (UMB).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICEHIGH Command:  Arguments Parameter

Specifies optional parameters to be passed to the device driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVICEHIGH Command: SIZE=xx Parameter

Specifies the number of hexadecimal bytes of the maximum of the driver's
run-time or load-time image.  When loading the device driver, the operating
system will look for a UMB whose size is the greater of xx and the device
driver's file size.  If a UMB of this size cannot be found, the device driver
will be loaded into low memory.

Some device drivers will not run properly in a UMB if they rely on having all
memory above them available for their use.  The liklihood of having this
additional memory, when loaded into a UMB, is less than when loaded into low
memory.  If a device driver does not run properly when loaded into a UMB, you
can increase the value in the SIZE= parameter by changing the CONFIG.SYS file
and restarting the system.  If this does not work, you need to load the device
driver into low memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVINFO Command:  Drive Path Filename Parameters

Specifies the drive, directory, and name of the file that contains the device
driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVINFO Command:  Arguments Parameter

Specifies the parameters of the identified device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVINFO Command:  Device Parameter

Specifies the reserved device name. The allowable device names are:

CGA (IBM Color Graphics Adapter)
EGA (IBM Enhanced Graphics Adapter)
VGA (IBM Personal System/2 Video Graphics Adapter and IBM Personal System/2
8514/A)
BGA (IBM Personal System/2 8514/A with memory expansion)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVINFO Command:  Drive, Path, and Filename Parameters

 Specifies the complete name of the file, which includes its extension, that
contains the system code pages for the display. The name of the system file is
VIOTBL.DCP, and it can be found in the C:\OS2 subdirectory by entering the PATH
statement C:\OS2\VIOTBL.DCP. There is no default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVINFO Command:  Layout Parameter

Specifies the keyboard layout.  The values are:

AR (Arabic)
BE (Belgium)
BR (Brazil)
CF (Canada, French Speaking)
CS (Czechoslovakia)
DK (Denmark)
SU (Finland)
FR (France)
FR120 (France, Alternate Keyboard)
GR (Germany)
HE (Hebrew)
HU (Hungary)
IS (Iceland)
IT (Italy)
IT142 (Italy, Alternate Keyboard)
LA (Latin America)
NL (Netherlands)
NO (Norway)
PL (Poland)
PO (Portugal)
SP (Spain)
SV (Sweden)
SF (Switzerland, French)
SG (Switzerland, German)
TR (Turkey)
TW (Republic of China)
UK (United Kingdom)
UK168 (United Kingdom, Alternate Keyboard)
US (United States)
YU (Yugoslavia)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DEVINFO Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the complete name of the file, including its extension, that contains
the keyboard translation tables. The name of the system file is KEYBOARD.DCP,
and it can be found in the C:\OS2 subdirectory by entering the PATH statement
C:\OS2\KEYBOARD.DCP. There is no default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DIR Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Lists the files in the specified directory or lists files that have a certain
name or extension.

To list files in a directory named REPORTS on drive B, enter the following:

DIR B:\REPORTS

To list files in the current directory that have the file name LETTER with no
extension, enter the following:

DIR LETTER

To list all files in the current directory that have the extension .BAT, enter
the following:

DIR *.BAT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DIR Command:  /P Parameter

Pauses the display of directory entries after the screen is filled.  To
continue the display of output, press any key. The current directory is
displayed in brackets on each screen after the first one.

To pause the directory listing for the current directory, enter the following:

DIR /P


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DIR Command:  /W Parameter

Selects wide display. Two names are shown for a 40-character-wide display; five
names are shown for an 80-character wide-display, and eight names are shown for
a 132 character-wide display.  Directory names are displayed enclosed in
brackets.

To display the current directory listing horizontally on your screen, enter the
following:

DIR /W

In OS/2 sessions, /W also selects the wide display mode for files created using
a file system other than file allocation table (FAT). The system scans the list
of found files to get the longest file name.  Then, it divides the width of the
display by the longest file name to determine the number of files displayed per
line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DIR Command:  /N parameter

Forces drives that have been formatted with the File Allocation Table (FAT)
file system to be displayed in the High Performance File System (HPFS) format.

/N displays the following information for files created using the FAT file
system:

o The date the file was last updated
o The time the file was last updated
o The size of the file
o The size of the file's extended attributes
o The unedited file name

Extended attribute information is consistently displayed on HPFS regardless of
whether you specify the /N parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DIR Command:  /F Parameter

Displays the fully qualified file name of each matching file.  No other
information is displayed. A fully qualified file name consists of the
following: drive letter, directory name, and file name.  The directory entries
. and .. will not be displayed.  Do not use the /F parameter with the /W
parameter.

To display a list of files named REPORT.ABC, enter the following:

DIR /F REPORT.ABC*

The directory listing would show all files that begin with REPORT.ABC
regardless of what follows.  The listing would show such files as
REPORT.ABC.342, REPORT.ABC.JAN., REPORT.ABC.APR.MAY.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DIR Command:  /A:attributes Parameter

Displays only the names of the directories and files with the attributes you
specify.  If you use this parameter without specifying specific attributes, the
names of all files, including hidden and system files, are displayed.  Use any
combination of these values and do not separate the values with spaces.  The
following list describes the values you can use for attributes:

H         Hidden files

-H        Files that are not hidden

S         System files

-S        Files other than system files

D         Directories

-D        Files only (not directories)

A         Files ready for archiving (backup)

-A        Files unchanged since the last backup

R         Read-only files

-R        Files that are not read-only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DIR Command:  /B Parameter

Lists each directory name or file name without the heading information and
summary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DIR Command:  /O:sortorder Parameter

Displays directory and file names in the requested sorted order. If you use
this parameter without specifying the sort order, the names of the directories,
sorted in alphabetic order, and then the names of files, sorted in alphabetic
order, are displayed.  Use any combination of these values and do not separate
the values with spaces. The following list describes the values you can use for
sortorder:

N         Alphabetic order

-N        Reverse alphabetic order

E         Alphabetic order by extension

-E        Reverse alphabetic order by extension

D         Date and time, earliest first

-D        Date and time, latest first

S         Size, smallest first

-S        Size, largest first

G         Directories grouped before files

-G        Directories grouped after files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DIR Command:  /S Parameter

Lists all occurrences of the specified file name in the specified directory and
all its subdirectories.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DIR Command:  /L Parameter

Lists all directory names and file names in lowercase.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DIR Command:  /R Parameter

Displays long file names in file systems (such as FAT) that do not support
them.  In the FAT file system, /R displays both the FAT file name and the long
file name to the right of the directory listing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DISKCACHE Command:  n Parameter

Specifies a number from 64 through 14400 that indicates the number of 1024-byte
blocks of storage to be used for control information and programs in the disk
cache buffer.  The default value is 64.

To set your disk cache size to 128KB, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS
file:

DISKCACHE=128

You can accept the default value of 64 if you install the OS/2 operating system
on an IBM Personal System/2 Models 55sx, 65, 70, and 80.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DISKCACHE Command:  ,T Parameter

Specifies a number from 4 through 128 that indicates the threshold size for the
number of sectors that will be placed into cache.  The default value is 4.

To set your disk cache size to 64KB with a threshold of 128 sectors, type the
following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DISKCACHE=64,128


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DISKCACHE Command:  ,LW Parameter

Specifies whether the contents of cache memory are written immediately to disk
or only during disk idle time.  This parameter pertains only to disks formatted
for the FAT file system.  The LW (lazy-write) parameter enables writing of
cache memory during disk idle time.  Omitting this parameter specifies
immediate writing to disk.  The LW parameter is in the DISKCACHE statement in
the CONFIG.SYS file by default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DISKCACHE Command:  ,AC:x Parameter

The AC:x (autocheck) parameter specifies the drives (x) the operating system
checks at startup time to determine if the file system associated with a drive
is in an inconsistent state.  A file system can be in an inconsistent state
when files were left open. This can happen when:

o The computer was turned off without selecting the Shut down choice from the
  menu of the desktop.

o Electrical power to the computer was interrupted.

The operating system runs the CHKDSK program with the /F option to correct any
problem caused by improper system shutdown.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DISKCOMP Command:  Source and Target Drive Parameters

Specifies the drives that contain the files to be compared.  On systems with
only one diskette drive, you can use DISKCOMP by inserting the source diskette
into drive A when prompted and then inserting the target diskette into drive A
when prompted.

To compare the complete contents of a diskette in drive B to a diskette in
drive A, enter the following:

DISKCOMP B: A:

To compare the complete contents of a diskette in drive A to a diskette to be
inserted later into drive A, enter the following:

DISKCOMP A: A:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DISKCOPY Command:  Source and Target Drive Parameters

Specifies the drives that contain the files to be copied.  On systems with only
one diskette drive, you can use DISKCOPY by inserting the source diskette into
drive A when prompted and then inserting the target diskette into drive A when
prompted.

To copy the complete contents of a diskette in drive B to a diskette in drive
A, enter the following:

DISKCOPY B: A:

To copy the complete contents of a diskette in drive A to a diskette to be
inserted later into drive A, enter the following:

DISKCOPY A: A:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DOSKEY Command: Macroname=text Parameter

Creates a macro that processes one or more DOS commands.  Macroname specifies
the name you want to assign to the macro.  Text specifies the commands you want
to record.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DOSKEY Command: /Reinstall Parameter

Installs a new copy of the DOSKEY program, even if one is already installed.
When DOSKEY is already installed, using this parameter clears the buffer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DOSKEY Command: /Bufsize=n Parameter

Specifies the size of the buffer in which DOSKEY stores commands and macros.
The default size is 512 bytes.  The minimum buffer size is 256 bytes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DOSKEY Command: /M Parameter

Displays a list of all DOSKEY macros.  You can use a redirection symbol (>)
with this parameter to redirect the list to a file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DOSKEY Command: /H Parameter

Displays a list of all commands stored in memory.  You can use a redirection
symbol (>) with this parameter to redirect the list to a file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DOSKEY Command: /Insert/Overstrike Parameter

Specifies how new text that you type is to be placed.  If you use /insert, new
text that you type on a line is inserted into old text.  If you use
/overstrike, new text is to replace old text.  The default is /overstrike.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DOS Command: HIGH Parameter

Specifies that the DOS kernel should reside in the high memory area (HMA). The
high memory area (HMA) refers to space between 1MB and 1MB + 64KB.  When the
DOS kernel resides in the high memory area, DOS applications cannot use this
area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DOS Command: LOW Parameter

Specifies that the DOS kernel should reside in conventional (low) memory below
640KB.  This means that DOS applications can use the high memory area. The high
memory area (HMA) refers to space between 1MB and 1MB + 64KB.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DOS Command: UMB Parameter

Specifies that the operating system controls the upper memory blocks (UMBs).
This means that DOS applications cannot allocate UMBs but can be loaded there.

To specify UMBs to be controlled by the operating system and the DOS kernel to
reside in the upper memory area, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DOS=HIGH,UMB


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DOS Command: NOUMB Parameter

Specifies that the operating system does not control the upper memory blocks
(UMBs).  This means that DOS applications can allocate UMBs but cannot be
loaded there.

To specify DOS applications to allocate UMBs and the DOS kernel to reside in
conventional memory (below 640KB), type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

DOS=LOW,NOUMB


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DPATH Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and directories to be searched for data files. When you
installed the operating system, the installation program placed a DPATH
statement in your CONFIG.SYS file.

To specify the current path to data files as a replaceable parameter by
appending the paths of the ABC and XYZ subdirectories to the DPATH statement
already in effect, enter the following:

DPATH %DPATH%;C:\ABC;C:\XYZ;


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EAUTIL Command:  /S Parameter

Splits extended attributes from a data file and places them in a hold file.

To place extended attributes from a file named MODULE.TXT into a file named
ATTRIB.MOD, enter the following:

EAUTIL MODULE.TXT ATTRIB.MOD /S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EAUTIL Command:  /R Parameter

Replaces the hold file with the current extended attributes contained in the
data file.

To replace the extended attributes in the ATTRIB.MOD file with the extended
attributes of the NEWFILE.EA, enter the following:

EAUTIL NEWFILE.EA ATTRIB.MOD /R /S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EAUTIL Command:  /P Parameter

Preserves extended attributes in the data file after a split operation, or
preserves extended attributes in a hold file after a join operation.

To preserve extended file attributes in a file named MODULE.TXT and copy that
file's extended attributes to a file named ATTRIB.MOD, enter the following:

EAUTIL MODULE.TXT ATTRIB.MOD /P /S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EAUTIL Command:  /J Parameter

Joins the extended attributes stored as data in the hold file to the data file.

To join the extended attributes in the ATTRIB.MOD hold file with the MODULE.TXT
data file, enter the following:

EAUTIL MODULE.TXT ATTRIB.MOD /J


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EAUTIL Command:  /O Parameter

Overwrites (deletes) the extended attributes that are in the data file with the
extended attributes that are in the hold file.

To overwrite the extended attributes in the MODULE.TXT file with the extended
attributes in the NEWFILE.EA hold file, enter the following:

EAUTIL MODULE.TXT NEWFILE.EA /O /J


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EAUTIL Command:  /M Parameter

Merges the extended attributes that are in the hold file into the extended
attributes that are in the data file.

To merge the extended attributes in the NEWFILE.EA hold file into the extended
attributes in the MODULE.TXT data file, enter the following:

EAUTIL MODULE.TXT NEWFILE.EA /M /J


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EAUTIL Command:  Datafile Parameter

Specifies the name of the file that contains extended attributes that are to be
split into a hold file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EAUTIL Command:  Holdfile Parameter

Specifies the name of the file that will be used to store extended attributes
as data.  If no file name is specified, EAUTIL creates a hold file with the
same name as the data file.  EAUTIL stores the hold file in a directory named
EAS with the same parent directory as the data file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ECHO Command:  Message Parameter

Displays a message regardless of the current state (ON or OFF). In this way,
you can display specific messages even when ECHO has been turned off.

To display the message, PROGRAM FAILED, on your screen, whether ECHO is ON or
OFF, enter the following:

ECHO PROGRAM FAILED


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ECHO Command:  ON and OFF Parameters

ON displays all commands as they are run.  This is the default value.  OFF
stops the display of commands on the screen (including the REM command).

To show all commands on your screen as they are processed, enter the following:

ECHO ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ERASE Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the name of the file or files to be erased.  In DOS sessions, all
files must be in the same directory.

To erase a file named FRIDAY from the current directory on the current drive,
enter the following:

ERASE FRIDAY

To erase all files in the current directory on drive C, enter the following:

ERASE C:*.*

To erase all files in the REPORTS subdirectory on drive C, enter the following:

ERASE C:\REPORTS\*.*

To erase a file named FRIDAY from the REPORTS subdirectory on drive C, enter
the following:

ERASE C:\REPORTS\FRIDAY

To erase all files with a .ABC extension from the REPORTS subdirectory in the
root directory on drive C, enter the following:

ERASE C:\REPORTS\*.ABC


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ERASE Command:  /P Parameter

Specifies that you do not want the system to delete all files.  The system
displays each file name, giving you the option to delete it or not delete it.
When you use the /P parameter to delete a single file or more than one file, a
message is displayed.  For example, if you type the following:

ERASE C:\MYDIR\MYFILE /P

The system displays this message:

C:\MYDIR\MYFILE, Delete (Y/N)?

Type Y to delete the file; otherwise, type N. If you are deleting multiple
files in a directory, the system advances to the next file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ERASE Command:  /N Parameter

Specifies that the message Are you sure (Y/N)? is not to be displayed by the
operating system when you are deleting the contents of a subdirectory.

To delete the contents of the REPORTS subdirectory on drive C and not be
prompted Are you sure (Y/N)?, enter the following:

ERASE C:\REPORTS /N


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXTPROC Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the complete name of the file, including its extension, that contains
the external batch processor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXTPROC Command:  Arguments Parameter

Specifies the information passed to the external batch processor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCBS Command:  m Parameter

Specifies a number from 1 through 255 that indicates the total number of file
control blocks (FCBs) that can be open at the same time.

To specify the total number of file control blocks that can be open at one time
to 7, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

FCBS=7


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCBS Command:  n Parameter

Specifies the number of files opened by FCBs that cannot be closed
automatically by the system when a program tries to have more than m files
opened by FCBs at one time. The first n files opened by FCBs are thus protected
from being closed.  The range of values for n is from 0 through 255.  The value
for n must be less than or equal to m.

To set the total number of file control block files that can be open at one
time to 7, and set the number protected from being closed to 2, type the
following in the CONFIG.SYS file.

FCBS=7,2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /QUERY Parameter

Displays a list of all partitions and free space on the hard disks of the
system.  For example, here is a query that returned information about 4
partitions and a free space entry:

Name     Partition   Vtype   FStype   Drive   Status   Start   Size
System 1   C:        01      04       1        1       00     30
System 2    :        01      01       1        1       30     10
OS2-HPFS   D:        02      07       2        1       00     60
data-vol   E:        02      06       1        0       40     70
01000061    :        03      00       2        0       60     55

To display a list of all partitions and free space on the hard disks of the
system, type the following:

FDISK /QUERY


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /CREATE:name Parameter

Creates a primary partition or logical drive in an extended partition.  You can
specify an optional name for the created partition. You must specify the type
of partition being created by using the /VTYPE:n option where n = 1 for a
primary partition and 2 for a logical drive in an extended partition.

To create a logical drive in an extended partition on disk 1 with the name
OS2FAT, type the following:

FDISK /CREATE:OS2FAT /VTYPE:2 /DISK:1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /DELETE Parameter

Deletes a logical drive or primary partition.  This parameter must be used with
one or more options.  You can use /DELETE:all to delete all logical drives on a
disk.  If you use /DELETE:all, however, you must specify the disk using the
/DISK option.

To delete a logical drive with the name OS2FAT, type the following:

FDISK /DELETE /NAME:OS2FAT

To delete all logical drives on disk 2, type the following:

FDISK /DELETE:all /DISK:2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /SETNAME:name Parameter

Specifies names for primary partitions or logical drives and makes them
bootable from the Boot Manager.  If name is left blank, the boot name is
removed and the partition will not be bootable from the Boot Manager menu.

To specify the name DOS4.0 of a primary partition, type the following:

FDISK /SETNAME:DOS4.0


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /SETACCESS Parameter

Sets a primary DOS partition as accessible.  Once a primary DOS partition has
been set as accessible, all other primary DOS partitions on the same drive are
inaccessible.

If there are two primary DOS partitions on a hard disk, specifying this
parameter with no options makes the previously inaccessible partition
accessible and changes the previously accessible partition to inaccessible.

To specify a primary DOS partition as accessible, type the following:

FDISK /SETACCESS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /STARTABLE Parameter

Specifies a partition as startable.

To specify a partition as startable, type the following:

FDISK /STARTABLE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /FILE:filename Parameter

Processes all FDISK commands in the specified file allowing the batching of
FDISK commands.  You must have commas separating the arguments of each command
in the file and the commands are processed just once.  For example, the file,
MYFILE, contains the following commands:

/query
/create:OS2,/vtype:1,/disk:1,/name:01000030,/size:20
/startable,/name:OS2
/query,/name:OS2

The processing of these commands is as follows:

Command 1       Displays a list of all partitions and unused space on all hard
                disks.

Command 2       Creates a primary partition on disk 1 with a size of 20MB in
                the free space alias 01000030 and assigns it a name of OS2.

Command 3       Sets the partition named OS2 to be startable on the Boot
                Manager menu.

Command 4       Displays the partition information of the partition named OS2.

To process FDISK commands in the file MYFILE, type the following:

FDISK /FILE:myfile


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /parameter /NAME:name Option

Options limit the actions of the FDISK command and parameters.  This option
indicates the name of a partition.  A name can be up to eight characters in
length and is case-sensitive.  The /NAME option can be used with all FDISK
parameters except /FILE.

Note:   During a QUERY operation, a temporary name is assigned to every
        partition and free space that does not have a boot name assigned.  This
        name is not set as the partition name, but is only used as a temporary
        identifier for you.  Because you do not have a visual representation of
        the Boot Manager menu, these temporary names can be used in place of
        real names for the NAME option.

To delete a partition named dos, type the following:

FDISK /DELETE /NAME:dos


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /parameter /DISK:n Option

Options limit the actions of the FDISK command and parameters.  This option
specifies the number of the hard disk that you want to work with using the
FDISK command and parameters.  The /DISK option can be used with all FDISK
parameters except /FILE.

To display all partitions on drive 2, type the following:

FDISK /QUERY /DISK:2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /parameter /FSTYPE:x Option

Options limit the actions of the FDISK command and parameters.  This option
specifies the file system type of the partition.  The Type x = DOS, FAT, IFS,
Free, or other.  The /FSTYPE option can be used with all FDISK parameters
except /FILE and /SETACCESS.

To display a partition with a FAT file system, type the following:

FDISK /QUERY /FSTYPE:FAT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /parameter /START:m Option

Options limit the actions of the FDISK command and parameters.  This option
specifies the partition starting location.  The m = t or b where t = top of the
partition and b = bottom of the partition.  The /START option can be used with
all FDISK parameters except /FILE.

To create a primary partition starting at the top of the partition, type the
following:

FDISK /CREATE /START:t


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /parameter /SIZE:m Option

Options limit the actions of the FDISK command and parameters.  This option
specifies the size of the partition where m is the size in MB.  The /SIZE
option can be used with all FDISK parameters except /FILE.

To create a primary partition with a size of 8MB, type the following:

FDISK /CREATE /SIZE:8


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /parameter /VTYPE:n Option

Options limit the actions of the FDISK command and parameters.  This option
specifies the type of the partition.  The value of n can be as follows:

0    Space is not usable

1    Primary partition (not shared)

2    Logical drive (shared in an extended partition)

     Free space that can be used to create a primary or extended partition.

The /VTYPE option can be used with all FDISK parameters except /FILE,
/SETACCESS, and /STARTABLE.

To display unusable space on a disk, type the following:

FDISK /QUERY /VTYPE:0

To specify a primary partition to be displayed, type the following:

FDISK /QUERY /VTYPE:1

To specify a logical drive in an extended partition to be displayed, type the
following:

FDISK /QUERY /VTYPE:2

To display free space that can be used to create a primary or extended
partition, type the following:

FDISK /QUERY /VTYPE:3


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /parameter /BOOTABLE:s Option

Options limit the actions of the FDISK command and parameters.  This option
indicates the bootable status of partitions; s is 0 for partitions that are not
bootable; s is 1 for partitions that are bootable.  The /BOOTABLE option can be
used with all FDISK parameters except /FILE.

To display all partitions that are bootable from the Boot Manager menu, type
the following:

FDISK /QUERY /BOOTABLE:1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FDISK Command:  /BOOTMGR Option

Options limit the actions of the FDISK command and parameters.  This option
specifies an action for the Boot Manager partition.

To create the Boot Manager partition, type the following:

FDISK  /CREATE /BOOTMGR


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An allocated space on a hard disk that is defined by size and accessibility. A
non-shareable partition is called a primary partition.  A shareable partition
is called an extended partition and can contain multiple logical drives, each
of which can be assigned different versions of an operating system such as the
OS/2 operating system.  All versions of DOS, however, must reside in a primary
partition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FILES Command:  n Parameter

Specifies a number from 20 to 255 that indicates the maximum number of files
that can be open at the same time.  This means that a DOS session can access
the number of files that you specify in the CONFIG.SYS file.  The default value
is 20.

To specify a maximum of 40 files to be open at the same time in a DOS session,
type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

FILES=40


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FIND Command:  /V Parameter

Displays all lines that do not contain the specified string.

To display all lines that do not include the word CHAPTER in a file named
BOOK.TXT, enter the following.

FIND /V "CHAPTER" BOOK.TXT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FIND Command:  /C Parameter

Displays the count of lines that contain a match for the string.  If /C is
specified with /N, FIND ignores /N. If /C is specified with /V, FIND returns
the count of lines that do not contain the string.

To display a count of the number of lines in a file named BOOK.TXT that include
the word CHAPTER, enter the following:

FIND /C "CHAPTER" BOOK.TXT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FIND Command:  /N Parameter

Puts the relative line number in front of each matching line.

To display the line number where each occurrence of CHAPTER is found in the
text of the file named BOOK.TXT, enter the following:

FIND /N "CHAPTER" BOOK.TXT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FIND Command:  /I Parameter

Ignores the case of characters when searching for a string in a file.

To make a search for the string CHAPTER not case-sensitive in the file
BOOK.TXT, enter the following:

FIND /I "CHAPTER" BOOK.TXT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FIND Command:  "String" Parameter

Specifies the string to search for.  Remember to enclose the string in double
quotes.  An uppercase string does not match a lowercase string.

To display all the lines from files named BOOK1 and BOOK2 (in that order) that
contain the word CHAPTER, enter the following:

FIND "CHAPTER" BOOK1 BOOK2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FIND Command:  Drive, Path, and Filename Parameters

Specifies the drive, path, and name of the file to be searched.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FOR Command:  %variable Parameter

Specifies any character, including 0 through 9, entered at the command prompt.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FOR Command:  %%c Parameter

Specifies any character, including 0 through 9.  Note that this does not
conflict with the %0 through %9 batch parameter substitutions because two %
symbols (%%) are required when you use FOR loop substitution in batch
processing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FOR Command:  Set Parameter

Specifies one or more items to which the % variable parameter or the %%c
parameter will be set.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FOR Command:  Command Parameter

Specifies the OS/2 command to be run.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FORMAT Command:  Drive Parameter

Specifies the drive to be formatted.

To format a 5.25-inch high-capacity diskette in high-capacity diskette drive B,
enter the following:

FORMAT B:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FORMAT Command:  /ONCE Parameter

Specifies that only one diskette is to be formatted.  You use this parameter
when you want to format only one diskette and do not want to be asked by a
system message if you want to format another diskette.  After one diskette is
formatted, no system message is displayed and you are returned to the command
prompt.

To format one diskette on drive A, enter the following:

FORMAT A: /ONCE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FORMAT Command:  /4 Parameter

Formats a 360KB diskette in a 1.2MB drive. This parameter is intended to allow
use of 360KB diskettes in 1.2MB drives only. Diskettes formatted with this
parameter on a 1.2MB drive may not be reliably read or written in a 360KB
drive.

To format a 360KB diskette in a 1.2MB drive, enter the following:

FORMAT A: /4

You can also type:

FORMAT A: /N:9 /T:40


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FORMAT Command:  /T:tracks and /N:sectors Parameters

Formats a diskette to the number of tracks (/T) and number of sectors (/N)
specified. If /T is not specified, the default is 80.

Use /N to format a 3.5-inch diskette to a specific number of sectors per track.
The default depends on the diskette drive being used. However, if the diskette
you are formatting has a smaller capacity than the diskette drive, you must
specify a value for /N.

Use the following values to specify tracks and sectors for the diskette type
shown:

360KB (5.25 in.) /T:40 /N:9

720KB (3.5 in.) /T:80 /N:9

1.2MB (5.25 in. /T:80 /N:15

1.44MB (3.5 in.) /T:80 /N:18

2.88MB (3.5 in.) /T:80 /N:36

To format a 3.5-inch 720KB diskette in a 1.44MB drive (drive A), enter the
following:

FORMAT A: /T:80 /N:9


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FORMAT Command: /L Parameter

Specifies the long format procedure used to format and install the file system
on an IBM read/write optical disc.  Formatting an optical disc the first time
requires about 20 minutes. Reformatting a previously formatted optical disc
requires only a few minutes when you do not use the /L parameter.

To format and install the file system on a read-write optical disc, enter the
following:

FORMAT D: /L

where drive D is designated as the optical disc drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FORMAT Command:  /V:label Parameter

Specifies the volume label. A volume label can be up to 11 characters long and
is used to identify the disk. If you do not specify a volume label, you are
prompted to do so after formatting is completed.

To format a diskette in drive A and give the diskette a volume label of MYDISK,
enter the following:

FORMAT A: /V:MYDISK

To include blanks in a volume label, enclose the volume label in quotation
marks.  For example, to label a diskette My Disk, enter the following:

FORMAT A:/v:"My Disk"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FORMAT Command:  /F:xxxx Parameter

Specifies the size to which the diskette is to be formatted. FORMAT prepares
the diskette with the appropriate number of tracks and sectors. The values are
as follows:

360KB (5.25 in.)         360, 360K, 360KB

720KB (3.5 in.)          720, 720K, 720KB

1.2MB (5.25 in.)         1200, 1200K, 1200KB, 1.2, 1.2M, 1.2MB

1.44MB (3.5 in.)         1440, 1440K, 1440KB, 1.44, 1.44M, 1.44MB

2.88MB (3.5 in.)         2880, 2880K, 2880KB, 2.88, 2.88M, 2.88MB

To format a 3.5-inch 720KB diskette in a 1.4MB drive (drive A), enter the
following:

FORMAT A: /F:720


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FORMAT Command:  /FS:xxxx Parameter

Specifies that FORMAT is to execute another file system's format program.

To format a hard disk partition on drive D for the High Performance File
System, enter the following:

FORMAT D: /FS:HPFS

To change the HPFS partition on drive D to a FAT type partition, type the
following:

FORMAT D: /FS:FAT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FSACCESS Command: ! (exclamation) Parameter

The ! (exclamation) parameter means the following drive letter or sequence
should not be mapped to OS/2 drives.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FSACCESS Command: DOSletter Parameter

Specifies a local drive letter (a following colon is optional).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FSACCESS Command: DOSletter - DOSletter Parameter

The minus sign (-) indicates a sequence of drive letters between the two
letters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FSACCESS Command: DOSletter = OS/2drive Parameter

The equals sign (=)  means to map a local DOS drive letter to an OS/2 drive.
OS/2drive is an OS/2 drive letter (a following colon is optional).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GOTO Command:  Label Parameter

Directs commands to run beginning with the line immediately after label.

To go to a section in your batch file that has a label :EXIT, if the error
level of the program you are running is 1 or greater, type the following in the
batch file:

IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO EXIT
 .
 .
:EXIT

To show an indefinite sequence of "IBM RIBBONS ..." and "GOTO LOOP" messages on
your screen, type the following in the batch file:

:LOOP
@ECHO IBM RIBBONS ...
@ECHO GOTO LOOP
@GOTO LOOP

Press Ctrl+Break to stop running the batch file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GRAFTABL Command:  nnn Parameter

Specifies a three-digit number, indicating the graphic code page to be used,
which can have a value of:

437   U.S.

850   Multilingual

860   Portuguese

863   Canada (French-speaking)

To specify the U.S. 437 graphic code page, enter the following:

GRAFTABL 437


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GRAFTABL Command:  ? Parameter

Displays the number of the graphic code page currently being used and a list of
code page options.

To display the number of the graphic code page currently being used, and a list
of graphic code page options, enter the following:

GRAFTABL ?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GRAFTABL Command:  /STA Parameter

Displays the number of the graphic code page currently being used.

To display the number of the graphic code page currently being used, enter the
following:

GRAFTABL /STA


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HELP Command:  ON and OFF Parameters

Turns the help line on or off.

To display a help line as a part of the command prompt, reminding you which
keys to press to return to the desktop, enter the following:

HELP ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HELP Command:  message help Parameter

Identifies the system message prefix and number, when necessary, for which
additional information is being requested. It is not necessary to type the
prefix and leading zeros.

To request additional help for error message number SYS0003, type the
following:

HELP 3

HELP then displays the original message, followed by an explanation and action
statements.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HELP Command:  Book Parameter

Identifies the online book (.INF file) to be searched for a specified topic. If
you do not specify a book name, HELP searches the OS/2 Command Reference.

To view information in the OS/2 Command Reference about the COPY command, enter
the following at the OS/2 command prompt:

HELP CMDREF COPY

To view information about functions in the REXX Information, enter the
following at the OS/2 command prompt:

HELP REXX FUNCTIONS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HELP Command:  Topic Parameter

Identifies the topic for which additional information is being requested.

To view information about the COPY command, enter the following at the OS/2
command prompt:

HELP COPY


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IF Command:  NOT Parameter

Reverses the truth value of conditional parameters from true to false or false
to true.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IF Command: ERRORLEVEL Number Parameter

True if the previous program had an exit code of number or higher. The number
is specified as a decimal value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IF Command:  String Parameter

True when the first string is identical to the second string.

The corresponding characters of each string must both be uppercase or lowercase
to be identical.

A blank string is not valid syntax.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IF Command:  EXIST Filename Parameter

True if the file name is found in the specified directory.  Global file-name
characters (? and *) are allowed as a file name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IF Command:  Command Parameter

Specifies the OS/2 command to be run when one of the conditional parameters
listed is true.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IFS Command:  Drive, Path, and Filename Parameters

Specifies the drive, path, and file name of the file system program. This
program contains the parameters needed to work with disks formatted for a
particular file system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IFS Command:  Arguments Parameter

Specifies the parameters of the identified file system driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IFS Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and path of the CDFS.IFS program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IFS Command:  Filename Parameter

Specifies the file name of the file system program.  For CD-ROM, the program is
CDFS.IFS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IFS Command:  Arguments Parameter

Specifies the parameters of the CDFS.IFS program.  The following list shows the
parameters of the CDFS.IFS program and how they are used:

/P:         Indicates the debug output port.  The values can be 1 (for COM1) or
            2 (for COM2).

/K          Indicates the supplemental volume descriptor with KANJI.

/C:n        Where n indicates how many 64KB segments to use for the sector
            cache.  The default is /C:2.

/M:n        Where n indicates the maximum number of file sectors to read at a
            time.  The default is /M:8.

/Q          Suppresses initialization messages.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IFS Command:  Drive, Path, and Filename Parameters

Specifies the drive, path, and file name of the file system program. For HPFS,
The program is HPFS.IFS.

To install the High Performance File System in a system with 6MB of RAM, the
OS/2 Installation program places the following statement in the CONFIG.SYS
file:

IFS=C:\OS2\HPFS.IFS /CACHE:128 /CRECL:4 /AUTOCHECK:C


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IFS Command:  /C Parameter

Specifies the amount of memory in KB that is used for file system disk caching.
If this parameter is omitted, the default value is 10% of the available
physical memory. A dash (-) may be used in place of a slash (/)

To install the High Performance File System in a system with 6MB of RAM, the
OS/2 Installation program places the following statement in the CONFIG.SYS
file:

IFS=C:\OS2\HPFS.IFS /CACHE:128 /CRECL:4 /AUTOCHECK:C


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IFS Command:  /AUTOCHECK Parameter

Specifies the drives that the operating system checks at startup time to
determine if the file system associated with a drive is in an inconsistent
state. A file system could be in an inconsistent state when files were left
open. This can happen when:

o The computer was turned off without selecting the Shut down choice from the
  menu of the desktop.

o Electrical power to the computer was interrupted.

The OS/2 operating system runs the CHKDSK program with the /F option to correct
any problem caused by improper system shutdown. Each time you format a drive
for the High Performance File System, the operating system updates the IFS
statement in the CONFIG.SYS file with the appropriate AUTOCHECK parameter.

Assume the following statement appears in the CONFIG.SYS file:

IFS=C:\OS2\HPFS.IFS /C:64 /AUTOCHECK:DF

Each time it starts, the operating system checks drives D and F; if necessary,
it runs the CHKDSK program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IFS Command:  /CRECL:x Parameter

Specifies the maximum record size for caching where the maximum record size (x)
is a multiple of 2KB.  The smallest maximum record size for caching is 2KB and
the largest is 64KB.  The default is 4KB.

To set the cache size to 64KB and the maximum record size to 4KB, type the
following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

IFS=C:\OS2\HPFS.IFS /C:64 /CRECL:4


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An actual DOS program product that is purchased independently of the OS/2
operating system such as IBM DOS Version 5.0.  You can run these programs with
the OS/2 operating system by starting a DOS session with a specific DOS
version.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IOPL Command:  YES and NO Parameters

NO prevents I/O privilege from being granted; YES permits I/O privilege to be
granted.

To permit I/O privileges to processing programs, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

IOPL=YES


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IOPL Command:  List Parameter

Restricts the set of programs with this privilege. These are the names of the
programs that require I/O privilege. Use a comma to separate the names of the
programs.

To allow I/O privileges to be granted to programs named PROC2 and PROC3, type
the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

IOPL=PROC2,PROC3


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

JOIN Command:  Drive and Directory Parameters.

Identifies the drives that are joined.  The first drive is the one you want
identified as the path on the second drive.

To join drive A to the path C:\DRIVEA and access drive A as the DRIVEA
subdirectory on drive C, enter the following:

JOIN A: C:\DRIVEA


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

JOIN Command:  /D Parameter

Turns off a JOIN action.

To turn off the JOIN action on drive A, enter the following:

JOIN A: /D


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

KEYB Command:  Layout Parameter

Specifies the keyboard layout.  The values are as follows:

AR      Arabic

BE      Belgium

BR      Brazil

CF      Canada (French)

CS      Czechoslovakia

DK      Denmark

SU      Finland

FR      France

GR      Germany

HE      Hebrew

HU      Hungary

IS      Iceland

IT      Italy

LA      Latin America

NL      Netherlands

NO      Norway

PL      Poland

PO      Portugal

SP      Spain

SV      Sweden

SF      Switzerland (French)

SG      Switzerland (German)

TR      Turkey

TW      Republic of China

UK      United Kingdom

US      United States

YU      Yugoslavia

To switch to the Portuguese keyboard using the keyboard layout, PO, type the
following:

KEYB PO


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

KEYB Command:  Subcountry Parameter

Specifies a specific keyboard layout for countries that have more than one
layout.  The subcountry codes for those countries are as follows:

243, 245       Czechoslovakia

189, 120       France

141, 142       Italy

166, 168       United Kingdom

If you do not specify a subcountry code for these countries, the OS/2 operating
system uses the first subcountry code listed.

To switch to the French keyboard using the French keyboard layout, FR, and the
French enhanced keyboard, 120, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

KEYB FR 120


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

KEYS Command:  ON and OFF Parameters

(ON) Permits previous commands to be retrieved, changed, and reissued.

To enable the retrieving, changing and reissuing of commands, enter the
following:

KEYS ON

(OFF) Prevents previously issued commands from being retrieved.

To stop retrieving commands, enter the following:

KEYS OFF


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

KEYS Command:  List Parameter

Causes a list of previously issued commands to appear.

To display the list of commands in the queue, enter the following:

KEYS LIST

Note:   KEYS LIST only displays commands entered and stored at the command
        prompt when KEYS ON is active.  They are stored there until KEYS ON is
        issued again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LABEL Command:  Drive Parameter

Specifies the disk to be labeled.

To display the volume label of drive A and be prompted by the system for the
new label, enter the following:

LABEL A:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LABEL Command:  Label Parameter

Specifies the volume label that identifies the disk.  This can be up to 11
characters.  All characters acceptable in file names are acceptable in the
volume label.  Unlike file names, however, the volume label does not contain a
period between the eighth and ninth characters.

To create a volume-label name of FIXEDISKC for your hard disk, drive C, type
the following:

LABEL C:FIXEDISKC


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LASTDRIVE Command:  x Parameter

Specifies a drive letter from A through Z.  The minimum value for this
parameter is the letter that specifies the number of drives installed on your
system.  For example, one drive = A, two drives = B, and so on.

To set the last drive = to M, giving your system access to 13 logical drives,
type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

LASTDRIVE=M


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LIBPATH Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies a directory to be searched for dynamic link libraries. You can search
for more than one directory by specifying additional paths, separated by
semicolons. The paths are searched in the order specified.

To specify the LIB subdirectory as the directory to be searched for dynamic
link libraries, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

LIBPATH=C:\;C:\LIB;


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LOADHIGH Command:  Drive and Path Parameter

Specifies the drive and directory of the DOS TSR program to be loaded into an
upper memory block (UMB).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LOADHIGH Command:  Filename Parameters

Specifies the complete name of the DOS TSR program to be loaded into an upper
memory block (UMB).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LOADHIGH Command:  Arguments Parameter

Specifies optional parameters for the TSR program to be run.

To load the APPEND program with the parameters C:\OS2 and C:\TOOLS into a UMB,
enter the following:

LOADHIGH APPEND C:\OS2;C:\TOOLS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MAKEINI Command:  User and System Parameters

If you receive a message stating that the OS2.INI file is corrupted, the
OS2.INI file installed on your system must be replaced by another valid copy of
the OS2.INI file.

To re-create the user and system OS2SYS.INI files follow the steps listed in
the examples push button.

To re-create a new user INI file, enter:

MAKEINI OS2.INI INI.RC

To re-create a new system INI file, enter:

MAKEINI OS2SYS.INI INISYS.RC


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MAXWAIT Command:  x Parameter

Specifies the number of seconds that must elapse before a regular class thread
that is waiting to access the processor receives an increase in priority.

You can specify a number from 1 through 255.  The smaller the value, the
greater the system overhead.

To cause a process to wait up to 15 seconds before it receives a temporary
increase in priority, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

MAXWAIT=15


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MEM Command: /P Parameter

Displays the status of programs that are currently loaded into memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MEM Command: /D Parameter

Displays the status of currently loaded programs, internal drivers, and other
programming information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MEM Command: /C Parameter

Displays the status of programs loaded into conventional memory and the upper
memory area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MEMMAN Command:  SWAP and NOSWAP Parameters

Permits segment swapping (SWAP) or prevents segment swapping (NOSWAP).  If you
want to set MEMAN=NOSWAP to disable segment swapping, you must have at least
8MB of real memory.  If other device drivers are installed, you might need more
real memory.

To permit segment swapping, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

MEMMAN=SWAP

To run a time-dependent application and prevent the OS/2 operating system from
swapping the contents of storage to disk, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS
file:

MEMMAN=NOSWAP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MEMMAN Command:  MOVE and NOMOVE Parameters

These parameters are provided for OS/2 1.3 compatibility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MEMMAN Command:  PROTECT Parameter

Enables certain APIs to allocate and use protected memory.  This action can
also be called protected dynalinks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MEMMAN Command:  COMMIT Parameter

Forces the system to reserve storage on the hard disk in the swap file
(SWAPPER.DAT) for all committed memory allocations.  This parameter enables a
program to receive an error return code when there is not enough space in the
swap file for the program to run.

Note:   If you use this parameter, you should increase the initial size of the
        swap file by using the INITIAL parameter in the SWAPPATH statement in
        your CONFIG.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MKDIR Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and directory name.

To make a subdirectory named REPORTS within the root directory on drive C,
enter the following:

MD C:\REPORTS

You can also create more than one directory at a time.

To make two separate directories named FIRST and SECOND in the root directory
on drive C, enter the following:

MD C:\FIRST C:\SECOND


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  Device Parameter

Specifies the complete name of the device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  Arguments Parameter

Specifies the parameters of the identified device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  COM# Parameter

Specifies the asynchronous communication port numbers (1 through 4).

To query the status of asynchronous COM port 1, type the following:

MODE COM1

You can specify port numbers 1 through 4.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  Colon (:) Parameter

The colon is optional.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  Comma (,) Parameter

Indicates you can use a comma to separate or replace parameters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  Baud Parameter

Specifies the transmission rate on COM ports.  The transmission rate can be:
110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600, 14400, 19200,
38400, or 57600.  The default is 1200. The availability of this support can be
determined by querying the current status of a COM port.  You must specify at
least the first two digits of the desired rate.

Note:   The Async device driver is designed to handle high baud rates under
        optimum conditions.  To achieve successful data transfer operations at
        high baud rates, the following conditions should be met:

o The connecting cables should be free from electrical noise.
o Other programs should not be active on the system because operations at high
  baud rates require many processor cycles.
o There should be no overflow of the receive buffer of the Async device driver.
o Applications should not use the Error or Break Replacement options.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  Parity Parameter

Specifies the following values: N (none), O (odd), E (even), M (mark), or S
(space).  None means that there is no parity bit. Odd means odd parity; even
means even parity. Mark parity means that the parity bit is always 1. Space
parity means that the parity bit is always 0. If parity is not specified, the
default is E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Mode Command:  Databits Parameter

Specifies the value of data bits. The values are 5, 6, 7, or 8 bits of data,
with the default of 7.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  Stopbits Parameter

Specifies the value of stop bits.  Values are 1, 1.5, or 2. Either 1 or 1.5 is
valid if databits is specified as 5. If stopbits is specified as 1.5, only 5 is
valid for databits. The default for this parameter is 2 when the baud rate is
110; otherwise, the default is 1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  P Parameter

In a DOS session, specifies a time-out value of approximately 30 seconds for
DOS programs that go directly to the hardware. The P parameter does not provide
infinite retries and can be used only in DOS sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  TO Parameter

Specifies the type of processing.  ON allows write infinite timeout processing.
If OFF is specified, normal timeout processing will occur. The default mode is
TO=OFF, which causes a timeout to occur in 60 seconds.

To ensure that a printer write timeout never occurs, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,TO=ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  XON Parameter

Sets automatic transmit flow control. This mode of operation involves receiving
special characters in order to control the flow of data. ON allows and OFF
prevents automatic transmit flow control.  The default mode is XON=OFF.  If
this parameter is not specified, its current value is unchanged.

To prevent automatic transmit flow control, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,XON=OFF


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  IDSR Parameter

Sets input handshaking using 'data set ready' (DSR).  ON allows and OFF
prevents input handshaking using 'data set ready' (DSR).  The default mode is
IDSR=OFF.  If this parameter is not specified, its current value is unchanged.

To allow input handshaking using DSR, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,IDSR=ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  ODSR Parameter

Sets output handshaking using 'data set ready' (DSR).  ON allows and OFF
prevents output handshaking using 'data set ready' (DSR).  The default mode is
ODSR=OFF.  If this parameter is not specified, its current value is unchanged.

To allow output handshaking using DSR, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,ODSR=ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  OCTS Parameter

Sets output handshaking using 'clear to send' (CTS).  ON allows and OFF
prevents output handshaking using 'clear to send' (CTS).  The default mode is
OCTS=OFF.  If this parameter is not specified, its current value is unchanged.

To allow output handshaking using CTS, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,OCTS=ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  DTR Parameter

Sets 'data terminal ready' (DTR).  ON allows 'data terminal ready' (DTR), OFF
prevents DTR, and HS allows input handshaking using DTR.  The default mode is
DTR=ON. If this parameter is not specified, its current value is unchanged.

To allow data terminal ready, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,DTR=ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  RTS Parameter

Sets 'request to send' (RTS).  ON allows 'request to send' (RTS), OFF prevents
RTS, HS allows input handshaking using RTS, and TOG allows RTS toggling on
transmit mode.  The default mode is RTS=ON.  If this parameter is not
specified, its current value is unchanged.

To allow RTS toggling in transmit mode, enter the following:

MODE COM1,,,,,RTS=TOG


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  BUFFER Parameter

Sets extended hardware buffering.  The values are ON, OFF, and AUTO.

ON enables extended hardware buffering.  This setting permits maximum device
performance but may not be compatible with devices that require strict timing
of events.

OFF disables extended hardware buffering.  This is the default setting when the
MODE command is issued to a serial port that does not support extended hardware
buffering.

AUTO sets the device driver to run in automatic protocol-override mode. This
setting adjusts device-driver parameters, depending on the state of these
device-driver protocols:

o Output handshaking using CTS (Clear to Send) or DSR (Data Set Ready)
o Input sensitivity using DSR
o Automatic Transmit Flow Control (XON)

To permit maximum device performance, enter the following:

MODE COM1:12,,,,BUFFER=AUTO


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  CONx Parameter

Specifies the display number that the current MODE command is being directed
towards.  This parameter is designed for use on systems using more than one
display.  Once the command has been issued, the CONx parameter does not have to
be issued unless the next MODE command is going to address another display.  If
your system has only one display, you do not need to use the CONx parameter

To set a mode on display number 1:

MODE CON1

To set a mode on display number 2:

MODE CON2

Here are some examples using the CONx parameter:

Set a color 80x43 mode on display number 1:

MODE CON1 CO80,43

Set a monochrome mode on display number 2:

MODE CON2 MONO

Set a color 80x50 mode on the first base video handler (BVH) display in the
list that it supports:

MODE CON0 CO80,50
or

MODE CON CO80,50

The exception to the rule occurs if the MODE command is entered using the CONx
parameter prior to issuing the preceding example.  If that occurs, the MODE
command will be targeted to the display the CONx parameter was last directed
to.

The number used to designate the display number is based upon the order that
the BVH displays are specified in the system's CONFIG.SYS file on the SET
VIDEO_DEVICES= line.

Support for CONx is restricted to OS/2 full-screen sessions only and does not
have any effect on DOS or OS/2 window sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  Display Parameter

Specifies the display mode.  The options are: 40, 80, 132, BW40, BW80, BW132,
CO40, CO80, CO132, or MONO. The values 40, 80, and 132 specify a display width
in number of characters per line.  CO and BW refer to a color graphics monitor
adapter with color (CO) or without (BW). MONO specifies the monochrome mode,
which always has a display of 80 characters per line.  The 132-character width
is supported only by monitors with the XGA video adapter.

VIO window sessions support only 80-column modes.

To switch the active display adapter to the color graphics monitor adapter,
enter the following:

MODE CO40


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  Rows Parameter

Specifies the number of rows to select.  Valid values are 25, 43, or 50,
depending on the display adapter attached.  For example, with an enhanced
display adapter, you can specify a 43-line display:

MODE CO80,43

If the rows parameter is not specified, the value does not change.  The initial
value for rows is 25. The default is the last value you entered.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  LPT# or PRN Parameter

Specifies the printer number.  The pound sign (#) defines printer number 1, 2,
or 3. PRN is an acceptable device name for LPT1.

If you are using a network printer, the MODE command supports LPT4 through LPT9
for printing to a network printer.

To set up your printer as LPT1 and accept the system defaults (80 characters
per line and 6 lines per vertical inch), enter the following:

MODE LPT1 ,,,


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  Chars Parameter

Specifies the characters per line. The value is either 80 or 132. The default
is 80.

To set up your printer as LPT2 and use 132 characters per line and 8 lines per
inch, enter the following:

MODE LPT2 132,8,,


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  Lines Parameter

Specifies the lines per inch of vertical spacing. The value is either 6 or 8.
The default is 6.

To set up your printer as LPT2 and specify 8 lines per inch for vertical
spacing, enter the following:

MODE LPT2 ,8,,


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  P Parameter

Tells MODE to continuously try to send output to the printer if a timeout error
occurs.

To set up your printer as LPT2 and specify infinite retry, enter the following:

MODE LPT2 ,,P


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODE Command:  State Parameter

Sets diskette verification ON or OFF.  VER=ON turns on diskette verification;
VER=OFF turns off diskette verification.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MOVE Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

The source drive is always the same as the target drive.  If no path is
specified for the target file, MOVE uses the current directory.

The first file specified is the source file.  The second file is the target
file.  If the second parameter is a directory, files are moved into that
directory and their names are not changed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PATCH Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

With no options entered, specifies the name of the file to be patched
interactively.

With the /A option (applying a patch automatically), specifies the name of the
file containing the instructions for patching one or more files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PATCH Command:  /A Parameter

Specifies automatic mode.  In this mode, the filename parameter refers to a
file that contains instructions for patching one or more files.  If /A is not
specified, interactive mode is assumed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PATH Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drives and directories to be searched.

To search the MEMOS subdirectory on drive A and then search the REPORTS
directory on drive C, enter the following:

PATH A:\MEMOS;C:\REPORTS

You can use the current path to .CMD or batch files (in OS/2 sessions) as a
replaceable parameter.  Assume you want to add the path to the ABC subdirectory
on drive A to the existing path known to CMD.EXE.  Enter the following:

PATH %PATH%;A:\ABC


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PAUSE Command:  Comment Parameter

Specifies a comment to be displayed during the pause in processing.  It is
displayed in a batch file only if ECHO is ON.

To suspend processing of your commands in a batch file so that you can change
diskettes, type the following in your batch file:

ECHO CHANGE DISKETTE IN DRIVE A
PAUSE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PAUSEONERROR Command:  YES and NO Parameters

YES causes the system to pause.  If errors have been detected in the CONFIG.SYS
file, the system pauses before starting the specified user interface or command
processor and displays a prompt. Processing does not continue until you press
Enter.

NO prevents the system from pausing before starting the user interface or
command processor.

If if there is not a PAUSEONERROR statement in the CONFIG.SYS file, the default
is true, and PAUSEONERROR is equal to YES.

To pause the screen and read any error messages generated during the processing
of the CONFIG.SYS file, enter the following:

PAUSEONERROR=YES


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PICVIEW Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the drive, directory, and name of the picture file to be viewed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PICVIEW Command:  /P Parameter

Sends the specified picture file to be printed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PICVIEW Command:  /S Parameter

Specifies that the Picture Viewer window is to return to the default position
on the screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PMREXX Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the drive, directory, and file name of the .CMD file to be displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PMREXX Command:  Arguments Parameter

Specifies the arguments that are indicated in REXX programs, such as other OS/2
commands or environment variables to be displayed as output by PMREXX.

To display the current PATH and DPATH statements in the CONFIG.SYS file that
you have indicated in the REXX program, SAMPLE.CMD, enter the following:

PMREXX Sample PATH DPATH


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PRINT Command:  /D:device Parameter

Specifies the print device.  If not specified, the default device is LPT1. The
acceptable device names are PRN, LPT1, LPT2, and LPT3.

If you are using a network printer, the PRINT command supports LPT4 through
LPT9 for printing to a network printer.

To print a file named C:\LISTING\REPORT.STA on the LPT2 print device, enter the
following:

PRINT /D:LPT2 C:\LISTING\REPORT.STA


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PRINT Command:  /B Parameter

Prevents Ctrl+Z characters in the file from being interpreted as end-of-file
indicators.  The entire file is printed as is, without end-of-file character
(Ctrl+Z) processing.

To prevent Ctrl+Z characters from being interpreted as end-of-file characters
when a file named LISTING prints, enter the following:

PRINT /B LISTING


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PRINT Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the complete name of the file to be printed, including the drive and
directory where the file is located.

To print a file named REPORTS in the current directory, enter the following:

PRINT REPORTS

A file name is not required when using the /C and /T parameters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PRINT Command:  /C Parameter

Cancels the file that is currently printing if spooling is active for the
specified device. The /C parameter works only in OS/2 sessions.

To cancel the file that is currently printing on LPT1 (the default print
device), enter the following:

PRINT /C


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PRINT Command:  /T Parameter

Cancels all files waiting to be printed and the job currently printing if
spooling is active for the specified device. The /T parameter works only in
OS/2 sessions.

To cancel all files in the LPT2 print queue and any file currently printing,
enter the following:

PRINT /D:LPT2 /T


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PRINTMONBUFSIZE Command:  x Parameter

Specifies the size of the parallel-port device-driver buffer.  Each x
corresponds to LPT1, LPT2, and LPT3 character monitor buffer size (in bytes)
respectively.  The minimum value permitted is 134 and the maximum value is
2048.  If you specify a value that is outside the valid range, a default value
of 134 is used.

To set the parallel-port device-driver buffer size for LPT1 as 2048 bytes, for
LPT2 as 134 bytes, and for LPT3 as 134 bytes, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

PRINTMONBUFSIZE=2048,134,134


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PRIORITY Command:  ABSOLUTE and DYNAMIC Parameters

DYNAMIC performs dynamic calculation of priorities to support a system boost
for foreground input/output, that is, system priority for the foreground.  This
is the default.

ABSOLUTE performs no calculation.  There is no system-applied boost for
foreground when this parameter is specified, that is, foreground equals
background with no system priority for the foreground.  Only the applicaton can
adjust the priority of the threads.

To change the PRIORITY statement so the OS/2 operating system varies the
priorities of threads as they are running, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS
file and restart your system:

PRIORITY=DYNAMIC

To change the PRIORITY statement so the OS/2 operating system does not vary the
priorities of threads as they are running, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS
file:

PRIORITY=ABSOLUTE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PRIORITY_DISK_IO Command:  YES and NO Parameters

YES specifies that applications running in the foreground are to receive
priority for disk access over applications running in the background.

NO specifies that all applications (foreground and background) are to be
treated equally with regard to disk access.  The default is YES.

To specify that applications in the foreground are to receive priority for disk
access, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

PRIORITY_DISK_IO=YES

To specify that all applications (foreground and background) are to be treated
equally with regard to disk access, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

PRIORITY_DISK_IO=NO


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PROMPT Command:  Text Parameter
The system command prompt can contain any of the following special characters.
You must precede each character with a dollar sign ($):

$     The $ character
_     A carriage-return line-feed sequence
A     The & character
B     The | character
C     The ( character
D     The current date
E     ASCII code 27 (escape)
F     The ) character
G     The > character
H     The backspace symbol
I     The help line
L     The < character
N     The default drive
P     The current directory of the default drive
Q     The = character
R     The return code
S     A space character
T     The current time
V     The version number


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PROTECTONLY Command:  NO and YES Parameters

Selects both DOS and OS/2 operating environments (NO), or selects OS/2 sessions
only (YES).  The default is NO.

To set up your system for OS/2 sessions only, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

PROTECTONLY=YES

To set up your system for both OS/2 and DOS sessions, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

PROTECTONLY=NO


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PROTSHELL Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the drive, directory location, and complete name of the file,
including its extension, that contains the user interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PROTSHELL Command:  Arguments Parameter

Specifies the parameters required by the user interface. The standard OS/2 user
interface requires the name of the Presentation Manager* configuration file,
the name of the Presentation Manager program file, and the name of the OS/2
command processor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PSTAT Command:  /C Parameter

Displays the current process and thread-related information on the system. For
each process, displays the following:

o Process ID
o Parent process ID
o Session ID
o Process name

For each thread, displays the following:

o Thread ID
o Thread state
o Thread priority
o Block ID


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PSTAT Command:  /S Parameter

Displays system-semaphore information for each thread.  For each thread,
displays the following:

o Process module name
o Process ID
o Session
o Index
o Number of references
o Number of requests
o Flag
o Name of the system semaphore


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PSTAT Command:  /L Parameter

Displays the dynamic-link libraries for each process.

o Process module name
o Process ID
o Session ID
o Library list


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PSTAT Command:  /M Parameter

Displays shared information for each process.

o Handle
o Selector
o Number of references
o Name of the shared memory


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PSTAT Command:  /P:pid Parameter

Displays information related to the ID of the specified process.

o Process ID
o Parent process ID
o Session ID
o Process module name
o Dynamic-link libraries
o Shared memory data

For each thread associated with the process, displays the following:

o Thread ID
o Thread priority
o Thread status
o Block ID
o Semaphore information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RECOVER Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the complete name of the file to be recovered.  You can recover one
or more files.

To recover a file named LETTER.TXT in the root directory of drive A, enter the
following:

RECOVER A:\LETTER.TXT

To recover all the files on drive A, enter the following:

RECOVER A:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

REM Command:  Comment Parameter

Contains any string of up to 123 characters.

To display REM and the remark, THIS IS AN INVENTORY PROGRAM, from within a
batch file, type the following:

REM THIS IS AN INVENTORY PROGRAM

To prevent the OS/2 operating system from interpreting the piping symbol (|),
enclose it in double quotes.

REM USE DOUBLE QUOTES "|" DIR


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RENAME Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the file to be renamed (filename1) and specifies the new filename
(filename2).  The filename may also be the name of a directory you want to
rename. Specify a path only with the first directory name (filename1
parameter). Do not use the global file-name characters (* and ?) when renaming
a directory.

To change the name of a file from MEMOS to LETTERS in the current directory on
the current drive, enter the following:

REN MEMOS LETTERS

To change the extension of all files in the current directory of the current
drive from .OLD to .NEW, enter the following:

REN *.OLD *.NEW

To rename a program named MY.COM in the LEVEL1 subdirectory on drive B to
YOUR.COM, enter the following:

REN B:\LEVEL1\MY.COM YOUR.COM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

REPLACE Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the file from the source drive and directory that is to replace a
file on the target drive and directory.

To replace the LETTERS file on drive A with the LETTERS file on drive C, enter
the following:

REPLACE C:LETTERS A:

You can also use the global characters * and ? when specifying a file name.

To replace all files on drive C that have an extension of .EXE with files from
drive A that have the same file name and extension, enter the following:

REPLACE A:*.EXE C:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

REPLACE Command:  /A Parameter

Copies all files specified by the source that do not exist on the target.  This
allows you to add files to the target without overwriting the files that
already exist on the target. You cannot use /A and /S together.

To copy all files from the current directory on drive C (that do not exist on
drive A) to drive A, without overwriting the files that currently exist on
drive A, enter the following:

REPLACE C:*.* A: /A


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

REPLACE Command:  /S Parameter

Searches all directories of the target drive and path for the files matching
the file name specified. If only the target drive is specified, the default
path is assumed. You cannot use /A and /S together.

To replace the files found in all directories of drive C with files matching
the source file name of YEARLY in the current directory on drive A, enter the
following:

REPLACE A:YEARLY C:\ /S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

REPLACE Command:  /P Parameter

Prompts you as each file is encountered on the target. This allows you to
selectively replace or add files.

To be prompted with (Y/N?) before replacing each file from the root directory
on drive C to the root directory on drive A, enter the following:

REPLACE C:\*.* A:\ /P


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

REPLACE Command:  /R Parameter

Replaces files that are read-only on the target.

To replace all files on drive C (including read-only files) with files of the
same name from drive A, enter the following:

REPLACE A:*.* C: /R


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

REPLACE Command:  /W Parameter

Waits for you to insert a diskette before beginning to search for source files.

To replace the LETTERS file on drive A with the LETTERS file on drive C, and
have the system wait for you to insert a diskette before searching for source
files, enter the following:

REPLACE C:LETTERS A: /W


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

REPLACE Command:  /U Parameter

Updates only those files on the target drive that are older than those on the
source drive.  You cannot use the /A and /U parameters together.

To replace all files on drive C named LETTER.FMT with a new LETTER.FMT file
from drive A, enter the following:

REPLACE A:LETTER.FMT C:\ /U  /S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

REPLACE Command:  /F Parameter

Causes REPLACE to fail if the source file contains extended attributes and the
destination file system does not support extended attributes. If the /F
parameter is not specified, REPLACE will succeed if the source file contains
extended attributes and the destination file system does not support them.  The
extended attributes are not copied. If the /F parameter is not specified and
the source file contains needed extended attributes, REPLACE will fail if the
destination file system does not support extended attributes.  In this
instance, a message appears.

Assume you want to replace a file named REPORTS.TXT to the STATUS directory on
drive D.  You also want REPLACE to fail if drive D does not support extended
attributes.  Enter the following:

REPLACE REPORTS.TXT D:\STATUS /F


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RESTORE Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Source drive specifies the drive that contains the files you backed up.  The
target drive and path specify the location to which you want the files
restored.

To restore a file named MONDAY to the REPORTS subdirectory on drive C from the
backup diskette in drive A, enter the following:

RESTORE A: C:\REPORTS\MONDAY


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RESTORE Command:  /P Parameter

Prompts for permission to restore any files on the target disk that match the
file specification and are read-only or that have changed since they were last
backed up.

In the following example, assume that the backup diskette is in drive A and you
are restoring to the current directory in drive C.  To be prompted with (Y/N)?
before restoring any read-only file or file changed since the last time you did
a backup, enter the following:

RESTORE A: C:*.* /P


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RESTORE Command:  /M Parameter

Restores only those files on the target disk that have been modified since the
last backup.

To restore files that were changed or deleted since they were last backed up,
enter the following:

RESTORE A: C:*.* /M


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RESTORE Command:  /B:mm-dd-yy Parameter

Restores only those files on the target disk last modified on or before the
given date.

To restore all files changed on or before November 12, 1988, type the following
(using the current date format):

RESTORE A: C: /B:11-12-88


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RESTORE Command:  /A:mm-dd-yy Parameter

Restores only those files on the target disk last modified on or after the
given date.

To restore all files changed on or after November 12, 1988, type the following
(using the current date format):

RESTORE A: C: /A:11-12-88


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RESTORE Command:  /E:hh:mm:ss Parameter

Restores only those files on the target disk last modified before the given
time.

To restore only those files that were changed at or earlier than 11:45 a.m.,
enter the following:

RESTORE A: C: /E:11:45:00


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RESTORE Command:  /L:hh:mm:ss Parameter

Restores only those files on the target disk that were last modified at or
after the given time.

To restore only those files that were changed at or later than 11:45 a.m.,
enter the following:

RESTORE A: C: /L:11:45:00


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RESTORE Command:  /S Parameter

Restores any subdirectories from the backup diskette to the target disk if they
do not exist on the target disk.

To restore all files (including subdirectories) on the backup diskettes in
drive A to drive C, enter the following:

RESTORE A: C:\*.* /S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RESTORE Command:  /N Parameter

Restores any files from the backup diskette to the target disk that do not
exist on the target disk.

To restore files that no longer exist on the target drive, enter the following:

RESTORE A: C: /N


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RESTORE Command:  /F Parameter

Causes RESTORE to fail if the source file contains extended attributes and the
destination file system does not support extended attributes. If the /F
parameter is not specified, RESTORE will succeed if the source file contains
extended attributes and the destination file system does not support them.  The
extended attributes are not copied. If the /F parameter is not specified and
the source file contains needed extended attributes, RESTORE will fail if the
destination file system does not support extended attributes.  In this
instance, a message appears.

Assume you want to restore a file named REPORTS.TXT to the STATUS directory on
drive D.  You also want RESTORE to fail if drive D does not support extended
attributes.  Enter the following:

RESTORE REPORTS.TXT D:\STATUS /F


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RESTORE Command:  /D Parameter

Displays a list of files on the backup disk that matches the files specified in
filename without restoring any files.

To display the files on the backup disk that match the files that were backed
up by the BACKUP command without restoring them, enter the following:

RESTORE /D


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RD Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the directory to be removed.  You can:

o Remove a subdirectory from a root directory
o Remove a subdirectory from within another directory
o Remove more than one directory (OS/2 sessions only)

To remove a subdirectory named REPORTS from your root directory on the current
drive, delete all the files and subdirectories within REPORTS, and enter the
following:

RD \REPORTS

To remove a subdirectory named ANNUAL within a subdirectory REPORTS, which is
in the root directory on the current drive, enter the following:

RD \REPORTS\ANNUAL

To remove the subdirectory REPORTS from the SALES directory and the
subdirectory PROGS from the ACCT directory (OS/2 sessions only), enter the
following:

RD \SALES\REPORTS \ACCT\PROGS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RMSIZE Command:  x Parameter

Specifies a number from 0 through 640, representing a multiple of 1024 bytes.

To set the size of the DOS environment to 512KB, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

RMSIZE=512


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RUN Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the complete name of the file, including its extension, that contains
the system program you want to run.

To run a system checkout program named MARY.EXE located in the UTILS directory,
type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file.

RUN=C:\UTILS\MARY.EXE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RUN Command:  Arguments Parameter

Specifies information that you want to pass to the program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RUN Command:  Drive and Path Parameter

Specifies the drive and path of the LOGDAEM.EXE program.

The default drive and path of LOGDAEM.EXE is C:\OS2\SYSTEM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RUN=LOGDAEM.EXE Command:  /E:filename Parameter

Specifies the path and file name of the local error-log file.

To specify C:\OS2\SYSTEM as the path for the error-log file LOG0001.DAT, type
the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

RUN=C:\OS2\SYSTEM\LOGDAEM.EXE /E:C:\OS2\SYSTEM\LOG0001.DAT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RUN=LOGDAEM.EXE Command:  /W:x Parameter

Sets the size of the error logging file to a specified size (x) in KB.  The
default is 64KB, the minimum is 4KB.  If an error-log file does not already
exist and you do not supply a /W parameter, then an error-log file will be
started with a length of 64KB.

The error-logging service adds entries to the error-log file until the file is
filled.  Any new entries are then added in a circular fashion; that is, the
oldest entries are discarded to make room for the new ones.

To set the size of the error-log file, LOG0001.DAT, with the path C:\OS2\SYSTEM
to 32KB, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

RUN=C:\OS2\SYSTEM\LOGDAEM.EXE /E:C:\OS2\SYSTEM\LOG0001.DAT /W:32


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SET Command:  String1 Parameter

Name of a system variable or replaceable parameter. Do not use any of these
characters in string:  =  >   <   |


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SET Command:  String2 Parameter

Value you want to assign to the system variable or replaceable parameter. Do
not use any of these characters in string:  =  >   <   |


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SETBOOT Command:  /T:x Parameter

Sets the timeout value of the Boot Manager menu timer.

The value of x is the time in seconds that the Boot Manager menu will remain
displayed before the default system starts.

A specified value of 0 seconds bypasses the menu entirely, starting the default
system immediately without intervention.

To set the Boot Manager selection timer to 15 seconds, type the following:

SETBOOT /T:15


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SETBOOT Command:  /T:NO Parameter

Disables the Boot Manager selection timer.  When you specify NO as the timeout
value, the timer is disabled leaving the Boot Manager menu displayed until you
make a selection.

To disable the Boot Manager selection timer, type the following:

SETBOOT /T:NO


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SETBOOT Command:  /M:m Parameter

Sets the mode for the Boot Manager menu.

m = n  sets normal mode
m = a  sets advanced mode

:n sets the mode to display only the aliases of the partitions that are able to
be selected; :a sets the mode to display additional information that is
displayed in the advanced mode of the Boot Manager menu.

To set the normal mode for the Boot Manager menu, type the following:

SETBOOT /M:n

To set the Boot Manager menu to advanced mode, type the following:

SETBOOT /M:a


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SETBOOT Command:  /Q Parameter

Queries the currently set startup environment.  Returns the default partition
alias, timeout value, mode, system index, and alias assigned to each system
index.  A system index of 0 indicates attended mode.  Any other system index
indicates unattended mode.

To query the current startup environment, type the following:

SETBOOT /Q


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SETBOOT Command:  /B Parameter

Performs an orderly shutdown of the file system buffers and caches and then
restarts the system.

To shutdown the file system buffers and caches and then restart the system,
type the following:

SETBOOT /B


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SETBOOT Command:  /IBA:n Parameter

Enables SETBOOT to perform a shutdown of the file system buffers and caches and
then allows your computer to be restarted from the system called n (name).  The
Boot Manager menu is bypassed.  To restart your computer from MYOS2, type the
following:

SETBOOT /IBA:MYOS2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SETBOOT Command:  /IBD:d Parameter

Enables SETBOOT to perform a shutdown of the file system buffers and caches and
then allows your computer to be restarted from the system residing in logical
drive d where d is a drive letter.  The Boot Manager menu is bypassed.  To
restart your computer from drive F, type the following:

SETBOOT /IBD:F


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SETBOOT Command:  /X:x Parameter

Sets the system startup index to indicate the partition to be started.  The
value x may be set from 0 to 3.

The Boot Manager will start the partition corresponding to the index.  It then
decreases this value by 1 while the value is greater than 1.  If you do not set
this value before you start the system again, then the Boot Manager will start
a different partition.

A value of 0 sets the Boot Manager to attended mode and provides for a default
system selection.

A value of 1 to 3 in this index puts the Boot Manager in unattended mode.  In
this case, all attended mode functions are bypassed, including the Boot Manager
menu.  This feature is provided as a mechanism that unattended mode can use to
implement a fallback startup sequence; that is, if a system fails to get to
your program to set the index, the subsequent startup would try to start the
next fallback system and so on.

To set the startup index to put Boot Manager in attended mode, type the
following:

SETBOOT /X:0

To set the startup index to put the Boot Manager in unattended mode, type the
following:

SETBOOT /X:3


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SETBOOT Command:  /N:name Parameter

Sets the partition or logical drive specified by the alias name and its
corresponding index value as the operating system to be started.

Up to four pair-combinations can be given, one for each index value, 0 to 3. An
alias is case-sensitive, and if it contains blanks, the /N parameter:name pair
must be enclosed in quotation marks.

The following shows you the number values for N:

N = 0 assigns the specified alias as the default operating system.
N = 1 to 3 specifies the alias to be started when the corresponding index is
chosen to start.

To specify the logical drive with the alias MYSYSTEM as the default operating
system to be started, type the following:

SETBOOT /0:MYSYSTEM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SHELL Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the complete name of the file, including its extension, that contains
the DOS command processor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SHELL Command:  Arguments Parameter

Specifies the parameters of your command processor.  If you are using
COMMAND.COM as your command processor, any parameters of COMMAND.COM can be
used as SHELL statement arguments.

To install COMMAND.COM as the command processor, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

SHELL=C:\OS2\MDOS\COMMAND.COM C:\OS2\MDOS /P


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SORT Command:  /R Parameter

Reverses the sort; that is, sorts from Z through A.

To sort a file named BOOK1 in reverse order and write the output to a file
named REV, enter the following:

SORT /R <BOOK1 >REV


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SORT Command:  /+n Parameter

Sorts starting with column n, where n is some number.  If you do not specify
this parameter, SORT begins sorting from column 1.

To sort a file named BOOK1 starting at column 1, and send the output to your
screen, enter the following:

SORT <BOOK1

To sort a file named CALENDAR.88, starting at column 7, type the following:

SORT /+7 <CALENDAR.88


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SPOOL Command:  /D:device Parameter

Specifies the input device. This is the device the application program uses for
printing. Acceptable parallel device names are PRN, LPT1, LPT2, and LPT3.  If
not specified, the default device is LPT1.  Serial devices cannot be specified
as input devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SPOOL Command:  /O:device Parameter

Specifies the output device. This is the actual device to which output from the
application program is to be sent. If this parameter is not specified, the
default is the same as the input device. COM1 through COM4 can be specified as
output devices when a device is attached to the serial port. Acceptable
parallel device names include PRN, LPT1, LPT2, and LPT3.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SPOOL Command:  /Q Parameter

Queries existing device redirections.  /Q specifies to display the current
device redirection selections.  The default setup, if no previous redirection
has been specified, is to have each input device directed to its corresponding
output device (that is, LPT1 directed to LPT1, LPT2 directed to LPT2, and so
on).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

START Command:  "Program Title" Parameter

Specifies the title you want for your program, which is displayed in the
Startup folder. The program title must be enclosed in double quotation marks
and cannot exceed 60 bytes.

If you do not specify program title, the file name of your program is displayed
in the Startup folder.

The use of a double-byte (DBCS) character counts as two bytes. If a title is
longer than 60 bytes, it is shortened.  DBCS means a set of characters in which
each character is represented by two bytes.  Languages such as Japanese,
Chinese, and Korean, which contain more characters than can be represented by
256 code points, require double-byte character sets.  As each character
requires two bytes, the entering, displaying, and printing of DBCS characters
requires hardware and software that can support DBCS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

START Command:  /K Parameter

Indicates to start the program indirectly through the command processor,
CMD.EXE, and to keep the session when the program has finished. If the
application is a Presentation Manager application, the default is /N;
otherwise, the default is /K.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

START Command:  /C Parameter

Indicates to start the program indirectly through the command processor,
CMD.EXE, and end the session when the command is complete.  If the session
created by the START command is displayed when the command ends, the system
determines which session to display next.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

START Command:  /N Parameter

Indicates to start the program directly without invoking the command processor,
CMD.EXE. Do not enclose the command in quotation marks.  The command you
specify cannot be an internal command or a batch file.

To start XCOPY directly without invoking the CMD.EXE command processor, copy
the complete contents of the root directory on drive C to drive A, and display
XCOPY C-A as the program title, type the following:

START "XCOPY C-A" /N XCOPY C:\ A:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

START Command:  /F Parameter

Makes the program the foreground session. If this parameter is not specified,
the program becomes a background session. If the /FS, /WIN or /PM parameter is
specified, the program becomes the foreground session.

To run the XCOPY command in the foreground session, enter the following:

START "XCOPY C-A" /F XCOPY C:\ A:\


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The START command:  /PGM parameter.

START interprets a quoted string as the name of the program to be executed.
For example, assume you use a program named MY EDITOR.  You can start the MY
EDITOR program and use the default title, or you can start MY EDITOR and give
it a different name.

To start MY EDITOR without specifying a title, enter the following:

START /PGM "MY EDITOR"

To start MY EDITOR and give it a title, enter the following:

START "MY FAVORITE EDITOR" /PGM "MY EDITOR"

The name MY FAVORITE EDITOR would appear on the Window List, rather than the
name of the program, MY EDITOR.

If the /PGM parameter is not used, START interprets the first quoted string as
the name of a user-supplied title, and the second quoted string as the command
to be passed to another session that is running CMD.EXE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

START Command:  /FS Parameter

Indicates that this application is a full-screen DOS or OS/2 application that
must run in a separate session independent of Presentation Manager.

To start the XCOPY command in a full-screen session and copy the files from
drive A to drive B, enter the following:

START "XCOPY A-B" /FS XCOPY A:\ B:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

START Command:  /WIN Parameter

Indicates that this is an OS/2 application that runs within an OS/2 or DOS
window.

To start a batch file named CRAYON.CMD in an OS/2 window session, enter the
following:

START /WIN CRAYON.CMD

To start a batch file named MYFILE.BAT in a DOS window session, enter the
following:

START /WIN MYFILE.BAT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

START Command:  /PM Parameter

Indicates that this application is a Presentation Manager application.

To start the CRAYON.EXE program to run as a Presentation Manager program, enter
the following:

START "CRAYON GAME" /PM CRAYON.EXE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

START Command:  /DOS Parameter

Starts the program as a DOS program. Useful for forcing FAPI or BOUND
applications to run in a DOS session.  To start a COMMAND.COM session, enter
the following:

START /DOS

To start a COMMAND.COM session in a window, enter the following:

START /WIN /DOS

To start a full-screen COMMAND.COM session, enter the following:

START /FS /DOS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

START Command:  /MAX Parameter

Requests that a Presentation Manager (PM) or any window application starts in a
maximized state.  It has no effect for full screen.  A PM application may
choose not to honor the request.

To start a Presentation Manager or any window application in a maximized state,
enter the following:

START /MAX


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

START Command:  /MIN Parameter

Requests that a Presentation Manager (PM) or any window application starts in a
minimized (icon) state.  This has no effect for full screen.  A PM application
may choose not to honor the request.

To start a Presentation Manager or any  window application in a minimized
(icon) state, enter the following:

START /MIN


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

START Command:  /B Parameter

Requests that an application be started in a background session.

To start the XCOPY command in a background session, enter the following:

START "XCOPY C-A" /B XCOPY C:\ A:\


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

START Command:  /I Parameter

Causes the new session to inherit the environment defined by the SET statements
in the CONFIG.SYS file instead of the CMD.EXE environment of the current
session.

To start the ACCT.EXE program to run as a full-screen program and cause the new
session to inherit the environment defined by the SET statements in the
CONFIG.SYS file, enter the following:

START "ACCOUNT" /FS /I ACCT.EXE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

START Command:  Command and Command Inputs Parameters

Specifies an OS/2 internal or external command, a .CMD batch file, or any OS/2
program you want to pass to the command processor you are starting.

Command inputs are arguments for the command you requested.

To start XCOPY in a new OS/2 session, copy the complete contents of the root
directory on drive C to the root directory on drive A, and display XCOPY C-A as
the program title, enter the following:

START "XCOPY C-A" XCOPY C:\ A:\


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SUBST Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive letter you want to substitute for the drive and path that
follow.

To substitute the drive letter G for the path C:\OS2\OS2.DTP, enter the
following:

SUBST G: C:\OS2\OS2.DTP

You can now enter DIR G: instead of entering DIR C:\OS2\OS2.DTP.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SUBST Command:  /D Parameter

Deletes a substituted drive and path.

To delete substitutions currently in effect on drive G, enter the following:

SUBST G: /D


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SWAPPATH Command:  Drive and Path Parameter

Specifies the location of the swap file.

To store the swap file in the C:\OS2\SYSTEM directory, type the following in
the CONFIG.SYS file:

SWAPPATH=C:\OS2\SYSTEM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SWAPPATH Command:  Minfree Parameter

Specifies the amount of disk space in KB at which point the system will begin
to warn you that the swap file has increased to a size that leaves less than
this amount of free space remaining on the disk.  This means that the OS/2
operating system will not stop increasing the size of the swap file when the
minfree value is reached, but will warn you that you are running out of disk
space.  The default value for all systems regardless of the amount of physical
memory is 2048KB.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SWAPPATH Command:  Initial Parameter

Specifies the size of the swap file initially allocated by the operating system
at time of installation.  This value is variable and depends on the amount of
physical memory in the system.

You can modify the initial size of the swap file up to the size of the free
space on the partition containing the swap file.  You must, however, leave
space on the partition equal to the minfree value.  For example, to specify
18MB as the initial size of a swap file on a partition with 20MB of free space
and a minfree value of 2MB, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

SWAPPATH=C:\OS2\SYSTEM 2048 18432

The following table displays the initial default size of the swap file for
systems with the indicated physical memory:

Memory              Initial Size

4MB                 6144KB

5MB                 5120KB

6MB                 5120KB

7MB                 4096KB

8MB                 4096KB

9MB                 3072KB

10MB                3072KB

11MB                2048KB

12MB                2048KB

Note:   If a system does not have at least 4MB of memory, the size of the swap
        file defaults to 1MB and increases as needed.

The default statement in the CONFIG.SYS file for the initial size of a swap
file on a system with 8MB of physical memory would be:

SWAPPATH=C:\OS2\SYSTEM 2048 4096


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SYSLOG Command:  /S Parameter

Suspends error logging of entries into the system.

To suspend error logging, type the following:

SYSLOG /S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SYSLOG Command:  /R Parameter

Resumes error logging of entries into the system.

To resume error logging, type the following:

SYSLOG /R


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SYSLOG Command:  /P:pathname Parameter

Redirects the current error-log file to the file specified in your path
statement.

To redirect the current error-log file to the file LOG0001.DAT in the path
C:\OS2\SYSTEM, type the following:

SYSLOG /P:C:\OS2\SYSTEM\LOG0001.DAT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SYSLOG Command:  /W:x Parameter

Sets the size of the new error-log file to a specified size (x) in KB.  The
default is 64KB, the minimum is 4KB.  If an error-log file does not already
exist and you do not supply a /W parameter, then a new error-log file will be
started with a length of 64KB.

You cannot decrease the size of an existing log file or increase the size of a
log file that has already wrapped.  You can, however, increase the size of a
log file that has not yet wrapped.

To set the size of a new error-log file named LOG0001.DAT, with the path
C:\OS2\SYSTEM, to 32KB, type the following:

SYSLOG /P:C:\OS2\SYSTEM\LOG0001.DAT /W:32


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

THREADS Command:  x Parameter

Specifies a number from 64 through 4095.  This is also the minimum number of
threads allowed in the system.

Because each thread specified uses resident memory, the value of x should be
made as small as possible (about 50% larger than the number of threads expected
to be used) for small memory configurations.  For example, if you expect to run
50 threads, set this value to 75.

To have the system handle up to 512 active threads, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

THREADS=512


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TIME Command:  Hours, Minutes, Seconds Parameters

hh    Specifies the hours.  The new hours must be entered using 0 to 23 only.

mm    Specifies the minutes. The new minutes must be entered using 0 to 59
      only.

ss    Specifies the seconds. The new seconds must be entered using 0 to 59
      only.

cc    Specifies the hundredths of seconds. The new hundredths of seconds must
      be entered using 0 to 99 only.

To enter or change the time in the system to 8:20 a.m. without being prompted
by the system, enter the following:

TIME 8:20


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TIMESLICE Command:  x Parameter

Selects the maximum amount of time in milliseconds to be applied for a system
boost (for example, for input/output).  This value must be an integer greater
than, or equal to, 32.  The value x has no meaning if the PRIORITY=ABSOLUTE
statement is specified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TIMESLICE Command:  y Parameter

Selects the maximum TIMESLICE value in milliseconds.  This value must be an
integer greater than or equal to the minimum value, and less than 65536.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACE Command:  ON and OFF Parameters

Controls dynamic and static trace points from the OS/2 command prompt.

o If the OFF parameter is used by itself, removes all dynamic and static trace
  points.

o If the ON parameter is used by itself, turns on all static trace points.

To turn on all static trace points, enter the following:

TRACE ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACE Command:  ON and OFF Parameters

Sets up the Trace facility in the CONFIG.SYS file. If you do not specify a
TRACE or TRACEBUF statement in the CONFIG.SYS file, there is no trace buffer
and tracing is not available.

To trace all static system events, type the following in the CONFIG.SYS file:

TRACE=ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACE Command:  Major Code Spec Parameter

Specifies a decimal value between 0 and 255 that represents the major event
code to be set for static tracing.  Minor codes associated with major codes can
be specified to achieve greater granularity in tracing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACE Command:  Minor Code Spec Parameters, static and dynamic.

For static trace points, specifies a decimal value between 1 and 255 that
represents a static trace event within the specified major code.

For dynamic trace points, specifies a decimal value between 1 and 65535 that
represents a dynamic trace event within a specified trace definition file.

Note:   Static and Dynamic trace points cannot be activated within the same
        trace command.  It you want to activate both static and dynamic trace
        points you will have to issue two separate commands.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACE Command:  Event Type Spec Parameters.

The event type defined within a TRACE command allows a trace definition to
create a subset of events dynamic or static within a module.  The association
of groups and types allows for greater granularity of tracing system events.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACE Command:  x Parameter

Specifies a number from 0 through 255, indicating the major event code to be
traced or not to be traced.  A major event code is the number the OS/2
operating system assigns to a major system event, such as opening a file,
writing to a file, or sending output to the screen.  Your technical coordinator
can supply numbers for these codes.

To indicate a major event code (15) is to be traced, enter the following:

TRACE=ON 15


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACE Command:  TDF Spec Parameter

Specifies the name of a trace definition file that contains dynamic trace
points for dynamic link libraries. The dynamic trace points are assigned
numbers between 1 and 65535. For example, to trace DOSCALL1 (2, 4, 5, 6, 7, and
8), enter the following:

TRACE ON DOSCALL1 (2, 4-8)

This TRACE command remains in effect until one of the following occurs:

o The system is powered off.

o The operating system removes the dynamic link library.

o You enter either of the following commands:

    TRACE OFF

  or

    TRACE OFF DOSCALL1

  Notice that the event list is not specified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACE Command:  TDF Keyword Parameter

Specifies the dynamic trace points for the system kernel.  Minor codes, groups,
and types can be specified to promote easier recognition in system tracing.

To activate all dynamic trace points enter the keyword KERNEL without any minor
code specifications as follows:

TRACE ON KERNEL

To trace specific dynamic trace points (5, 7, and 19), enter the following:

TRACE ON KERNEL (5, 7, 19)

To trace on the kernel group keyword MEM, enter the following:

TRACE ON KERNEL (MEM)

To trace on the kernel type keyword API, enter the following:

TRACE ON KERNEL (API)

To enable the association group MEM and types PRE and API, enter the following:

TRACE ON KERNEL (MEM=PRE+API)

The TRACE command remains in effect until one of the following occurs:

o The system is powered off.

o The operating system removes the dynamic link library.

o You enter either of the following commands:

  To turn off all tracing, enter the following:

    TRACE OFF

  To turn off all KERNEL tracing, enter the following:

    TRACE OFF KERNEL

  To turn off all tracing associated with the major code 5, enter the
  following:

    TRACE OFF 5

  Notice that the event list is not specified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACE Command:  /S Parameter

Suspends tracing activity without removing the existing set of trace points.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACE Command:  /R Parameter

Resumes tracing activity for the currently specified set of trace points.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACE Command:  /C Parameter

Clears the contents of the trace buffer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACE Command:  /P Parameter

Specifies the processes to be traced in the system, either a specific process
ID or all future processes.

To activate tracing for all current and future processes, enter:

/P:ALL.

To activate tracing for selected processes, specify the process identification
(pid). (This number is a hexadecimal value supplied by the PSTAT command)

To specify tracing the process ID (pid) of hexadecimal value 0056, enter the
following:

TRACE ON /P:56

o Multiple process IDs can be specified.
o Trace options of Static and Dynamic cannot be used in the same TRACE command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TRACEBUF Command:  X Parameter

Specifies a number from 1 through 63, representing a multiple of 1024 bytes.

To increase the size of the trace buffer to 10KB, type the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:

TRACEBUF=10


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TREE Command:  Drive Parameter

Specifies the drive containing the directories to be listed.

To list the directory names on drive C, enter the following:

TREE C:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TREE Command:  /F Parameter

Displays the names of files in the root directory and in all the
subdirectories.

To list the directory paths and the names of all files in the root directory
and each subdirectory on drive C, enter the following:

TREE C: /F


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TREE Command:  Print Option

To have a directory listing sent to a printer, enter the following:

TREE >PRN


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TREE Command:  Pause Option

To display directory names on the screen and pause with the message --More--
after a full screen of information appears, enter the following:

TREE | MORE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TYPE Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the names of the files to be displayed, including the drive and
directory location.

To display the file FILE1.TXT in the STATUS directory on drive C, enter the
following:

TYPE C:\STATUS\FILE1.TXT

You can display the contents of more than one file at a time. To display the
files FILE1.TXT in the STATUS directory on drive C and FILE2.TXT on drive A,
enter the following:

TYPE C:\STATUS\FILE1.TXT A:FILE2.TXT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TYPE Command:  Print Option

To have the contents of a file named FRIDAY in the current directory sent to a
printer, enter the following:

TYPE FRIDAY >PRN


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TYPE Command:  Pause Option

To look at a file named FRIDAY in the current directory and have the display
pause with the message --More-- after a full screen of information appears,
enter the following:

TYPE FRIDAY | MORE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNDELETE Command: Drive Path and Filename Parameters

Specifies the drive, directory, and name of the file or set of files to
recover.  If not specified, all files in the current directory will be
restored.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNDELETE Command: /L Parameter

Lists deleted files that are available to be recovered without recovering the
files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNDELETE Command: /A Parameter

Recovers all deleted files if they are still present without prompting for
confirmation on each file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNDELETE Command: /S Parameter

Includes all files in the specified directory and all subdirectories.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNDELETE Command: /F Parameter

Removes files so they cannot be recovered.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNPACK Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the drive, directory location, and name of the file to be unpacked or
copied.  A compressed file usually has a @ as the last character of the file
name.

This file can actually contain many files compressed end to end.  If this is
the case, specifying a single source file name may yield several files after
decompression.  All of these files may go to different destinations
(directories).  Their destinations, however, will be displayed on the screen
during decompression.  You must specify the source file name.

To unpack a compressed file named FORMAT.CO@ from the current directory on
drive A to the OS2 directory on drive C, enter the following:

UNPACK A:FORMAT.CO@ C:\OS2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNPACK Command:  Drive and Path Parameters

Specifies the drive and directory to which the file should be placed after it
is decompressed or copied.

If a target drive is specified without a path, the path information stored in
the compressed file will be added to the target drive and the files will be
unpacked (copied) there.  If both target drive and path are specified, the
target drive and path information will override any target path information
stored in the compressed file.

To unpack a compressed file named FORMAT.CO@ from the current drive and
directory to the OS2 subdirectory on drive C, enter the following:

UNPACK FORMAT.CO@ C:\OS2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNPACK Command:  /V Parameter

Verifies that data written to a disk was written correctly. This option causes
UNPACK to run slower because a check is made for each entry recorded on the
disk.

To verify the compressed files on drive A are correctly unpacked and copied to
drive C, enter the following:

UNPACK A:\*.* C:\ /V


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNPACK Command:  /F Parameter

Specifies that files with extended attributes should not be unpacked or copied
if the destination file system does not support extended attributes.

To specify that extended attributes should not be discarded when unpacking or
copying files from drive A to drive C (when drive C does not support extended
attributes), enter the following:

UNPACK A:\*.* C:\ /F


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNPACK Command:  /SHOW Parameter

Displays the target path and file name information saved in the packed file for
every compressed file contained within the file specified by the source file
name.  If /SHOW is specified, the source file name is the only other valid
parameter.

To display the destination path and file name for every compressed file in the
packed file, BUNDLE.DA@, enter the following:

UNPACK BUNDLE.DA@ /SHOW


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNPACK Command:  /N:filename Parameter

Specifies one particular file to extract and decompress from a source file
containing multiple files compressed end to end.

To specify the file, FORMAT.CO@, to be extracted and decompressed from a packed
file, BUNDLE.DA@, containing multiple compressed files, enter the following:

UNPACK BUNDLE.DA@ /N:FORMAT.COM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

VERIFY Command:  ON and OFF Parameters

ON verifies that your files are written correctly to the disk. OFF turns
verification off.  This is the default value.

To verify that your files are written correctly to the disk, enter the
following:

VERIFY ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

VIEW Command:  Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Specifies the drive, directory, and file name of the .INF file to be displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

VIEW Command:  Topic Parameter

Specifies the topic in the IPF online document that is to be displayed.  This
topic must be in the Contents of the IPF document.

To display the Functions topic in the REXX.INF file that is located in the
OS2\BOOK directory on drive C, enter the following:

VIEW C:\OS2\BOOK\REXX FUNCTIONS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

VMDISK Command: Source Drive Parameter

Specifies the source drive, which is the diskette drive where the DOS startup
diskette resides.  Supported formats are: 360KB, 720KB, 1.2MB, 1.44MB, and
2.88MB.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

VMDISK Command: Target Drive and Path Parameter

Specifies the target drive and path for the image file of the DOS startup
diskette.  If the target drive and path are omitted, the default is the current
drive and path. The target drive must have a greater available capacity than
the total capacity of the source drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

VMDISK Command: Filename Parameter

Specifies the file name of the image file of the DOS startup diskette.  This
file name must be provided.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

VOL Command:  Drive Parameter

Specifies the disk volume label to be displayed.

To display the volume labels of both drive C and drive D, enter the following:

VOL C: D:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XCOPY Command:  Source Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Gives the source file name specification.  The source specification can be the
name of a directory or file.  If it is a directory, XCOPY copies all files to
the target specification.  If it is a file name, XCOPY copies the file to the
target specification.  The target specification can be an existing directory or
file or the name of the new directory or file you want to create.

To copy the files in the MEMOS subdirectory on drive C to a newly created
subdirectory named LETTERS on drive A, enter the following:

XCOPY C:\MEMOS A:\LETTERS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XCOPY Command:  Target Drive, Path, Filename Parameters

Gives the target file name specification, which can be the name of a file or
directory.  If it is a file name, XCOPY copies the file to the target
specification.  The target specification can also be a directory or file or the
name of the new directory or file you want to create.

To copy the MEMOS subdirectory on drive C, including all subdirectories and
files within it, to a newly created subdirectory named LETTERS on drive A,
enter the following:

XCOPY C:\MEMOS A:\LETTERS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XCOPY Command:  /D Parameter

Copies files that have been modified on or after the specified date. The date
format varies depending on the COUNTRY statement in the CONFIG.SYS file. The
date formats are as follows:  /D:mm-dd-yy, /D:dd-mm-yy, and /D:yy-mm-dd.

To copy files changed on or after November 12, 1988 in the MEMOS subdirectory
to the root directory on drive A, enter the following:

XCOPY C:\MEMOS A:\ /D:11-12-88


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XCOPY Command:  /S Parameter

Copies subdirectories. Without this parameter, XCOPY works only within a
directory.  This parameter does not create the corresponding directory on the
target if no files have been found on the source.

To copy the subdirectories and their contents from the root directory on drive
C to the root directory on drive A, enter the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XCOPY Command:  /E Parameter

When used with the /S parameter, this copies the entire tree structure while
creating corresponding source directories on the target even if no files have
been found on those source directories.

To copy the REPORTS subdirectory on drive C, including all files and
subdirectories within it, to the root directory on drive A, enter the
following:

XCOPY C:\REPORTS A:\ /S /E


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XCOPY Command:  /P Parameter

Prompts you before performing a physical copy. With this parameter, XCOPY
copies on a file-by-file basis.

To be prompted with (Y/N?) before each file is copied from the MEMOS
subdirectory on drive C to the LETTERS subdirectory on drive A, enter the
following:

XCOPY C:\MEMOS A:\LETTERS /P


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XCOPY Command:  /V Parameter

Verifies that data written to a disk has been written correctly. This option
causes XCOPY to run slower.

To verify that the files written from drive C to drive A are recorded properly,
enter the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /V


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XCOPY Command:  /A Parameter

Copies archived files only.  This parameter does not turn off the archive bit
of the source file.

To copy only those files that have the archive bit set on without changing the
attribute of source drive C when it is copied, type the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /A


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XCOPY Command:  /M Parameter

Copies archived files only.  Unlike /A, this parameter turns off the archive
bit of the source file.  So when you regularly back up the source disk with
XCOPY, using this parameter increases the efficiency of copying.  You should be
aware that the BACKUP command also uses the archive bit. If both the /A and /M
parameters are specified, the one specified last is the one used.

To copy files whose archive bit is set on from the root directory on drive C to
the root directory on drive A, then turn the archive bit of the source file
off, enter the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /M


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XCOPY Command:  /F Parameter

Causes the XCOPY to fail if the source file contains extended attributes and
the destination file system does not support extended attributes. If the /F
parameter is not specified, the XCOPY will succeed if the source file contains
extended attributes and the destination file system does not support them.  The
extended attributes are not copied. If the /F parameter is not specified and
the source file contains needed extended attributes, the XCOPY will fail if the
destination file system does not support extended attributes.  In this
instance, a message appears.

Assume you want to XCOPY a file named REPORTS.TXT to the STATUS directory on
drive D.  You also want the XCOPY to fail if drive D does not support extended
attributes.  Enter the following:

XCOPY REPORTS.TXT D:\STATUS /F


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XCOPY Command:  /H Parameter

Specifies that, in addition to all normal files, files with a hidden attribute
are to be copied from the source location. The files will be copied to the
target location and retain the hidden attribute.  This parameter enables
subdirectories that are hidden to be processed.  Subdirectories in the target
location will have the same attributes as subdirectories in the source
location.

To copy all files, including all hidden files, from the root directory on drive
C to the root directory on drive A, type the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /H


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XCOPY Command:  /T Parameter

Specifies that, in addition to all normal files, files with a system attribute
are to be copied from the source location. The files will be copied to the
target location and retain the system attribute.

To copy all files, including all files with a system attribute, from the root
directory on drive C to the root directory on drive A, type the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /T


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XCOPY Command:  /R Parameter

Specifies that all files in the source location with a read-only attribute will
retain the read-only attribute in the target location.  If you do not use this
parameter, you can restore the read-only attribute by using the ATTRIB command.

To copy all files from the root directory on drive C to the root directory on
drive A and have all files with a read-only attribute retain this attribute,
type the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /R


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XCOPY Command:  /O Parameter

Specifies that any file in the target location with a read-only, system, or
hidden attribute can be overlaid as a result of the copy operation.  If you do
not use this parameter, those files will not be replaced.

To copy all files from the root directory on drive C to the root directory on
drive A and specify that any file with a read-only, system, or hidden attribute
can be overlaid, type the following:

XCOPY C:\ A:\ /O